nextScan Inc

690 S. Industry Way

Suite 10

Meridian, Idaho 83642

208-514-4000
 NextStarPlus Software User Guide
CHAPTER 1 - NEXTSTARPLUS USER GUIDE OVERVIEW ............................................................18
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................................18
GUIDE ORGANIZATION ...............................................................................................................................18
PRODUCT OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................19
Ribbon Scanning....................................................................................................................................19
Production Scanning Solution ...............................................................................................................20
Workflow ...............................................................................................................................................20
Ribbon Storage Device (RSD) ...............................................................................................................20
Eclipse Scanners with RSD (Optional on FlexScan Systems).......................................................................21
FlexScan RSD (Standard System) ...................................................................................................................21
System Components ...............................................................................................................................22
Scanning Method ...................................................................................................................................23
NextStarPlusScan (aka Capture)...........................................................................................................23
CreateHierarchy (aka nextStarCH) ...........................................................................................................................23
NextStarPlusXMLPrep ..............................................................................................................................................24
NextStarGrabService .................................................................................................................................................24
MySQL .......................................................................................................................................................................24
NSController .........................................................................................................................................24
NextStarPlusAuditor..............................................................................................................................24
Editing and Quality Control ......................................................................................................................................25
Output Options ...........................................................................................................................................................26
Output....................................................................................................................................................26
PScan.....................................................................................................................................................27
nextStarPlus Database Creator.............................................................................................................27
Virtual Film ...........................................................................................................................................27
FicheStar ...............................................................................................................................................27
SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................................................................................................28
Hardware Specifications .......................................................................................................................28
FlexScan Series Product Specifications....................................................................................................................28
Eclipse Series Product Specifications.......................................................................................................................31
OPTIONAL PC WORKSTATION PRODUCT SPECS.............................................................................................32
Performance Specifications...................................................................................................................33
Constraints ............................................................................................................................................33
Permissions Check List..........................................................................................................................34
INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................................................35
CHAPTER 2 – SCANNER BASIC HARDWARE ...................................................................................36
FLEXSCAN AND ECLIPSE SCANNING SYSTEMS ...........................................................................................36
FlexScan and Eclipse Camera ...................................................................................................................................36
FlexScan Camera .......................................................................................................................................................36
FlexScan Main System (Base and Tower) ...............................................................................................................36
FlexScan Interchangeable Modules ..........................................................................................................................37
FlexLoader (Option) ..................................................................................................................................................38
FlexLoader Front View .............................................................................................................................................38
FlexLoader Inside Rear View....................................................................................................................................38
FlexLoader Rear View...............................................................................................................................................38
Checking the FlexLoader...........................................................................................................................................39
FlexScan Lens Mount ................................................................................................................................................42
Checking the Lens (FlexScan Roll and Microfiche)................................................................................................43
ECLIPSE CAMERA AND LENS ......................................................................................................................45
Checking the Lens Settings Eclipse Systems ...........................................................................................................45
CHAPTER 3 – FILM THREADING\LOADING - TRUEDPI ...............................................................47
FILM THREADING AND LOADING................................................................................................................47
Threading Roll Film (Eclipse and FlexScan Systems)...........................................................................47

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) ii

 Eclipse Film Threading .........................................................................................................................47
Rotating the Film Guides ......................................................................................................................................48
FlexScan Roll Film Threading ..............................................................................................................48
FlexScan Roll Film Threading Examples ..............................................................................................48
FlexScan Roll Film Threading - Module Type B without the cleaning roller .......................................49
FlexScan Loading Microfiche ...............................................................................................................49
Manual Film Loading .......................................................................................................................................49
FlexScan Microfiche Platen Inserts ..........................................................................................................................50
Glass platen configuration for Jumbo size fiche .................................................................................................50
Glass platen configuration for Standard size fiche..............................................................................................51
FlexLoader (optional attachment).........................................................................................................54
How to Install the FlexLoader ..............................................................................................................................54
TRUEDPI TARGET CHART (FLEXSCAN SYSTEMS)......................................................................................57
How TrueDPI is calculated ..............................................................................................................................57
TrueDPI Target Chart (FlexScan Only) ..........................................................................................................57
RollFilm\Microfiche rue DPI Target Chart.....................................................................................................57
BASE PATH .................................................................................................................................................59
BASE PATH DIRECTORY .............................................................................................................................59
Base Path Working Directories.............................................................................................................59
NSBASECONFIG.EXE ..................................................................................................................................60
Changing the Base Path Location (Optional) .......................................................................................60
NSCONTROLLER OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................62
NSCONTROLLER ........................................................................................................................................62
NextStarPlus Controller Menu ..............................................................................................................63
NextStarPlus Servers .............................................................................................................................63
Host Name.......................................................................................................................................................63
IP Addresses...................................................................................................................................................63
Port ....................................................................................................................................................................63
Busy ..................................................................................................................................................................63
Ribbon Locations ...........................................................................................................................................63
Ribbon Shares ................................................................................................................................................63
Refresh .............................................................................................................................................................63
NextStarPlus Outputs ............................................................................................................................63
Host Name.......................................................................................................................................................64
Busy ..................................................................................................................................................................64
Refresh .............................................................................................................................................................64
NextStarPlus Drives ..............................................................................................................................64
Host Name.......................................................................................................................................................64
Ribbon Location..............................................................................................................................................64
Ribbon Share ..................................................................................................................................................64
Application ID ..................................................................................................................................................64
Disk Free Bytes ..............................................................................................................................................64
Disk Total Bytes..............................................................................................................................................64
State ..................................................................................................................................................................64
x..........................................................................................................................................................................64
m ........................................................................................................................................................................65
Refresh .............................................................................................................................................................65
Save ..................................................................................................................................................................65
NextStarPlus Drives Current States ..........................................................................................................................65
Scan Busy ..........................................................................................................................................................65
Output Available...............................................................................................................................................65
Output Busy.......................................................................................................................................................65
Not Busy............................................................................................................................................................65
Jobs........................................................................................................................................................66
Filters......................................................................................................................................................................66
Available Jobs........................................................................................................................................................66
Individual Job ........................................................................................................................................................66
Job ID................................................................................................................................................................67
Batch Count.....................................................................................................................................................67
Create Time.....................................................................................................................................................67

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) iii

 Enable Continuous Naming.........................................................................................................................67
Batch ID............................................................................................................................................................68
Job Operations ...............................................................................................................................................68
Delete................................................................................................................................................................68
Batches ..................................................................................................................................................68
Filters......................................................................................................................................................................68
Available Batches ..................................................................................................................................................69
Individual Batch ....................................................................................................................................................69
Job ID................................................................................................................................................................69
Batch ID............................................................................................................................................................69
Ribbon Count ..................................................................................................................................................69
Create Time.....................................................................................................................................................69
Output Batch ...................................................................................................................................................69
as a Whole.......................................................................................................................................................69
Output Batch ...................................................................................................................................................70
as a Whole cont’.............................................................................................................................................70
Batch Ready For Output...............................................................................................................................70
Enable Continuous Naming.........................................................................................................................70
Ribbons ID +\-.................................................................................................................................................71
Ribbon ID .........................................................................................................................................................71
Batch Operations ...........................................................................................................................................71
Ribbons..................................................................................................................................................71
Filters......................................................................................................................................................................72
Available Ribbons .................................................................................................................................................72
Individual Ribbon..................................................................................................................................................72
Job ID................................................................................................................................................................73
Batch ID............................................................................................................................................................73
Edit.....................................................................................................................................................................73
Ribbon ID .........................................................................................................................................................73
Change .............................................................................................................................................................73
Server Host Name .........................................................................................................................................73
Server Disk Location .....................................................................................................................................73
Server Share Path .........................................................................................................................................73
Scan Time........................................................................................................................................................73
Last State Change Time...............................................................................................................................73
Current State...................................................................................................................................................73
Last Ribbon In Batch .....................................................................................................................................74
Scanner ............................................................................................................................................................74
Group ................................................................................................................................................................74
Index Record Locked ....................................................................................................................................74
Logs...................................................................................................................................................................74
Output Logs .....................................................................................................................................................74
Output Logs cont’ ...........................................................................................................................................75
NextStarPlus Ribbon Operations ...............................................................................................................75
NextStarPlus Ribbons Current States .......................................................................................................................75
Ribbon Location Options ......................................................................................................................................78
Delete Options .......................................................................................................................................................79
State Change Options ............................................................................................................................................79
Group Change Options..........................................................................................................................................80
Administration .......................................................................................................................................80
Current NextStarPlus Controller Base Path.........................................................................................................80
Ribbons\Jobs\Batches Page Refresh Rate (seconds)...........................................................................................81
Refresh ...................................................................................................................................................................81
Exit ..............................................................................................................................................................................81
Menu View Options ...............................................................................................................................81
Ribbons Menu View ..................................................................................................................................................81
Ribbons in Main Menu..........................................................................................................................................81
Ribbons in Indexing Menu – (Optional) ..............................................................................................................82
Indexing Filters and Options – (Optional) ...........................................................................................................82
Ribbons in Groups Menu – (Optional).................................................................................................................82
Filters .................................................................................................................................................................82
Available Ribbon Groups.................................................................................................................................83

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) iv

 Delete Options...................................................................................................................................................83
New Group Options ..........................................................................................................................................83
Administration Menu View.......................................................................................................................................83
Main........................................................................................................................................................................83
Ribbon States .........................................................................................................................................................84
Available User Ribbon States ..........................................................................................................................84
How to create a custom ribbon state:...............................................................................................................84
How to delete a ribbon state.............................................................................................................................84
State Transitions................................................................................................................................................85
How to Change a Ribbon State Transition......................................................................................................86
Image Indexing – (Optional).................................................................................................................................86
Use Image Indexing..........................................................................................................................................86
Image Indexing Cutting Level .........................................................................................................................87
Reports – (Optional)..............................................................................................................................................87
Filters .................................................................................................................................................................87
Generate.............................................................................................................................................................87
Example Report: ......................................................................................................................................87
APACHE2, MYSQL, NEXTSTARCH, NEXTSTARXMLPREP AND NEXTSTARGRABSERVICE ........................88
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................88
Apache2 .................................................................................................................................................88
CreateHierarchy (nextStarCH) Basic Background and Information ....................................................88
Start nexStarCH..........................................................................................................................................................89
Starting Createhierarchy nextStarCH as a Service..............................................................................................89
Start CreateHierarchy (nexStarCH) as a service from a command line........................................................89
Start CreateHierarchy (nexStarCH) as a service from the Service Control Manager ..................................89
Running CreateHierarchy from a Command Line..........................................................................................90
Stop CreateHierarchy ............................................................................................................................................90
Stopping CreateHierarchy as a Service ...........................................................................................................90
Stopping CreateHierarchy from a Command Line.........................................................................................90
CreateHierarachyConfigurator.exe Dialog Box ...................................................................................91
Input/Output File........................................................................................................................................................92
Network Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................92
Listen On All Addresses...................................................................................................................................92
Available\Selected ............................................................................................................................................92
Listening Port:...................................................................................................................................................93
Disk Configuration.....................................................................................................................................................93
Ribbon Locations...................................................................................................................................................93
Add .........................................................................................................................................................................93
Edit .........................................................................................................................................................................93
Alternate Information .......................................................................................................................................94
Remove ..................................................................................................................................................................94
Disk Block Multiplier............................................................................................................................................94
Roll Film\Fiche Warning Level (GB) ..................................................................................................................94
User Configuration.....................................................................................................................................................95
Service Control...........................................................................................................................................................95
Status Information......................................................................................................................................................95
NEXTSTARPLUSXMLPREP BACKGROUND ................................................................................................95
NEXTSTARGRAB BACKGROUND ................................................................................................................96
CHAPTER 7 - NEXTSTARPLUS CAPTURE FOR ROLL FILM ........................................................97
NEXTSTARPLUS CAPTURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................97
MAIN SETUP WINDOW FOR ROLL FILM ......................................................................................................97
Roll Film Capture Window....................................................................................................................97
File, Edit, and Help Menus....................................................................................................................98
File ..............................................................................................................................................................................98
NSC Configuration Files.......................................................................................................................................98
New Config .......................................................................................................................................................98
Open Config ......................................................................................................................................................98
Save Config .......................................................................................................................................................98
Save Config As .................................................................................................................................................99
Exit.....................................................................................................................................................................99

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) v

 Edit ..............................................................................................................................................................................99
Preferences .............................................................................................................................................................99
Roll Film Preferences Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................99
NextStarPlus Server Setup ....................................................................................................................................99
Remote Host Address .......................................................................................................................................99
Operator .............................................................................................................................................................99
Search For Sever (Currently Not Available).................................................................................................100
Always Overwrite Ribbons ............................................................................................................................100
General Setup ...........................................................................................................................................................100
Film Format.....................................................................................................................................................100
Output Template .............................................................................................................................................100
Frame Detection Setup ........................................................................................................................................101
Automatic Frame Detection ...........................................................................................................................101
Frame Detection..............................................................................................................................................101
Grid Template (For COM Microfiche Only) - See Chapter 7 - Capture for Microfiche................101
Roll film Options .................................................................................................................................................101
Real Time Image Display...............................................................................................................................101
Pancake Reel Support.....................................................................................................................................102
Auto Rewind ...................................................................................................................................................102
End of Roll (in): ..............................................................................................................................................102
End of Roll Method ........................................................................................................................................102
Fiche Options (For Microfiche Only) - See Chapter 7 - Capture for Microfiche ...........................................102
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................102
Advance ....................................................................................................................................................................103
Hierarchy Settings ...............................................................................................................................................103
Create Hierarchy On Scanner.........................................................................................................................103
Selected Levels (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)....................................................................................................................103
Compression Settings ..........................................................................................................................................103
Compression Type ..........................................................................................................................................104
JPEG and JPEG-XR Options .........................................................................................................................104
Indexing settings..................................................................................................................................................104
Enable Indexing ..............................................................................................................................................104
Submit On End Of Scan .................................................................................................................................104
MISC ....................................................................................................................................................................105
Demo Mode.....................................................................................................................................................105
How to enable full roll demo loop:.......................................................................................................105
How to enable demo loop for set length: .............................................................................................105
Enable Camera Calibrated Mode...................................................................................................................105
OCR Settings – Virtual Film Custom Feature .......................................................................................................105
Remaster Settings.....................................................................................................................................................106
View ..........................................................................................................................................................................106
Indexing................................................................................................................................................................106
Help ...........................................................................................................................................................................106
Help Topics..........................................................................................................................................................106
About NextStarPlus.............................................................................................................................................107
Keyboard Commands ..........................................................................................................................107
Film Setup.................................................................................................................................................................107
DPI........................................................................................................................................................................107
Reduction Ratio ...................................................................................................................................................107
Film Type (mm)...................................................................................................................................................107
Polarity .................................................................................................................................................................108
Supply Reel..........................................................................................................................................................108
True DPI on Film.................................................................................................................................................108
Eclipse .............................................................................................................................................................108
FlexScan ..........................................................................................................................................................108
Film Reversed ......................................................................................................................................................108
Options: ................................................................................................................................................................108
Focus .........................................................................................................................................................................109
How to Focus Eclipse\Flexscan Roll Film.........................................................................................................109
NextStarPlus Roll Focus Window Parameters ..................................................................................................112
OK ........................................................................................................................................................................112
Cancel...................................................................................................................................................................112

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) vi

 Capture .................................................................................................................................................................112
Run/Stop.................................................................................................................................................112
Snap ........................................................................................................................................................113
Reduction Ratio ...................................................................................................................................................113
Flat Field ..............................................................................................................................................................113
How to perform Flat Filed Correction...........................................................................................................113
Reduction .............................................................................................................................................................114
Display Mode .............................................................................................................................................114
Scan Info . ..............................................................................................................................................115
Light Level ............................................................................................................................................115
Histogram ..............................................................................................................................................115
Composite .............................................................................................................................................115
Pixel Depth ......................................................................................................................................................116
Polarity ............................................................................................................................................................116
Lamp ................................................................................................................................................................116
Focus ....................................................................................................................................................................116
Quality – Eclipse Only ...................................................................................................................................116
Focus Indicator – Eclipse Only......................................................................................................................116
Save Point – Eclipse Only ..............................................................................................................................116
Image ....................................................................................................................................................................116
Options .................................................................................................................................................................117
Camera Cal Mode........................................................................................................................................117
Enable Flat Field ..........................................................................................................................................117
Auto Exposure ..............................................................................................................................................117
Gamma .................................................................................................................................................................117
Gamma White\Black ......................................................................................................................................117
Gamma Black .............................................................................................................................................118
Gamma White.............................................................................................................................................118
F1\F2................................................................................................................................................................118
Image Stability – Eclipse Roll Film Only..........................................................................................................118
Inch Worm......................................................................................................................................................119
Shift .................................................................................................................................................................119
Crawl ...............................................................................................................................................................119
Defaults ..........................................................................................................................................................119
Save ................................................................................................................................................................119
Production Setup ......................................................................................................................................................119
Job ID ...................................................................................................................................................................119
Use Today’s Date ................................................................................................................................................119
Batch ID ...............................................................................................................................................................119
Roll Name ............................................................................................................................................................119
Auto Increment ....................................................................................................................................................119
Value................................................................................................................................................................120
Configure.........................................................................................................................................................120
Scan Control .............................................................................................................................................................121
Start\Stop..............................................................................................................................................................121
Pause Display.......................................................................................................................................................121
Film Control .............................................................................................................................................................121
Arrow Buttons .....................................................................................................................................................121
Load/Unload ........................................................................................................................................................121
Performance..............................................................................................................................................................121
Performance - Status Indicators .....................................................................................................................121
Performance - Statistic: Only Available while Scanning (%)......................................................................122
Status Bar Information.............................................................................................................................................122
CHAPTER 8 - CAPTURE FOR MICROFICHE...................................................................................123
CAPTURE OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................123
MAIN SETUP WINDOW FOR MICROFICHE .................................................................................................123
Microfiche Capture Window ...............................................................................................................123
File, Edit, and Help Menus..................................................................................................................123
File ............................................................................................................................................................................123
NSC Configuration Files ................................................................................................................................124

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) vii

 New Config .....................................................................................................................................................124
Open Config ....................................................................................................................................................124
Save Config .....................................................................................................................................................124
Save Config As ...............................................................................................................................................124
Exit...................................................................................................................................................................125
Edit ............................................................................................................................................................................125
Preferences General .................................................................................................................................................125
NextStarPlus Server Setup ..................................................................................................................................125
Remote Host Address .....................................................................................................................................125
Operator ...........................................................................................................................................................125
Search For Sever (Currently Not Available).................................................................................................125
Always Overwrite Ribbons ............................................................................................................................126
General Setup.......................................................................................................................................................126
Film Format (Feature does not apply to Microfiche scanning) ...................................................................126
Output Template .............................................................................................................................................126
Frame Detection Setup ........................................................................................................................................126
Automatic Frame Detection ...........................................................................................................................126
Frame Detection..............................................................................................................................................126
Grid Template .................................................................................................................................................126
Roll Film Options (For Roll Film Only) See Chapter 6 – Capture for Roll Film ...........................................127
Fiche Options without FlexLoader.....................................................................................................................127
Fiche Options with FlexLoader ..........................................................................................................................127
Auto Unload ....................................................................................................................................................127
Auto Load - FlexLoader .................................................................................................................................127
Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID............................................................................................................127
Fiche Options with FlexLoader...............................................................................................................................127
Loader Settings ....................................................................................................................................................128
Configure .............................................................................................................................................................128
Loader Setting Variables Version 4 ...................................................................................................................128
Load......................................................................................................................................................................130
Save As.................................................................................................................................................................130
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................130
Advance ....................................................................................................................................................................131
Hierarchy Settings ...............................................................................................................................................131
Create Hierarchy On Scanner.........................................................................................................................131
Selected Levels (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)....................................................................................................................131
Compression Settings ..........................................................................................................................................131
Compression Type ..........................................................................................................................................132
JPEG and JPEG-XR Options .........................................................................................................................132
Indexing settings..................................................................................................................................................132
Enable Indexing ..............................................................................................................................................132
Submit On End Of Scan .................................................................................................................................132
MISC ....................................................................................................................................................................133
Demo Mode.....................................................................................................................................................133
Enable Camera Calibrated Mode...................................................................................................................133
OCR Settings – Virtual Film Custom Feature .......................................................................................................133
Remaster Settings.....................................................................................................................................................134
OK\Cance.............................................................................................................................................................134
Help ...........................................................................................................................................................................134
Help Topics ..............................................................................................................................................................134
About NextStarPlus..................................................................................................................................................134
Keyboard Commands ..........................................................................................................................135
Film Setup.................................................................................................................................................................135
DPI........................................................................................................................................................................135
Polarity .................................................................................................................................................................135
True DPI on Film.................................................................................................................................................135
Effective Reduction Ratio...................................................................................................................................135
Focus/Reduction.......................................................................................................................................................136
Stop Preview Scan ...............................................................................................................................................136
Close Up View.....................................................................................................................................................137
Detect True DPI...................................................................................................................................................137
Pixel Depth...........................................................................................................................................................137

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) viii

 Start/Stop Focus...................................................................................................................................................137
Unload/Load ........................................................................................................................................................137
Home ....................................................................................................................................................................137
Gamma White ......................................................................................................................................................137
Gamma Black ......................................................................................................................................................137
Enhanced Gamma Curve ....................................................................................................................................138
Lamp.....................................................................................................................................................................138
Top Lamp – (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................138
Rows.....................................................................................................................................................................138
Polarity .................................................................................................................................................................138
How to Focus FlexScan Microfiche .......................................................................................................................139
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................140
Manual Setup............................................................................................................................................................140
Preview Scan........................................................................................................................................................140
Define Rows ........................................................................................................................................................141
Row colors................................................................................................................................................................141
How to Delete a Row or Multiple Rows............................................................................................................141
Apply Custom Row Settings (Optional) ............................................................................................................142
Row Definition Options ......................................................................................................................................143
Rows ................................................................................................................................................................143
Lines – Used with FicheStar Application for scanning COM microfiche ..................................................143
How to Check Which Settings are Applied to a Row .......................................................................................144
Keyboard and Mouse Commands........................................................................................................145
Expand or Decrease View .......................................................................................................................................145
How to Adjust Rows Manually...............................................................................................................................145
Single Row...........................................................................................................................................................145
Multiple Rows .....................................................................................................................................................145
All Rows...............................................................................................................................................................145
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................147
Production Setup ......................................................................................................................................................147
Job ID ...................................................................................................................................................................147
Batch Name..........................................................................................................................................................147
Auto Increment (Used for Batch ID) .............................................................................................................147
Output Batch As A Whole .............................................................................................................................148
Enable Continuous Numbering......................................................................................................................148
Fiche ID................................................................................................................................................................148
Auto Increment ...............................................................................................................................................148
Last In Batch ...................................................................................................................................................149
Scan Control .............................................................................................................................................................150
Start ......................................................................................................................................................................150
Row Selection ......................................................................................................................................................150
Fiche Row Selection .......................................................................................................................................151
Pause Display.......................................................................................................................................................151
Platen Control...........................................................................................................................................................151
Load/Unload ........................................................................................................................................................151
Status Bar Information.............................................................................................................................................151
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................151
Batch Setup...............................................................................................................................................................152
CHAPTER 9 - NEXTSTARPLUS AUDITOR SOFTWARE ................................................................153
NEXTSTARPLUS AUDITOR OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................153
NEXTSTARPLUSAUDITOR MAIN WINDOW ...............................................................................................153
Keyboard and Mouse Commands........................................................................................................154
Expand or Decrease View .......................................................................................................................................154
Selecting Frames\Images .........................................................................................................................................154
How to select a single frame\image...............................................................................................................154
How to select random frames\images............................................................................................................154
How to select a group of images\frames in sequential order .......................................................................154
How to select all frames\images ....................................................................................................................154
How to select all odd or even frames\images................................................................................................154
Box Colors in Images View ....................................................................................................................................155

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) ix

 Drawing frames and images manually....................................................................................................................155
Keyboard shortcuts ..................................................................................................................................................163
Left-click Mouse Commands ..................................................................................................................................164
Box Colors in Blips View........................................................................................................................................164
Blip View Right Mouse Click Options...................................................................................................................165
Alt Number ..........................................................................................................................................................166
Set New Blip Size................................................................................................................................................166
Skip Blip ..............................................................................................................................................................167
Delete Blip ...........................................................................................................................................................168
Add Blip ...............................................................................................................................................................168
Add New Blip Size..............................................................................................................................................169
Change Blip Type................................................................................................................................................169
View or Change Deskew Angle .........................................................................................................................169
Add Image to New Frame...................................................................................................................................170
Add Image to New or Existing Frame ...............................................................................................................171
Add Frame ...........................................................................................................................................................171
Add Frame with Blip...........................................................................................................................................172
Select multiple images in a row..........................................................................................................................172
Right-click Mouse Commands................................................................................................................................173
Blips......................................................................................................................................................................173
Deskew .................................................................................................................................................................174
Frames ..................................................................................................................................................................175
Images ..................................................................................................................................................................175
None .....................................................................................................................................................................176
File ......................................................................................................................................................176
Open ..........................................................................................................................................................................177
How to Select A Ribbon .....................................................................................................................................177
Filters ...............................................................................................................................................................178
Available Ribbons...........................................................................................................................................178
Legacy Ribbon Support..................................................................................................................................179
Options – (Optional Index Software Required – not all releases will have this option avalible)..............179
General Settings .......................................................................................................................................................179
Open Read Only ..................................................................................................................................................179
Available Ribbon States – (optional)......................................................................................................................180
Use Alternate States ............................................................................................................................................180
Available Film Types – (Optional) ....................................................................................................................180
OK\Cancel .......................................................................................................................................................180
Load Grid Template – (Microfiche Only) ..............................................................................................................181
Save...........................................................................................................................................................................181
Save Grid Template - (Microfiche Only) ...............................................................................................................181
Existing Templates ..............................................................................................................................................181
How to Save a Grid template: ........................................................................................................................181
How to over write an existing template: .......................................................................................................182
Shortcut currently used by: ............................................................................................................................182
New Template......................................................................................................................................................182
Template Name ...............................................................................................................................................182
Shortcut: ..........................................................................................................................................................182
Finish Audit ..............................................................................................................................................................182
Finish Batch..............................................................................................................................................................182
Processing a batch in the Auditor .......................................................................................................183
Exit ............................................................................................................................................................................183
Edit ......................................................................................................................................................183
Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste.....................................................................................................................................183
Select All Frames .....................................................................................................................................................184
Mirror........................................................................................................................................................................184
Reverse......................................................................................................................................................................184
View.....................................................................................................................................................184
Toolbar and Status Bar ............................................................................................................................................184
Current Overlay........................................................................................................................................................185
NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window..................................................................................................................186
Ribbon Header..........................................................................................................................................................188
Zoom In.....................................................................................................................................................................189

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) x

 Zoom Out..................................................................................................................................................................189
Ribbon Views.......................................................................................................................................189
Ribbon Review Default View .................................................................................................................................189
Ribbon Review Default Menu.................................................................................................................................190
Digital Viewer ..........................................................................................................................................................190
Digital Viewer with Zoomed In (+) Image ........................................................................................................191
Digital Viewer Showing the Ribbon Search Options........................................................................................191
Digital Film Viewer Available Keyboard\Mouse Commands and Features ...................................................192
Search Bar.....................................................................................................................................................192
Print\Email\Save...........................................................................................................................................192
Scroll Bars......................................................................................................................................................192
Thumbnail Scroll Bars .................................................................................................................................192
Zoom in\out....................................................................................................................................................192
Fit to Window ................................................................................................................................................192
Full Size..........................................................................................................................................................192
Output Options..............................................................................................................................................192
Save As ..........................................................................................................................................................192
NS1, NS2 or NS3 .........................................................................................................................................192
Blackout..........................................................................................................................................................192
Initial Output Numbering.............................................................................................................................192
Output Definition View ................................................................................................................................192
Deskew...........................................................................................................................................................192
Rotate .............................................................................................................................................................192
Mirror...............................................................................................................................................................192
Goto View ......................................................................................................................................................193
Ribbon Review – (Optional) ...................................................................................................................................193
Analog View.............................................................................................................................................................193
Analog Viewer Zoomed Out (-) View ...............................................................................................................194
Analog with Index Search...................................................................................................................................194
Analog Viewer Available Keyboard\Mouse Commands and Features ...........................................................195
Background Color ........................................................................................................................................195
Ribbon Color (black or white)....................................................................................................................195
Mouse Scroll Roller......................................................................................................................................195
Stop Scroll......................................................................................................................................................195
Mouse .............................................................................................................................................................195
Up\Down Arrow Keys ..................................................................................................................................195
Left\Right Arrow Keys .................................................................................................................................195
Cap Lock + R ................................................................................................................................................195
Shift+R............................................................................................................................................................195
M ......................................................................................................................................................................196
Shift+M ...........................................................................................................................................................196
Print\Email\Save...........................................................................................................................................196
Scroll Bars......................................................................................................................................................196
Thumbnail Scroll Bars .................................................................................................................................196
Zoom in\out....................................................................................................................................................196
Output Options..............................................................................................................................................196
Save As ..........................................................................................................................................................196
Rotate .............................................................................................................................................................196
Mirror...............................................................................................................................................................196
Goto View ......................................................................................................................................................196
Quick Image ........................................................................................................................................196
Ribbon Settings....................................................................................................................................................197
Rotate...............................................................................................................................................................197
Mirror...............................................................................................................................................................197
Enhancements ......................................................................................................................................................197
Filter Drop Down Arrow ................................................................................................................................197
Contrast Scroll Bar..........................................................................................................................................198
Bright ...............................................................................................................................................................198
Bitonal ..................................................................................................................................................................198
Memory Presets Buttons (1, 2 and 3)......................................................................................................................198
Goto View............................................................................................................................................199
Blip .......................................................................................................................................................................199

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xi

 Goto Button..........................................................................................................................................................199
Search ...................................................................................................................................................................199
Commands ...........................................................................................................................................................199
Search Text Box ..................................................................................................................................................200
No Blips - How to search for a single Frame or Image ....................................................................................200
Two Level Blip - How to search for a single page within a document blip ..............................................200
Two-Level Blip - How to search for all images in a document...................................................................200
Two Level Blip - How to search for all documents in a ribbon ..................................................................200
Three-Level Blip - How to search for all images in a Folder ......................................................................200
Search Text Box con’t.........................................................................................................................................201
Three Level Blip - How to search for all folders in a ribbon.......................................................................201
Previous\Next.......................................................................................................................................................201
Previous Next ...........................................................................................................................................................201
Tools ....................................................................................................................................................201
Tools (menu views)..................................................................................................................................................201
Blips View ...........................................................................................................................................................202
Deskew View.......................................................................................................................................................202
Frames View ........................................................................................................................................................203
Images View ........................................................................................................................................................203
None View ...........................................................................................................................................................204
Administration ................................................................................................................................................204
Frame Detection..............................................................................................................................................204
Blackout ....................................................................................................................................................................205
Initial Output Numbering ....................................................................................................................205
Alt Number ..........................................................................................................................................206
Blip Name ............................................................................................................................................206
Merge Frame(s) ........................................................................................................................................................206
Vertically Split Frames (s).......................................................................................................................................206
Horizontally Split Frame (s) ....................................................................................................................................206
Fiche Grid Wizard – (Microfiche Only).................................................................................................................206
How to Configure the Fiche Grid Wizard for All Rows...................................................................................207
How to Configure the Fiche Grid Wizard for a Single or Selected Rows .......................................................208
How to Deskew a Row in a Grid template. .......................................................................................................210
How to Deskew All Rows in a Grid template. ..................................................................................................210
How to Deskew Using Deskew view.................................................................................................................211
Apply To..........................................................................................................................................................211
Column Option................................................................................................................................................211
Options......................................................................................................................................................................212
Minimum Frame Size: Height/Width.................................................................................................................212
Preview Window Displays: Scanned Data/Output Data...................................................................................212
Default Naming Options .....................................................................................................................................212
Finish Audit .........................................................................................................................................................212
Default Image Output Directory.........................................................................................................................213
Frame Expand/Contract Size ..............................................................................................................................213
Image Expand/Contract Size ..............................................................................................................................213
Frame Data Parsing (Shrink Frames) .................................................................................................................213
Empty Batch ID ...................................................................................................................................................213
Ribbon Search Dialog Options ...........................................................................................................................213
Default Index Output Settings ............................................................................................................................214
Add Image Options .............................................................................................................................................214
Open Dialog Options...........................................................................................................................................214
Setup.....................................................................................................................................................................215
General Settings ..............................................................................................................................................215
Available Ribbon States .................................................................................................................................215
Available Ribbon States .................................................................................................................................216
Initial Output Numbers .......................................................................................................................................216
Ribbon Search Dialog Options ...........................................................................................................................217
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................217
Output Options .........................................................................................................................................................217
Frame Expander .......................................................................................................................................................218
Frame Contractor .....................................................................................................................................................218
Image Expander........................................................................................................................................................218

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xii

 Image Contractor......................................................................................................................................................218
Grid Templates – (Microfiche Only) ......................................................................................................................218
Existing Template Shortcut........................................................................................................................219
Shortcut: .........................................................................................................................................................219
Shortcut currently used by: ........................................................................................................................219
Delete..............................................................................................................................................................219
Save ................................................................................................................................................................219
Available Templates ....................................................................................................................................219
Shortcut: .........................................................................................................................................................219
Shortcut currently used by: ........................................................................................................................219
Add ..................................................................................................................................................................219
Delete..............................................................................................................................................................219
Output Templates .....................................................................................................................................................219
Existing Template Shortcut........................................................................................................................220
Shortcut: .........................................................................................................................................................220
Shortcut currently used by: ........................................................................................................................220
Delete..............................................................................................................................................................220
Save ................................................................................................................................................................220
Available Templates ....................................................................................................................................220
Shortcut: .........................................................................................................................................................220
Shortcut currently used by: ........................................................................................................................220
Add ..................................................................................................................................................................220
Delete..............................................................................................................................................................220
Accept Frame ...........................................................................................................................................................220
Accept Image............................................................................................................................................................220
Delete Frame (s) .......................................................................................................................................................221
Delete Image (s) .......................................................................................................................................................221
Fixed Frame Size Setup .......................................................................................................................221
Existing Sizes ..................................................................................................................................................222
Add New Size .................................................................................................................................................222
Tagging Frames\Images with a Set Fixed Size ......................................................................................................223
How to apply Fixed Size to a single Image\Frame.......................................................................................223
How to select a single frame\image......................................................................................................223
How to select random frames\images............................................................................................................223
How to select all frames\images ....................................................................................................................223
OK\Cancel .......................................................................................................................................................223
Skip Blip or Frame...................................................................................................................................................223
Index Image (s)or Frame (s)- Optional ...................................................................................................................224
Image Notes - Optional............................................................................................................................................224
Administration .....................................................................................................................................225
Job Administration ...................................................................................................................................................225
Batch Administration ...............................................................................................................................................226
Ribbons Administration...........................................................................................................................................226
Index Entry Administration .....................................................................................................................................227
Processing a Batch in the Auditor...........................................................................................................................227
Frame Detection .......................................................................................................................................................228
NS1............................................................................................................................................................................228
General Options ...................................................................................................................................................228
Refresh List Button ....................................................................................................................................228
Configuration Name .......................................................................................................................................229
Ribbon Level ...................................................................................................................................................229
Threshold Adjust.............................................................................................................................................229
Horizontal Detection Type .............................................................................................................................229
Frame Sizing ........................................................................................................................................................230
Minimum Frame Width..................................................................................................................................230
OK ........................................................................................................................................................................230
Cancel...................................................................................................................................................................230
Save As.................................................................................................................................................................230
NS2............................................................................................................................................................................230
Display Window ..................................................................................................................................................231
Scroll Bar ....................................................................................................................................................231
Graph Area..................................................................................................................................................231

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xiii

 Display Options ...................................................................................................................................................231
General Options ...................................................................................................................................................232
Configuration Name...................................................................................................................................232
Drop Down Arrow.................................................................................................................................232
Refresh List.................................................................................................................................................232
Detect Type Hint ........................................................................................................................................232
First Page ....................................................................................................................................................233
Frame Expand Width .................................................................................................................................233
Detect Skew................................................................................................................................................233
Horizontal Channels .......................................................................................................................................233
Frame Expand Height ................................................................................................................................234
Ribbon Level ..............................................................................................................................................234
Edge Filter Size...............................................................................................................................................234
Detect Width Percent .................................................................................................................................234
Rearm Distance ..........................................................................................................................................235
Threshold Percent.......................................................................................................................................235
Detect Offset Percent .................................................................................................................................235
Advance Parameters.................................................................................................................................................236
Detect Options .....................................................................................................................................................236
Dynamic Threshold ....................................................................................................................................236
Cut Long Pages ..........................................................................................................................................236
Minimum Width..............................................................................................................................................236
Minimum Height.............................................................................................................................................237
Minimum Gap ............................................................................................................................................237
Blip to Blip Detection ................................................................................................................................237
Blip Position ...............................................................................................................................................237
Blip Offset ..................................................................................................................................................238
Maximum Width ........................................................................................................................................238
Maximum Frame Height............................................................................................................................238
Maximum Frame Gap ................................................................................................................................238
New Volume Gap.......................................................................................................................................238
Horizontal Detection Only.........................................................................................................................238
Inside Out Detection ..................................................................................................................................239
Fixed Sizing .........................................................................................................................................................239
Available Sizes................................................................................................................................................239
Custom ........................................................................................................................................................239
Fixed Horizontal\Vertical Size..................................................................................................................239
Fixed Horizontal Size............................................................................................................................239
Horizontal Size ...........................................................................................................................................239
Horizontal Location ...................................................................................................................................239
Frame Expand Width .................................................................................................................................239
Fixed Vertical Size ................................................................................................................................240
Frame Expand Height ................................................................................................................................240
Vertical Size ...............................................................................................................................................240
Vertical Location........................................................................................................................................240
Units on Original .................................................................................................................................................240
Advance Blips......................................................................................................................................................240
Auto Size Detection ...................................................................................................................................240
Pages without blips ....................................................................................................................................240
Blip Levels..................................................................................................................................................241
Page Size Blip.............................................................................................................................................241
Document Size Blip ...................................................................................................................................241
Folder Size Blip..........................................................................................................................................241
OK ........................................................................................................................................................................241
Cancel...................................................................................................................................................................241
Save As.................................................................................................................................................................241
NS3............................................................................................................................................................................242
General Options ...................................................................................................................................................242
Refresh List Button ....................................................................................................................................242
Configuration Name .......................................................................................................................................242
Frame Sizing ........................................................................................................................................................242
First Frame Start .............................................................................................................................................242

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xiv

 Frame Width....................................................................................................................................................242
Full Fiche Row (Microfiche Only) ................................................................................................................242
OK ........................................................................................................................................................................243
Cancel...................................................................................................................................................................243
Save As.................................................................................................................................................................243
Help .....................................................................................................................................................243
MENU TOOL BAR .....................................................................................................................................243
CONFIGURING YOUR OUTPUT AND NAMING OPTIONS .............................................................................246
Output Options ....................................................................................................................................247
How to Open the Setup Output Options window: ........................................................................................247
Output Options Display Window.........................................................................................................249
Output Options Parameters.................................................................................................................250
Image File Type .......................................................................................................................................................250
JPEG.....................................................................................................................................................................250
Tiff Grayscale ......................................................................................................................................................250
Tiff Group IV.......................................................................................................................................................251
AutoThreshold Basic ......................................................................................................................................251
Bitonal Threshold ...........................................................................................................................................251
Multipage.........................................................................................................................................................251
AutoThreshold ................................................................................................................................................251
CALS Group IV...................................................................................................................................................252
PNG ......................................................................................................................................................................252
JPEG 2000 ...........................................................................................................................................................253
PDF:JPEG ............................................................................................................................................................253
Grayscale – TIF JPEG (JTIF) .............................................................................................................................253
Extract – (not available at this time) .......................................................................................................................253
Rotate ........................................................................................................................................................................254
Mirror........................................................................................................................................................................254
Deskew......................................................................................................................................................................254
Min Angle...............................................................................................................................................................254
Invert Color ..............................................................................................................................................................254
Grayscale Adjust ......................................................................................................................................................254
Enhancements ......................................................................................................................................................254
Contrast Scroll Bar..........................................................................................................................................254
Bright ...............................................................................................................................................................255
Remap Intensity ...................................................................................................................................................255
Display View .......................................................................................................................................................255
Intensity................................................................................................................................................................255
Channel ................................................................................................................................................................256
Curve Mode .........................................................................................................................................................256
Factor – Not Available ........................................................................................................................................256
Flip........................................................................................................................................................................256
Reset All...............................................................................................................................................................256
Load\Save.............................................................................................................................................................256
OK\Cancel............................................................................................................................................................256
Filter ..........................................................................................................................................................................257
Scaling ......................................................................................................................................................................257
Detect ........................................................................................................................................................................257
Output Definition Control ...................................................................................................................257
Add/Remove.............................................................................................................................................................258
Duplicate...................................................................................................................................................................258
Import........................................................................................................................................................................258
Export........................................................................................................................................................................259
How to Export (Save) Output Templates: .....................................................................................................259
How to overwrite an existing Output Options template:..............................................................................259
Naming......................................................................................................................................................................260
Apply to All Frames.................................................................................................................................................260
Apply to All Images........................................................................................................................................260
Remove Individual Definitions......................................................................................................................260
Initial Output Numbering Setup..............................................................................................................................260
Ribbon Naming Options ..........................................................................................................................................261

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xv

 0 or 1 Based Naming ...........................................................................................................................................261
Images Per Folder................................................................................................................................................261
First Image ...........................................................................................................................................................261
Vertical Fiche (only for microfiche ribbons) .........................................................................................................261
Standard................................................................................................................................................................261
Vertical .................................................................................................................................................................262
Reverse Vertical ..................................................................................................................................................262
NAMING YOUR OUTPUT ...........................................................................................................................262
Naming Output Dialog Box for Roll Film ...........................................................................................262
Naming Output Dialog Box for Microfiche ...........................................................................................................263
Name Fields ..................................................................................................................................................264
File Name Fields ..........................................................................................................................................264
Right Arrow....................................................................................................................................................264
Folder..............................................................................................................................................................264
Left Arrow.......................................................................................................................................................264
Create Index File ..........................................................................................................................................264
OK....................................................................................................................................................................264
Cancel.............................................................................................................................................................264
Reset...............................................................................................................................................................264
Selecting the Naming Options.................................................................................................................................264
Image File Path ....................................................................................................................................................264
Index File Path .....................................................................................................................................................264
Index Record Definition......................................................................................................................................265
Fiche All Rows Image Path ................................................................................................................................265
Format String .......................................................................................................................................................266
Sample..................................................................................................................................................................266
How to Setup the Format String..............................................................................................................................266
Naming Variables................................................................................................................................270
Name Fields Matrix for the Image file Path and Index Record Definition ..........................................................270
Multipage..................................................................................................................................................................272
Multipage Setup...................................................................................................................................................272
Name Fields Matrix for Creating Multipage Files.................................................................................................273
Format String Examples for creating Multipage files.......................................................................................274
Without Blips ..................................................................................................................................................274
With Blips........................................................................................................................................................274
Name Fields Matrix for the Index file Path............................................................................................................275
CHAPTER 10 – OUTPUT (WRITING IMAGES TO DISK) ...............................................................276
OUTPUT (WRITING IMAGES TO DISK).......................................................................................................276
How to Output Images ........................................................................................................................................276
Output Data..........................................................................................................................................................277
Processing .....................................................................................................................................................277
Total: ...............................................................................................................................................................277
Remaining......................................................................................................................................................277
Time Left ........................................................................................................................................................277
Ipm:..................................................................................................................................................................277
Err: ...................................................................................................................................................................277
Report .............................................................................................................................................................277
Wait message ...............................................................................................................................................277
HOW TO OUTPUT IMAGES MANUALLY .....................................................................................................278
To manually write all the ribbons in a single file or a single ribbon to disk, follow these steps:.......................278
PSCAN ......................................................................................................................................................281
Supported Bitonal\Grayscale Formats ....................................................................................................................281
How to Import Images into the NextStarPlus Auditor ..........................................................................................282
How to create a New Configuration...................................................................................................................283
Job ID ...................................................................................................................................................................284
Batch Name..........................................................................................................................................................284
Document ID........................................................................................................................................................284

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xvi

CHAPTER 12 - NSPLUS INDEX DATABASE CREATOR.................................................................289
NEXTSTARPLUS INDEX DATABASE CREATOR OVERVIEW .......................................................................289
INDEX DATABASE CREATOR ....................................................................................................................289
File, Edit, View and Help Menus.........................................................................................................290
File ............................................................................................................................................................................290
NIDD (nextStarIndex Database) Configuration Files .......................................................................................290
New..................................................................................................................................................................290
Open.................................................................................................................................................................290
Save..................................................................................................................................................................290
Save As ............................................................................................................................................................291
Exit...................................................................................................................................................................291
Edit ............................................................................................................................................................................291
Help ...........................................................................................................................................................................291
New Column Definition .......................................................................................................................291
Required Settings .....................................................................................................................................................291
Column Name .................................................................................................................................................292
Colum Type.....................................................................................................................................................292
Hide Column ...................................................................................................................................................293
Range Setup.....................................................................................................................................................293
Column Is Part Of Range...........................................................................................................................293
How to Create a Start and End Date Range .........................................................................................293
Name ...........................................................................................................................................................294
Start\End .....................................................................................................................................................294
Add New Column.......................................................................................................................................294
Edit Box Settings (Optional) ...................................................................................................................................295
Type .................................................................................................................................................................295
Character Strings ...................................................................................................................................295
Floating Point Numbers ........................................................................................................................295
Signed Integers ......................................................................................................................................295
Unsigned Integers ..................................................................................................................................295
Minimum\Maximum Values ..........................................................................................................................295
Maximum Characters .....................................................................................................................................295
Character Padding...........................................................................................................................................295
Pad Character .........................................................................................................................................295
Pad Count ...............................................................................................................................................295
Drop Down Settings (Optional) ..............................................................................................................................296
Value................................................................................................................................................................296
Values .....................................................................................................................................................296
Edit/Delete Selected ..............................................................................................................................296
Default Value – Optional ......................................................................................................................296
Existing Columns .....................................................................................................................................................297
Database Table .........................................................................................................................................................297
Open Table...........................................................................................................................................................297
Create Table .........................................................................................................................................................297
Modify Table .......................................................................................................................................................297

nextScanPlus Software v.3.1 (February 2015) xvii

 Chapter 1 - NextStarPlus User Guide Overview
Introduction

This user guide describes nextScan's NextStarPlus basic software features for capturing
ribbons, auditing, indexing, managing and outputting images from roll film, microfiche or
aperture cards. Basic FlexScan and Eclipse hardware for Camera, Focusing and
Microfilm loading will also be covered. Virtual Film basic features will also be covered
excluding software customization since not all systems will have the same unique feature
options.

This chapter describes the organization of the manual and gives a brief summary of
chapter contents.

For product support, contact nextScan at [email protected].

For general information about nextScan and its products and services, contact nextScan
at [email protected].

Guide Organization

This user guide contains information about how to use the NextStarPlus product features.
The guide is designed to augment the training you have received so that you will obtain
optimum performance from your scanner. The guide includes notes and tips for shortcuts
and best practices.

✔ NOTE

Notes contain useful information about product operation.

Tip: Tips contain information that might be helpful to the operator.

Chapter overviews are provided in the following list/table. See the index for a list of terms.

No. Title Contents

1 Introduction, Guide Organization, Product Overview,

NextStarPlus User
Specifications, Optional PC Workstation Product Specs,
Guide Overview
and Installation.
2
Scanner Basic Basic Hardware information about the Camera
Hardware Assembly, Eclipse, Flexscan, FlexLoader and Lens.

3 Instructions on how to load or thread film for the Eclipse

Film Threading\Loading
and Flexscan systems. Section also covers TrueDPI
and TrueDPI
settings.
4 NextStarPlus Base Describes the NSBasepath.exe application and Base
Path Path configuration.

18 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 No. Title Contents

5
Detailed information on the web based NSController
NSController
database software.

6 Covers the NextStarPlus CreateHierarchy, SQL and

NextStarPlus Services XML Prep background services.

7
NextStarPlus Capture Detailed procedures for Rollfilm Ribbon file scanning.
for Rollfilm

8 NextStarPlus Capture Detailed procedures for Microfiche and Aperture Card

for Microfiche and Ribbon file scanning including the optional FlexLoader
Aperture Cards attachment setup.

9 Detailed procedures for using the NextStarPlusAuditor

NextStarPlus Auditor
Software software.

10 Writing images to disk using the Output.exe and

Output (Writing Images procedures on how to manually output images outside
to Disk) the NSController management system.
Detailed procedures for using the Pscan application
11 rd
software for importing scanned images from a 3 Party
PScan Twain compliant scanner or from a directory into the
NextStarPlusAuditor as ribbon files.
12
NextStarPlusDatabase
Configuring the index template for Virtual film concept.
Creator

Product Overview
Ribbon Scanning
The NextStarPlus Capture software digitizes roll film or microfiche using a unique
concept in film scanning that nextScan developed, called Ribbon Scanning. In this
process an entire roll of film or microfiche is digitized from top-to-bottom and end-to-end
in grayscale and stored as a single lossless image which nextScan calls a Ribbon. In
addition to all of the features contained in the current version of the NextStar Workflow
Software the NEW NextStar PLUS offers:

 Compressed ribbons using a new high accuracy/quality compression technique.

On average only 1/20th of storage space needed
 Index while you scan
 Indexing for roll/fiche/aperture cards, sparse and/or page by page either in the
Auditor, at QA, standalone or a combination
 Additional QA tools to improve ease of use, image quality, search ability and
minimize image size
 Allow emailing, printing and writing only the images you want from the roll without
having to worry about damaging film.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 19

  High Definition Scanning – Capture and output of 12 bit images for specialized
applications enabling even higher OCR accuracy or archival storage
 TM
VirtualFilm (option) – The VirtualFilm software is used to convert film into a user
viewable digital ribbon format. This allows access to the film’s images using the
software and search engine techniques without the need of accessing the actual
film. This helps to preserve the film and the cost of digital conversion is less
expensive than making a duplicate of the film. Using your existing workflow with
the same indexes a permanent digital record of the film can be viewed, emailed,
faxed or printed at any PC workstation using nextScan software. Custom
indexing options are also available.
 Configurable workflow
 Configurable data entry modules

Production Scanning Solution

This new method of scanning solves many of the problems plaguing the conversion
process from microfilm to digital images. Most notably is the ability to verify that all
images were properly digitized, and if there were image detection or density problems,
correct these issues in a post scan environment. Not only does this yield higher
utilization of the scanner since there is no setup involved and the scanner runs at rated
speed, but leads to a much more accurate conversion process, with far superior image
quality, over a wide range of density, filming related challenges and the need for costly
rescans or reloads is reduced. In addition, minimal user training is required because of
the simple and intuitive NextStarPlus interface.

Workflow
NextStarPlus is not only film scanning software, but includes workflow software to
manage your entire end-to-end conversion process. It is modular and expandable. The
NextStarPlus software uses a one-window interface that is simple and intuitive to use.
From the minimalist installation where all components run on a single Scanner
Workstation, to large distributed production systems, where the software components
communicate between multiple platforms “PC Workstations” were work is scheduled and
shared between many users. In this environment tasks are coordinated by a central
workflow controller and database. NextStarPlus also has a remote scan capability by
allowing scanning to disk-packs and then sneaker net (or Express Delivery) the Ribbon
data to your centralized processing facility.

Ribbon Storage Device (RSD)

The NextStarPlus Scan Application (aka Capture), writes the Ribbon data to a Ribbon
Storage Device (RSD). The RSD is used for temporary storage of the Ribbon data until
the final output images have been processed. Once it is determined the Ribbon data is
no longer needed the user must delete the Ribbon data via the NSController
management system. The user can delete the ribbon data directly from the RSD but it is
not recommended unless the Ribbon data is no longer being managed by the
NSController. See Chapter 4 for more details on the NSController.

✔ NOTENextScan does not support reconfiguring the factory Ribbon Storage Device
rd
(RSD) or using 3 party hardware for storing the Ribbon data.

20 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Eclipse Scanners with RSD (Optional on FlexScan Systems)
On the Eclipse scanners, the Ribbon data is sent to the RSD through a 1 Gig Ethernet
dedicated link. Since the RSD is external to the scanner it allows the Capture, Auditing
and Output processes to run simultaneously.

FlexScan RSD (Standard System)

On the FlexScan, the RSD is installed internally and writes the Ribbon data on two local
Raid drives. Since the Ribbon data is captured and stored on the same RSD it prevents
the ability to Capture plus Output simultaneously. The user must schedule the Capture
and Output processes so they do not conflict. The user can run the Auditor with either the
Capture or Output application running. When capturing or outputting labor intensive
images it is best to run the Auditor on a separate PC Workstation.

✔ NOTE
To inquire about an external RSD for the FlexScan system which allows Capture,
Auditing and Output to run simultaneously please contact your sales
representative for details.

✔ NOTE

As nextScan keeps up with industry trends, the RSD specifications between models may
vary. Check with nextScan for the latest specs or refer to the component manual for each
component which can be found in the system’s kit which ships with each scanner.

The following figure shows a conceptual diagram of the basic nextStar ribbon scanning process
with an Eclipse system.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 21

System Components
To scan aperture cards, roll film or microfiche formats, you need the following
components:

One of the following scanning systems:

 Eclipse series with external Ribbon Storage Device (RSD) – roll film only
 FlexScan with internal Ribbon Storage Device (RSD) and one module
- Roll Film Module: Transport used to scan roll film, (optional)
- Microfiche Module: Transport used to scan microfiche or aperture cards,
(optional)
 Options:
- External Ribbon Storage Device for Flexscan (optional)
- 3M Cartridge Adaptor – Optional Attachment for scanning cartridge
microfilm.
- 1000 Ft Reel Attachments – Optional Attachment for scanning 1000 ft 16
mm or 35 mm film.
- Flexloader: (optional attachment to automatically load\unload microfiche
or aperture cards)
nextScanPlus software:
 NextStarPlus.exe includes the components for:
– NextStarPlusScan scanning software aka Capture
– NextStarPlusAuditor software (includes auditing and output
functions)
– NextStarPlus Server software (for internal\external RSD
configurations)
– FicheStar for COM Microfiche Detection (Optional)
– NSController (web based ribbon manager)
– NSController (web based ribbon manager)
rd
– PScan and 3 Party Twain Compliant drivers (Optional)
nextScanPlus Virtual Film method for retrieving\indexing film (optional plus
customizable):

 To index using Virtual Film (aperture cards, roll film or microfiche formats),
you need the following components:
– Virtual Film software and Licensed seats
– Indexing Database Creator and Index Structure
– Import\Export software
– Paper\Book Scanning software modules (Optional)
The Virtual Film Application can be customized to the customers current workflow
requirements. Please contact sales for additional information.

22 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Scanning Method
Scanning is built on a client/server architecture. The client side is composed of the
NextStarPlusScan application. The server side is composed of the CreateHierarchy
service, and the NextStarPlusXMLPrep service. The Scanner captures the entire roll film
or microfiche as a single ribbon image and sends it to the CreateHierarchy program in
real time. The Scan application pays no attention to the framing requirements or file
formats or image processing. In typical Scan applications like our Fusion software, the
Scan Application must find the individual images, apply the image processing necessary
to do Enhancement, Cropping, Deskew, Speckle removal etc. These processes limit the
speed of the scanner in high resolution or large format scanning jobs. Since
NextStarPlus is not performing these tasks at scan time, the scanner is only limited by
the network bandwidth and true scanner speed (camera capture speed). For example if
a scanner is scanning Duplex Roll film at 48x reduction and 200 DPI, the scanner will be
required to process about 96 Mbytes/sec of image data. Typical scan applications (like
Fusion) on high performance PC’s can only process about 40 Mbytes/sec of Image data
with the above mentioned processing load. This means your expensive scanner is
running at less than ½ of its rated capacity. However with NextStarPlus, there is no
processing being performed during the scanning phase and so you are only limited by the
network bandwidth. In the case of NextStarPlus on a 1Gig Ethernet link, that is about
100 Mbytes/second, so your scanner is performing as expected and your investment in a
high speed scanner is justified.

NextStarPlusScan (aka Capture)

The NextStarPlusScan application is also known as Capture and it is referred to as the
Capture process in this user guide. The NextStarPlus Capture software digitizes roll film
and microfiche at high-speed and creates a single grayscale ribbon file from the data
captured. Roll films are captured top to bottom, and microfiche images are captured in
entire rows defined by the user as a single ribbon.

On Roll film once the scanning process starts, the lamp and gamma correction values
automatically adjust to the optimal level necessary (based on the film’s image density) to
achieve the best image quality. For Roll Film and Microfiche the lamp and gamma
correction values can also be adjusted manually.

Capture is easy to use and configure, requiring little training to learn how to perform
production scanning.

CreateHierarchy (aka nextStarCH)

CreateHierarchy is the other end of the scan connection and also operates in real time as
the scanner captures the data. CreateHierarchy software receives the scanned image
data from the NextStarPlusScan application and in addition, it has the responsibility of
writing the actual Ribbon data to disk storage. In the case of FlexScan, it is a local
process on the scanner and writes the Ribbon to two Raid 0 drives in the Scanner. With
Eclipse, a remote ribbon processing unit handles capturing the data that it sent to it via a
1Gig Ethernet dedicated link. Additionally with Eclipse the possibility exists to use
external disk-packs to store the Ribbons on and then send them to a centralized
processing facility, where they are mounted on a NextStarPlus Ribbon Processing Unit.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 23

NextStarPlusXMLPrep
Once CreateHierarchy is finished writing the Ribbon data to disk, it notifies the
NextStarPlusXMLPrep service that it is finished. NextStarPlusXMLPrep then creates the
initial XML data file for the new Ribbon file. This XML creation may include running frame
detection, setting up microfiche grids, and defining the initial output definitions for the new
Ribbon file. Once the XML creation is finished, the Ribbon file is ready for auditing via
the NextStarPlusAuditor application, or outputting via the Output application.

NextStarGrabService
The NextStarGrabService is responsible for passing the high resolution raw data
captured from the camera to the Frame Grabber board.

MySQL
The MySQL Service Manager software starts up in the background. This service is used
to run the core SQL Server engine. If the service is stopped, the database no longer
allows connections and applications can no longer process queries. The Service
Manager application is shown in the Windows task bar, and it can be stopped and started
by the database administrator.

NSController
The NSController keeps track of the ribbon file scans, whether items have been
processed, and whether these items have been written to disk. Thus, from the
NSController, you can determine the status of each item and can continue processing
each ribbon forward as needed. The NSController also has state management and report
generation capabilities. In addition to these capabilities the NSController can also be
used for custom indexing and report generation. For more details contact
[email protected].

NextStarPlusAuditor
The software provides a means of performing quality assurance on all ribbon files created
by the NextStarPlus system. The Auditor is the user interface to the Ribbon data and has
a complete suite of tools for performing quality control over ribbons scanned.

The auditor gives you the ability to correct for any detection problems (such as, missed or
overlapped frames), mistakes, make adjustments, insert or delete and the ability to get
the best image quality possible with the flexibility to output the images in a number of
formats and indexing schemes.

It can also be used to configure and run the desired frame detection parameters,
configure and run output options, and configure image quality enhancements.

The Auditor also allows for a view of the entire roll film or microfiche including all data in
between frames. This is where the verification that all images have been found and
image quality and readability is verified. Once the Audit process is complete the XML
data file is updated with the needed corrections and the file is marked ready for Output.

24 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Editing and Quality Control
The NextStarPlusAuditor software includes the following features:

 Reliability – no images are missed during scanning. All images captured in

umcompressed 10 bit grayscale ribbon files
 Detect is a separate process accessed from the Auditor and is responsible for
locating all the individual images in a particular Ribbon. The Auditor has two
different detect options, and additionally supports third party detection software.
The Detect process creates a separate XML data file that contains all the location
and skew information of the individual images that is used by the Auditor
Software and Auditor Output processes.

 Rotate, mirror, crop, deskew, despeckle and edge enhancement filters, all post
scan operations
 Tri-level blip detection and naming for easier indexing with re-sequence 8 new-
sequence capabilities
 Adjustable Contrast and Gamma Correction after scanning
 A blackout setting, to quickly define images that were not detected but not
captured
 Quality control, to fine-tune detection, make corrections, delete files (singly or in
groups), or apply reverse numbering
 Image Quality settings to fine-tune bitonal contrast, sharpen characters and
despeckle background noise. In addition the user can also apply automatic
thresholding globally, single or group of images.
 For microfiche: Allows grid templates for segmenting Grid/COM/Step and Repeat
type formats – easily allows switching between different types of grids.
 Intelligent detection algorithms with multi-ribbon level options for best results,
including algorithms written to custom-detect specific types of film formats (such
as: oil well logs, COM roll\microfiche, AB Dick\Grid type formats, small frame
gaps, duplex or 3 level blipped microfilm with custom blip options).
 Automatic horizontal and vertical detection algorithms
 Full scroll through entire roll, quickly or complete microfiche view.
 Horizontal/vertical splitting
 Horizontal/Vertical Microfiche Numbering
 Allows the user to easily select the order of available ribbons for processing
through specific filters. i.e. servers, drives, Job ID or manually via browser.
 Custom views for verifying detection accuracy of blips, deskew, frames and
images. User can also manually fine-tune and perform quality control in each
view.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 25

  Custom Indexing\Report generation. The Auditor can also be used for custom
indexing. For more details contact [email protected].
 Standard 5 Audit workstation license. Additional licenses can be purchased for
additional workstations
 Color Coding of Frame Detection confidence and Black Out Mode as a visual aid for the
Audit operator
 Capable of Capture and processing of Ribbons using uncompressed data to
maximize image fidelity and OCR precision
 Standaloneor domain workflow, process management, exceptionhandling/routingandreporting
 Suited for all TWAIN-compliant paper scanners (grayscale)
 Flexible file naming and index file generation

Output Options
The NextStarPlusAuditor software is easy to learn and use. It includes functionality for
setting output preferences.
Auditor Output option features include:
 Unlimited output image formats, all definable after scanning
 Print, Email or write to disk all or a selected group of images
 Customized output file format and indexing preferences including multi-page plus
multi-level blipped.
 Image Defining: You can define images with the best image quality settings;
apply processing and output file format settings over individual, global, and
groups of images.
 Automatic Thresholding – Automatic Contrast Adjustment to auto compensate
contrast over variable densities within the microfilm.
 Customized processing options. i.e. crop, mirroring, invert, scaling, rotate and
blip setup.
 Export and import saved settings (an advantage for production environments)
 Naming – Provides flexible index naming schemes with the use of hundreds of
variable naming options.

Output
The Output reads in the XML data file and the Ribbon data and extracts the individual
images and outputs them according to the XML data that was specified by the Detect and
Audit processes. It is the interface to the outside world so-to-speak. Output should be
run on a server or PC Workstation with a connection to a network what will receive the
final individual images. Normally Output is run on the same Server that CreateHierarchy
is run on, and those Servers have two NIC’s (network interface controllers).

26 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

PScan
rd
Pscan application software allows the user to import scanned images from a 3 Party
Twain compliant scanner or import images from a directory into the NextStarPlusAuditor
as ribbon files. As ribbon files the user is able to perform quality control such as
enhancing or manipulating the imported images from a NextStarPlus Auditing
workstation.

nextStarPlus Database Creator

The nextStarPlus Database Creator uses a customizable database template which
allows the indexing of ribbons (roll film, microfiche or aperture cards). This new method
a data structure that improves the speed of data retrieval operations on a database table
at the cost of slower writes and the use of more storage space. Indexes can be created
using one or more columns of a database table, providing the basis for both rapid random
lookups and efficient access of ordered records

Virtual Film
Virtual Film is the NextStarPlus new method for converting your film into a user viewable
digital ribbon format and removes the need to access film. It also allows faster access to
the film’s images using an index\retrieval scheme with search engine techniques plus
microfilm scrolling, email, printing and multiple options for accessing the film’s data. The
cost of digital conversion is less expensive than making a duplicate of the film, and is a
permanent record that can be viewed at any PC workstation using nextScan software.
Simply use your existing workflow with the same indexes. Enter the roll number,
instrument or case number in the Viewer and the roll, fiche or aperture card information is
instantly displayed.
Using the NextStarPlus Virtual Film features provide the necessary tools for low retrieval
rate film, and at any time the images can be output for import in to your current Document
Management System along with your current day-forward content.

FicheStar
FicheStar is nextScan’s latest software for COM microfiche which accurately finds every image
without the need for a grid setup or grid alignment. This detection software works even with
skewed fiche, individually skewed rows, or even rows with twisted images. In addition to removing
the reliance on a grid setup or film alignment during scanning, FicheStar has added many time
saving features such as auto-add of index pages, saving the title bar for indexing, and handling
partially filled fiche intuitively. The result is a ninety percent time savings vs. traditional auditing
methods.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 27

Specifications
Hardware Specifications
The following outlines the scanner basic specifications for the FlexScan, Eclipse 300\500
and NextStarPlus PC Workstations. Please refer to service guide for you module to get
documentation on troubleshooting\repair, Physical and operation environment
specifications.

✔ NOTE
As nextScan keeps up with industry trends, the PC specifications between models may
vary. Check with nextScan for the latest specs or refer to the component manual for each
component which can be found in the system’s kit which ships with each scanner.

FlexScan Series Product Specifications

Subsystem Component Detail
CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 6600GHz 512KB or higher
Hard Drive Large SATA II – 80 gig +
Memory Dual-Channel DDR2-533 Memory. 3Gbytes +
Operating System Windows XP Pro. w/svc pk 2
Internal PC
Video PCI Express
Configuration
Network 100/1000 Ethernet controller
PC Power Supply 1U Universal (100v – 240v) 50/60 HZ 90 to 250 Vac.
Under 300 watts – ATX 12v, 24pin
Case 2U-14”deep

Subsystem Component Detail

System Architecture Multi Format 2 in 1 – Transport Options: Roll Film
(16 mm & 35 mm) and Microfiche 105 mm (6.25” L x
4.25”H).
CCD Camera Type\Frame Dalsa Single Tap I (single data transfer) Line Scan or
Grabber Technology Tap II (dual data transfer) with IPRO Frame Grabber
Technology – Converts 10 bits to 8 bits, no missing codes
Imaging Optional 12 bit capture\output available.
System CCD Pixel Fixed 8192 pixels 7x7um – Anti-blooming or Fixed
12288 12-Bit - Anti=blooming Option available
Image Capture Grayscale 12bit or 10 bit convert to 12bit or 8bit, Bitonal
or both
System Architecture Multi Format 3 in 1 – Transport Options: Roll Film
(16 mm & 35 mm), Aperture Cards (dual or single frame)
and Microfiche 105 mm (6.25” L x 4.25”H).

28 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

FlexScan product specs cont’
Subsystem Component Detail
Camera Bits/Pix 10bits, SNR approximately 60db – (12 bit optional)
Optical Lens 65mm Nikon or optional TCD141A teleconverter
Lens connects on module center via C-mount ring
Linear Flat Light Source Fiber Optic bundle with adjustable 100 Watt, lamp
with 1024 independent light levels
Holographic diffuser 30/30 grade diffuser
Focus Manual with automated focus feature.
Hardware Options Roll Film or Microfiche Module
Hardware True Resolution 3500 to 15,500 TrueDPI “without interpolation” with
the 65 mm Nikon Lens and 2500-14400 TrueDPI
with a TCD141A Teleconverter
Imaging Power Source includes 2A Single phase 100-240V, 10 AMP with switch for
System fuse and line filter converting to domestic or international specs.
Power Supply Proprietary Universal (100v – 240v) 50/60 HZ under
600 watts
Linear Film Control Roll Film: High Resolution Pancake Drive motor for
precise linearity. Microfiche: x and y table utilizes
guide rails and blocks for linear movement.
Interface Board NS_101 Interface – Serves as a pass through board
(data\power) and connects the module (s) to the
main system.
Controller Board NS_3000 Controller – Designed to convert all data from
the camera plus handle all motion control. Includes
DEBUG\Communications port and uses DB9 (male to
Female) cable from the NS_3000 to USB or COM port \
depending on MB.
Gamma Correction 10 bits to 8 bits, no missing codes – (12-bit optional)

Subsystem Component Detail

Film Loading Manual Spring Loaded 16\35mm roller film path with
scroll bar guides and pinch roller tension.
Hardware Options 1000 ft reels, 3M cartridge adaptor , 55 mm lens or
TCD141A Teleconverter lens
Roll film
Hardware True Resolution 3500 to 15,500 TrueDPI “without interpolation”
Module
with the 65 mm Nikon Lens and 2500-14400
TrueDPI with a TCD141A Teleconverter
Film Formats Supported Roll Film 16 mm and 35 mm Handles standard and
most non-standard film formats

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 29

FlexScan product specs cont’
Subsystem Component Detail

Linear Film Control Roll Film: High Resolution Pancake Drive motor for
precise linearity.

Film Formats Planetary, Rotary, Simplex, Multiplex, Duplex and

COM including sliver or diazo duplicate film.
Roll film Module can also handle film with splices.
Module
Film Polarity Positive or Negative including mixed
Reduction Ratios Standard 7x-52x at a TrueDPI and non standard.
Scan Sizes A-E Standard and non standard.
Resolutions 100-600 DPI

Subsystem Component Detail

Film Loading Loaded glass platen

Standard Film Sizes 105 mm x 148 mm – Standard
77 mm x 127 mm – Standard
85.7 mm x 187.3 mm – Ultra Fiche
117.5 mm x 148 m 0 AB Dick Size
Standard 16 and 35 mm Mixed Jacketed Channels
Jumbo Film Sizes 127 mm x 203.2
Aperture Card 187.325 mm × 82.55 mm
Standard 35 mm single Frame and Dual Frame
Cannot read Hollerith but able to scan the titlebar and
selected areas.
Microfiche
Film Thickness 4 & 5 mil mm
Standard or
Hardware True Resolution 3500 to 15,500 TrueDPI “without interpolation” with
Jumbo
the 65 mm Nikon Lens and 2500-14400 TrueDPI
Modules
with a TCD141A Teleconverter
Includes
Aperture Card Film Formats Supported Handles standard and most non-standard film formats
Film Formats Planetary, Rotary, Simplex, Multiplex, Duplex and
AB DICK including sliver or diazo duplicate film.
(COM is handled on a limited basis).
Film Polarity Positive, Negative, AB Dick, Microx and Vesicular
Reduction Ratios Standard 7x-52x at a TrueDPI and non standard.
Scan Sizes A-E Standard and non standard.
Resolutions 100-600 DPI
Available HW Options FlexLoader, Aperture Card Inserts, Mini Inserts and
Custom Inserts for special or non-standard sizes.
Linear Film Control Via x and y axis lead screw and slider rail guides.

30 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 FlexScan product specs cont’
Subsystem Component Detail

Film Loading Automatic Load and Unload. Media is sorted in order and
does not require additional prep once scanning is done.
Film Sizes 105 mm x 148 mm – Standard
77 mm x 127 mm – Standard
85.7 mm x 187.3 mm – Ultra Fiche
117.5 mm x 148 m 0 – AB Dick Size
FlexLoader
Standard 16 and 35 mm Mixed Jacketed Channels
127 mm x 203.2 – Jumbo
187.325 mm × 82.55 mm – Aperture Card
Custom sizes also available.
Film Loading Capacity The Input Bin can load up to: 200 Microfiche Sheets
180 Microfiche Jackets and 100 Aperture Cards.

Eclipse Series Product Specifications

Subsystem Component Detail

System Architecture Single Format – Roll Film (16 mm & 35 mm)

CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 6600GHz 512 KB or higher
Memory Dual Channel DDR2-533 Memory 3 Gbytes +
Hard Drive Large SATA II 80 gig +
Operating System Windows XP Pro. w/svc pk 2
Video PCI Express
Network 100/1000 Ethernet controller
Power Supply Eclipse series and upgraded Eclipse 300 models:
Universal (100v – 240v) 50/60 HZ under 600 watts

Internal PC CCD Camera Type\Frame Eclipse 300 – Dalsa Single Tap I (single data
Components Grabber Technology transfer) Line Scan with Camlink or IPRO Frame
Grabber Technology
Eclipse 500 – Dalsa Dual Tap II (dual data transfer)
Line Scans with IPRO Frame Grabber Technology
Technology – Converts 10 bits to 8 bits, no missing codes
Optional 12 bit capture\output available.
Optical Lens Rodenstock Lens or Schneider Lens (Optional)
CCD Pixel Fixed 8192 pixels 7x7um – Anti-blooming or Fixed
12288 12-Bit - Anti=blooming Option available.
Image Capture Grayscale 10 bit convert to 8bit, Bitonal or both
Camera Bits/Pix 10bits, SNR approximately 60db (12bit option)
Linear Flat Light Source Fiber Optic bundle with adjustable 100 Watt, lamp
with 1024 independent light levels.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 31

 Eclipse Series Product Specifications cont’
Subsystem Component Detail

LuminTec™ Lighting (optional) LuminTec™ is a unique, patented, advanced LED light line
Eclipse Units Only system developed exclusively by nextScan. It uses 1/10
of the power of current incandescent and produces a
sharper image.
Holographic diffuser 60/60 or 30/30. Currently shipping with 30/30 grade.
Focus Automatic and Manual User Option
Film Loading Manual Spring Loaded 16\35mm roller film path with
scroll bar guides and pinch roller tension.
Hardware True Resolution 1800 to 15,500 TrueDPI “without interpolation” with
Internal PC the Rodenstock Lens and 1600-14400 TrueDPI with
Components the Schneider Lens
Film Formats Supported 16 mm and 35 mm, standard and most non-standard
film formats
Available HW Options 3M Cartridge, 1000ft 16\35mm Adapter and
Schneider Lens
Power Source includes Single phase 100-240V, 10 AMP with switch for
2A fuse and line filter converting to domestic or international specs.

Subsystem Component Detail

Linear Film Control High Resolution Pancake Drive motor for precise
linearity
Imaging System’s Main NS_1000 or NS_3000 (depending on the unit)
Internal PC Controller designed to convert all data from the camera plus
Components handle all motion control. Includes DEBUG\
Communications port and uses DB9 (male to
Female) cable from the NS_1000 or NS_3000 to
USB or COM port depending on MB.
Gamma Correction 10 bits to 8 bits, no missing codes (12 bit optional)

Optional PC Workstation product specs.

Subsystem Component Detail
CPU Intel P4 3.20GHz or higher with Hyper-threading
512KB L2 Cache or higher
Hard Drive Large Ultra IDE or Better 80 gig +
NextStarPlus
Memory 2 Gbytes or higher
PC
Operating System Windows 7 Professional, Enterprise and Home versions
WorkStation
Windows 8-8.1 (must have nextStarPlus 2015 release)
Video AGP or PCI express
Network 100/1000 Ethernet controller

32 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Performance Specifications
Subsystem Component Detail
FlexScan with only the The nextScan software requires Windows 7 Professional
internal RSD

Eclipse scanners and Flexscan units with external RSD

NextStarPlus Eclipse Systems require a 1-GB network connection that supports jumbo-
FlexScan with external RSD size frames for the Auditor workstation and Capture
workstation. The nextScan software requires Windows 7
Audit PC Work Stations
Professional.

Constraints
File Size Limitations

JPEG and JPEG 2000 65,000 Pixels Wide Max (max image length)

Tiff, Tiff Grayscale, JPEG, JPEG

2000, CALS, PDF-JPEG and All 1 Gig (max file size)
Multipage Formats

Camera and Lens Limitations

MIN\Max True DPI – 8K (8192) 1800-15500 Eclipse Systems (with 70mm Rodenstock Lens)
1600-14500 Eclipse System (with 80mm Schneider Lens)
3000-15500 FlexScan Systems (with 60 mm Nikon Lens)
2500-16000 FlexScan Systems (with 55 mm Nikon Lens)
MIN\Max True DPI – 12K (12288) 1600-14500 Eclipse System (with 80mm Schneider Lens)
7200-15000 FlexScan Systems (with 60 mm Nikon Lens)
TrueDPI - Scan Size Limitation The original width of the document multiplied by the DPI cannot be
wider than the CCD array in pixels. How to calculate: take the width
Note: The operator can always use of the “original document” on the film (not the length) and multiply it
the scaling feature in the Auditor by the desired DPI. This value cannot be greater than 8192 pixels or
application to increase the 12288 pixels depending on the camera size. If the pixel value is
resolution up to 600 DPI within greater than the CCD size then a lower DPI must be used. If it is a
each system’s min\max constraints. requirement to scan at a higher DPI this adjustment can be made in
the auditor using the scaling feature.

Example using 8192 Pixel Camera:

Width x DPI = Total Pixels to be captured by CCD
36” x 300 = 10800 pixels (can’t be captured without scaling)
36” x 200 = 7200 pixels (can be captured without scaling)

Example using 12288 Pixel Camera:

Width x DPI = Total Pixels to be captured by CCD
36” x 300 = 10800 pixels (can be captured without scaling)
36” x 200 = 7200 pixels (can be captured without scaling)

Dots Per Inch 100-600

Reduction Ratios Standard 7x-72x at a TrueDPI and user optional interpolation.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 33

 Constraints cont’
MISC Limitations

Operating System Windows 7 Professional

rd
rd
3 Party Software Programs During operation the software does not support 3 party applications
rd
running on system including virus protection. 3 party applications
will negatively affect the NextStarPlus software performance.

FlexScan Light systems FlexScan Lite Systems cannot scan and output ribbon files at the
same time.

Permissions Check List

Component Details OK

User Local Administrative RW rights to the nextScan directories

Scanner Firewall turned off (not disabled)
SCANNER Locations: c:\program files\nextScan\
c:\basepath\
c:\program files\common files\nextScan
RW rights into the basepath shares.
Path Location: c:\basepath
c:\basepath\

RSD (SERVER) and c:\program files\common files\nextScan

OUTPUT.exe RW rights to the ribbon shares.
Path Locations: d:\ribbons1 and e:\ribbons2
1

tcp port 8888 open for browser connections – This is needed to allow
user to view the web based NSController for managing ribbon files.
RW access to customers Image Servers Directories
Configure the basepath to the RSD. Example: \\rsd_name\basepath
Factory Default = \\NextStarPlus64\basepath
AUDITOR
User Local Administrative RW rights to the nextScan directory
Locations: c:\program files\nextScan\ and c:\program files\common
files\nextScan
rd
rd
Running 3 PARTY The function of 3 party programs should be scheduled when system
AND VIRUS is not scanning or outputting data to avoid operational conflicts.
rd
PROTECTION If 3 party programs must be running (Not recommended) while
UTILITIES scanning or outputting data then it is necessary to exclude the ribbon
directories to avoid operational conflicts.

34 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Installation
Upgrading to NextStarPlus 3.1 from any nextStar software release will require a new
database and software registration keys. There have been many enhancements to
improve performance and added new features. For detailed installation instructions, see
the nextScan Installation Guide for the NextStarPlus version of software.

To obtain a copy of the installation guide, contact NextScan support at

[email protected], or call 208-513-4000.

✔ NOTE
When upgrading to 3.1 the system will need new registry keys and configuration
files. If software is earlier than 3.1 release the configuration files will not be
compatible.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 35

 Chapter 2 – Scanner Basic Hardware
FlexScan and Eclipse Scanning Systems
NextScan has two models the Flexscan 3 in 1 and Eclipse scanning systems. This
section will describe the basic hardware for both systems.

FlexScan and Eclipse Camera

The NextScan standard model uses an Atmel or Dalsa 8192 scan line camera which
captures analog data projected from the lens and converts it to 10 bit digital data
(optional 12 bit camera). The digital data is sent to the NS_3000 (motor & video controller
board) via the camera data control interface cable for processing ribbons. A green status
LED light indicates the camera has power and is internally functioning correctly. During
NextStarPlus Capture startup the application establishes communications with the
camera so it is very important not to start up the NextStarPlus Capture application during
this initialization process. The following covers the Eclipse and FlexScan Camera
systems.

FlexScan Camera
On the FlexScan system, the camera assembly is mounted on the camera platform
attached to the scanner tower. The camera assembly travels up or down along the lead
screw slider to various positions along the optical path. The camera can be moved up or
down by turning the crank shaft by hand. The location to which the camera is moved is
based on the calculation of the DPI (dots per inch) and the reduction ratio (discussed
later in Chapter 5 “NextStarPlus Capture”.

FlexScan Main System (Base and Tower)

36 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

FlexScan Interchangeable Modules
The FlexScan has interchangeable modules that attached to the base of the FlexScan.

FlexScan Interchangeable Modules

✔ NOTE
Older Module Type B systems do not have the cleaning or stationary rollers located on the
left and right sides of the scroll rollers.

✔ NOTE
On March 2012 nextScan discontinued the Standard Microfiche Module and replaced the
Jumbo Microfiche module with the Universal Microfiche module (aka Jumbo Module).
The New Universal Microfiche module can handle all film formats such as Jumbo,
Standard, Aperture Cards and 3x5 microfiche.

✔ NOTE
At time of purchase the customer can choose two inserts from the following: Standard,
Aperture Card film or Jumbo. There is also optional inserts for custom film sizes. To get
information on how to get custom Inserts for non-standard microfilm sizes you can contact
[email protected] or [email protected]. You can also dial
1 (866) 968-6998 (US & Canada) or direct 1-208-514-4000.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 37

 FlexLoader (Option)
The FlexLoader is an optional attachment that attaches to the microfiche module. It allows
automatic loading and unloading of microfiche and aperture cards. Film loading will be covered in
the next chapter.

FlexLoader Front View

FlexLoader Inside Rear View

FlexLoader Rear View

38 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Checking the FlexLoader
Item What to Check
Handles Film Sizes  105 mm x 148 mm - Standard
 77 mm x 127 mm - Standard
 85.7 mm x 187.3 mm – Ultra Fiche
 117.5 mm x 148 m 0 - AB Dick Size
 Standard 16 and 35 mm Mixed Jacketed Channels
 127 mm x 203.2 – Jumbo
 187.325 mm × 82.55 mm – Aperture Card
 Custom sizes also available.
Microfiche Flange Attachment This is where the FlexLoader attaches to the microfiche module.
 Verify the flange is properly installed so the FlexLoader is
stable. It should be positioned so the cards align in the center
of the platen without hitting the inserts or outside edges of the
platen mount.
 It should also be secure and level when mounted onto the
microfiche module.
Input Bin The Input Bin is where the microfiche or aperture cards are
loaded.

 Verify the slide guides are positioned for the correct size of
film to be scanned.

 Verify the “Separate Time” for the film type is set correctly.
(See Chapter 8 - Microfiche Preferences for details).
 The Input Bin can load up to: 200 Microfiche Sheets, 180
Microfiche Jackets and 100 Aperture Cards
Exit Bin The Exit Bin is where the cards will be placed once scanning is
done. The Exit Bin can hold about 200 microfiche or aperture
cards.
 Once the Exit Bin is full it is important to remove the film to
allow room for the next batch.
Card Plate Pressure The Card Plate Pressure is spring loaded and keeps tension
between the microfilm and roller for film loading.

 Verify the spring is functioning properly. It should when

pressed spring back to max position.

LED’s  Ready Status Green – If the light does not come on power off
system and check the COM cable connection. Verify the
module can see the loader.

 Input Red LED – Check for input jam

 Output Red LED - Check for output jam

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 39

 Item What to Check
Magnetic Card Back Stop The Card Back Stop is used to keep the film aligned.

 Verify the Card Back Stop magnet is not loose.

 Verify it is not pushed down on the cards to prevent bowing.

 Verify it is placed flush and square over the top of the film.

Reverse Red Button The Reverse button will move the film backwards into the input
bin and is used to clear a jammed state.
Note: Damaged, Warped or Torn Jackets
 Verify the buttons are centered and do not catch on the lid.
can get caught in the loader. If this is the
case it is important to re-Jacket film  ATTENTION: Take care not to accidentally hit this button
or scan damaged film manually. during operation or while film is loaded.

Forward Red Button The Forward button will move the film forwards into the Exit Bin
and is used to clear a jammed state.

 Verify the buttons are centered and do not catch on the lid.
Note: Damaged, Warped or Torn Jackets
can get caught in the loader. If this is the  ATTENTION: Take care not to accidentally hit this button
case it is important to re-Jacket film during operation or while film is loaded.
or scan damaged film manually.
Input and Output Sensors The Input and Output Sensors are used to detect a jam. If a
microfiche or aperture card does not pass the sensor in the
allotted time or fails to clear the sensor a jam will be reported. All
mechanical functions will stop until it the jam is cleared to prevent
damaging the film.

 If there is a real jam the operator will need to manually clear

the film from the rollers if possible or use the input\output Red
Buttons.

 If a jam does not exist it may be necessary to clean off dust

from the sensor or make sure the sensor is not loose.

 If a jam is reported and the film is not hitting the sensor check
the following:

 Check Lighting – Sunlight especially will cause the

sensors to fail.

 Verify Sensor is not loose or crooked.

 Clean Sensor

 Verify Sensor is operational

Microfiche Flange  This button is used to move film in the input bin backwards. It
is especially needed when the film comes out too far hitting
the Input sensor which reports it as a jam

40 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Item What to Check
Input\Output Motors The input\output motors move the input\output roller shafts using
gear pulleys and belts

 Verify the belts are centered properly.

 If the rollers fail to move verify the following:

 The pulleys have not become loose.

 The tab on the pulley roller is set into the shaft

groove and the locking pin is not missing.

If the belt pulleys have not become loose. Contact nextscan at

[email protected] for assistance.

Input\Output Rollers The input\output rollers move the film through the FlexLoader.

 Check for dust build up and clean if necessary.

 If the rollers fail to move verify the following:

 The shaft is centered and not binding.

 The tab on the input or output rollers are set into the
shaft groove and the locking pin are not missing.

 Verify the belt pulleys have not become loose. Contact

nextScan at [email protected] for
assistance

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 41

 Item What to Check
ESD (Electro Static Dissipative) Brush The ESD (Electro Static Dissipative) is used to remove static
(some units will not have this) during the film loading process.

 Verify the brush is not bent or interfering with the input of

cards.

 Check for debris and clean as needed.

Tongue Belt Assembly The Tongue Belt Assembly is used to place cards in the glass
platen for scanning. It is also responsible for removing cards and
placing them into the exit bin.

 Verify belts turn freely and that they are not crooked.

 Check for debris and clean as needed.

 Important: Make sure the belts do not rub against the bottom
glass. This will be evident by tire marks on the bottom glass
which are caused by the belts rubbing.

If the belts cause rub marks against the bottom glass contact
nextScan at [email protected] for assistance

Magnetic Film Guide (Exit Bin) Guide used to keep film in sequenced as the film exits and helps
prevent stacking towards the back of the exit bin so the film falls
forward.

Film Exit Guides Guides for directing the film into the exit bin.

FlexLoader Controller Board The controller board for the FlexLoader communicates with the
microfiche module and controls the mechanical functions of the
FlexLoader.

Tongue Belt Assembly Solenoid The Tongue Belt Assembly Solenoid controls the Belt Assembly
which loads film into the glass platen and picks the film off the
card platen and then places film into the exit bin.

FlexScan Lens Mount

The Flexscan uses a 60mm Nikon lens. The lens attaches onto a fixed lens C-mount
located at the center of each module as shown below.
Roll Film Microfiche

42 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Checking the Lens (FlexScan Roll and Microfiche)
Item What to Check

Nikon Lens Mount - Roll Film  The lens mount which attaches the C-Mount ring should be
level or the light and focus will not be accurate. If lens mount
is not level contact nextScan support for assistance.

Nikon Lens Settings  The lens should be set as follows:

a) The lens focus should be set to ”M” for manual mode.

b) The focus range should be set to “Full” rather than
“Limit” to allow full range of focus.
c) The lock button should be in the up position (“unlock”)
rather than down in the locked position (orange
indicator).
d) The F-Stop can be set between 2.8-11. Default = 5.6
The default for systems that have the fiber optic light
line is 2.8-5.6. Unless the camera height is below 5000
TrueDPI the F-Stop should not be higher than 5.6 or it
may not be able to saturate the image fully.

Cleaning\Maintenance  Periodically inspect for dust build up and clean the top and
bottom glass as necessary.
 Use a lint free soft cloth and be careful not to scratch. Do not
use abrasive (alcohol or ammonia based) cleaners as these
will cause damage. If the lens is really dirty use a lens
cleaner.
 Inspect for any scratches or damage (replace if necessary).

ATTENTION: When removing the lens make sure to never place

the bottom on flat surface to avoid scratching the bottom lens.
Always set lens upside down on a flat surface when it is not
installed on the scanner.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 43

 Item What to Check

Nikon Lens – C-Mount Ring\How to Install  Each module has a lens C mount ring in the center of the
film path. This is here the lens mounts.
 How to install Lens into the lens C mount: With the lens
Aperture scale facing forward, position the lens into the lens
C mount ring and turn left (clockwise) until it drops into the
mount.
OR
Align the Nikon front screw with the black or red dot on the
CMount Ring as shown below. Once aligned the lens
should drop right into the CMount Ring.

 Turn the lens ¼ to the right (counter clockwise) until it is

hand tight with the Aperture scale facing towards the front of
scanner.
 The lens should be tight and not loose in the mount. If loose
please contact nextScan for assistance. Never attempt to
tighten down the screws since this may cause them to strip.
 The f-stop should be fully open to 2.8 on systems using the
Light Line. On systems with Lumintec the F-stop can be set
between 2.8-8 and in some cases 11 so long as there is
enough light to fully saturate the image.

44 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Eclipse Camera and Lens

The Camera and Lens assemblies are mounted onto the scanner’s front face plate under
the systems front cover. Both the lens and camera travel along a single slider guide rail
and are attached to motorized parallel lead screw assemblies. The Lens and Camera
assemblies can travel up or down along the slider guides to various positions along the
optical path. The positions they both travel are factory calibrated. Each position changes
the Lens and Camera focal lengths which have been designed to project information
(image data and lighting) captured by CCD array for digitization. These positions are
controlled by NextStarPlus software and are based on the desired DPI (dots per inch)
and calculated Reduction Ratio of the microfilm.

Eclipse System E1 Chassis Eclipse Camera\Lens Assemblies

Checking the Lens Settings Eclipse Systems

Item What to Check
Rodenstock or Schneider  The f-stop should be fully open to 2.8.

 Inspect for dust build up and clean as

Note: Both lenses are fixed and should not be
necessary – Be careful not to scratch. Do not
moved from their positions to avoid altering
the preset focus table. Customers with both lens use abrasive (alcohol or ammonia based)
options please contact NextScan support cleaners. Lens cleaner is best.
for assistance.  Inspect for any scratches or damage (replace if
necessary).
 Verify the mount is square and screws are
secure.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 45

 Item What to Check
Lens Mount Differences If unit uses both the Rodenstock and Schneider
lens options the following applies:
Note: Eclipse models shipped after 2010 have a  Rodenstock use the lens extension – this is
Universal mount and do not require switching the used by default on all systems
Adaptor or focus tables.  Schneider lens - remove the lens extension
 Make sure the correct focus table is loaded.
Contact nextScan for assistance if you need
help importing or exporting a focus calibration
table.
Calibration Tables  Each unit ships with a default calibration table.
Note: The tables are saved in the following When both lens options are purchased it will
be necessary to have two saved calibration
directory: c:\program files\nextScan\Fusion\xxx.cal tables one for each lens. Refer to the Eclipse
It is recommended to create a backup in case of field service guide for details on creating and
an accidental deletion. saving focus tables.

46 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 3 – Film Threading\Loading - TrueDPI
Film Threading and Loading
To operate hardware or load and unload film properly in the application the film must be
manually threaded or loaded properly. This section describes the procedures for the
Eclipse and Flexscan Systems including the FlexScan FlexLoader for microfiche. In
addition how TrueDPI is achieved on the FlexScan system will be explained.

Threading Roll Film (Eclipse and FlexScan Systems)

The roll film path sub-system consists of the rollers and mechanics that move the roll film
so that it can be captured by the optical path subsystem. In the NextStarPlus Capture roll
film setup dialog box, you can choose the required options for threading the film leader.

The following illustrations show how to thread roll film on the Eclipse and FlexScan roll
film scanning systems.

The supply reel can be threaded differently for each spool, depending on the spool
configuration of the film.

✔ NOTE

The film must be aligned across the film path and each roller must turn smoothly
to ensure smooth operation and accurate linear image capture.

Eclipse Film Threading

The following figure shows the basic film path for the Eclipse systems; however, the
supply reel (located on the left side) can be threaded differently for each spool,
depending on the spool configuration of the film. In the NextStarPlus Capture window, the
left Supply Reel text box has two film leader loading options. The leader either will exit
the spool on the right or left side of the supply reel. Choose the correct option for how the
film is threading through the supply reel and always thread the film with the leader going

Eclipse Film Threading Example

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 47

 through the left side of the right take-up reel as shown in the in picture above.
The threading direction for the film path, as shown in the previous figure, is always
threaded from left to right.

✔ NOTE
The film must be aligned across the film path and each roller must turn smoothly
to ensure smooth operation and accurate linear image capture. The film guides
in the transport should be turned to match the size of film loaded i.e. 16 or 35 mm
film.

Rotating the Film Guides

The 16/35mm Film Guides rotate in place to guide the film. To adjust
turn each guide until it slightly locks in place with the desired 16 or 35
mm slot side up. The two inner left and right guides should be slightly
angled inwards and the outer left and right guides will be slightly
angled outwards. The 16/35mm Film Guides should also easily rotate
about the capstan rollers and should not be touching the rollers. If they
are in contact the system administrator as they may need to be
maintained or adjusted. On FlexScan systems the module Type A has
only one film guide to adjust.

FlexScan Roll Film Threading

The FlexScan system has two module types, two for roll film. Each module has a unique
film path and mechanical functions. The following illustrates film threading for both
nextScan A and B type roll film modules. For both types film threading starts from left to
right.

FlexScan Roll Film Threading Examples

✔ NOTE
The film should always be threaded through the right side of the take-up spool as
shown above. The system cannot put tension on the film if the spools are not
correctly threaded.

48 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 ✔ NOTE

Type A modules have a film guide located to the left of the lens which should be
turned to match the size of film loaded i.e. 16 or 35 mm film.

FlexScan Roll Film Threading - Module Type B without the cleaning roller

FlexScan Loading Microfiche

The FlexScan system has two module types, for microfiche. Older modules handle
standard film sizes or smaller and the jumbo module handles standard, jumbo, aperture
cards and various custom sizes. The new Jumbo microfiche is also known as the
universal module. Both modules have similar film loading and mechanical functions. The
following illustrates the film loading for the Jumbo aka universal microfiche module.

During initialization, the microfiche platen performs calibration to determine the x-axis, y-
axis, and home position of the platen. When the calibration is completed, the platen will
be in the open position. At this time the film can be loaded or you can wait until after the
software application has been started. The following describes how to place the film onto
the platen manually.

Manual Film Loading

1. Place the film face up inside the microfiche platen, with the title bar towards the front
opening.

2. Verify that the back and right edges of the film are aligned flush to the back and right
side edges of the platen, respectively.

The following illustration shows how the film should be loaded into the microfiche
platen.

FlexScan Microfiche Film Loading Example

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 49

FlexScan Microfiche Platen Inserts
Newer modules include two custom inserts that will fit the size of a particular format
such as jumbo, standard microfiche or aperture cards. The custom inserts help keep
the film from sliding. The following describes how to install inserts for Jumbo,
Standard and Aperture Card formats. If your unit does not have inserts you can skip
this section.

Glass platen configuration for Jumbo size fiche

For Jumbo size there are two pieces which are layered into the platen like a
puzzle. Below shows the top and bottom pieces in the order they are installed:

The following lists the order the pieces should be installed into microfiche module
slots:
A. Install the bottom glass first. It fits at the base of the platen holder and
should be seated flat. Make sure that the smaller glass platen cut out is
positioned on the right as shown below.

B. Install the top glass platen so it fits into the microfiche holder slots and lays
flat. The rollers should be aligned with the roller ramps.

50 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Glass platen configuration for Standard size fiche
For Standard size fiche there are three pieces which are layered. The right
picture below shows how piece #2 fits into piece#3.

The following lists the order the pieces should be installed into microfiche module
slots:
A. Install the bottom glass first. It fits at the base of the platen holder and
should be seated flat. Make sure that the smaller glass platen cut out is
positioned on the right as shown below.
Front View with lid off

B. Install the medal insert so it fits square and flush against the back of the
platen inserts.
Front View with lid off

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 51

 Side View with lid off

C. Install the standard top glass platen so it fits square inside the medal
plate slots and lays flat. The rollers should align inside the ears without
rubbing or catching inside the ear slots.
Roller side view with lid off

When open the rollers should be aligned with the center of roller at the
top of the roller ramps as shown below.

52 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Glass platen configuration for Aperture Cards – Optional
For Aperture Card and Ultra fiche (small jackets) there are three glass platen
pieces which are layered. Each glass platen is inserted into the microfiche platen
holder which has fitted cutouts for the top and bottom glass.
The following lists the order the pieces should be installed:
Top Glass Platen

Bottom Glass Platen

A. Install the bottom glass first. It fits at the base of the platen holder and should
be seated flat. Make sure that the smaller glass platen cut out is positioned
on the right as shown below.
Front View with lid off

B. Install the Silver or Black medal plate so it is flush with the bottom of the glass.
It should also be touching the back edge of the platen holder.
C. Install the top glass platen so it fits into the medal plate slot and lays flat. The
rollers should be aligned with the roller ramps.

Inside right side view showing Aperture Card\Ultra fiche platens installed.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 53

FlexLoader (optional attachment)
The FlexLoader is an optional attachment which can handle Jumbo, Standard, Aperture
Cards and custom film sizes. The following illustrates how to install and load the film the
standard and jumbo microfiche formats.

How to Install the FlexLoader

1. Turn the module power off. Power switch located at the back of the Flexscan as
shown below.

2. Install the Left and right locking screws.

3. Attach the FlexLoader flange onto the front opening of the microfiche module as
shown below. The FlexLoader flange should fit perfectly over the microfiche platen
opening where it is suspended at the front of the module.

54 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 4. Once installed move the FlexLoader Left or Right so the film will enter the platen in
the center.
Not Centered (Incorrect)

Centered (Correct)

Load Microfiche

1. Prep the film so it is even.

Before After

2. Install the Film guides into the slots Input bin so that they will fit the card size snug as
shown below. The film should also be centered. Use the center roller as reference.

Standard Jumbo uses the outter slots

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 55

 ✔ NOTE

Never load cards that are damaged such as ripped or torn. Damaged microfiche
should be manually inserted or re-jacketed to prevent causing additional
damage.

3. Verify the film guide magnets are flush against the back of the exit bin or they will
interfere film loading.

4. Insert fiche into the Flexloader bin so they are flush against the Card Plate Pressure.

5. Install the Card Back Stop so it is flush against the cards. Note the cards should not
bowed.

56 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 6. Position the Magnetic Film Guide so it is just below the center of the Film Exit Guides
as shown below. Adjust as necessary so that the cards maintain stack sequence in
the exit bin.

TrueDPI Target Chart (FlexScan Systems)

The TrueDPI is the total number of pixels per inch across the x & y axis captured by the
CCD to achieved the desired resolution.
Focusing the images on a FlexScan is done manually with a Nikon lens and on an
Eclipse via calibrated points. Each position of the camera changes the lens and camera
focal lengths, which are designed to project information (image data and lighting)
captured by the CCD array for digitization. These positions are based on the TrueDPI
(dots per inch and the reduction ratio of the microfilm).
✔ NOTE

Eclipse systems do not use a TrueDPI target chart. The TrueDPI positions for
the camera and lens are calibrated at the factory and automatically positioned
once the user inputs the resolution and reduction ratio.

How TrueDPI is calculated

The TrueDPI is calculated by multiplying the desired output DPI (dots per inch) by the
reduction ratio of the filmed images. For example: An output dpi of 200, multiplied by a
reduction ratio of 24, yields a TrueDPI value of 4800 total pixels.

TrueDPI Target Chart (FlexScan Only)

The true TrueDPI Target scale is used to determine where the head height should be
positioned based on the calculated TrueDPI. The positions listed range from the bottom
at 3600 to the top 15300. Each position represents where the camera height arrow
should be for the calculated true DPI.

RollFilm\Microfiche rue DPI Target Chart

✔ NOTE
The current scale is fixed, and there may be a variance + / - 10%, depending on
the unit. The chart is only a guide, intended to help reach an approximate
calculation of the desired TrueDPI. If the variance is significantly different contact
nextScan for assistance at [email protected].

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 57

 After calculating what the TrueDPI value should be, move the head up or down until the
camera height arrow is aligned with the correct value on the TrueDPI Target chart.

✔ NOTE

If the desired calculated true DPI does not appear on the scale, position the
camera height arrow as close as possible to the desired value that is marked on
the scale. For example, if the calculated true DPI is 9400, position the camera
height arrow at the division line on the scale between the 9300 and 9600 lines.

58 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 4 – NextStarPlus Base Path
Base Path
The “Base Path” is a directory location where the NextStarPlus CreateHierarchy,
NSController, Capture, Auditor and Output applications will look to access setup
information for processing an image or ribbon data.

Base Path Directory

After the initial NextStarPlus software installation the “Base Path” default directory will be
set to “c:\basepath”. Depending on the system’s configuration the “Base Path” directory
may vary. For proper communication between the applications, the user must use a UNC
(Universal Naming Convention) named path so that it points to the location of the “Base
Path” directory. See Changing the Base Path Configuration below for details on
changing the “Base Path” directory and using UNC naming conventions to point the
applications to the “Base Path” directory.

Base Path Working Directories

Under the Base Path location NextStarPlus automatically creates a set of working
directories that support the programs functionality. The directories created are listed
below:
Directory Description
The Detect directory contains the NS1, NS2 and NS3 folders which
contain the default detection parameters. When the user saves a custom
Detect NS1, NS2 or NS3 detection setups they will also be saved to this
directory.

The NextStarPlus Auditor directory contains default plus custom Output

NextStarPlusAuditor Settings and Grid template setup files. See Chapter 7: Auditor, for more
details on Output Settings and Grid Templates.

The NsController directory saves the nscontroller database file which is

NsController used for managing the ribbon file data. See Chapter 4: Controller for more
details on the Controller

The Remaster directory contains the FicheStar Remaster saved

Remaster
Templates.
AzMan is a role-based access control (RBAC) framework that provides an
administrative tool to manage authorization policy and a runtime that
allows applications to perform access checks against that policy.
NsAuthMan.ini – This ini file contains the path that points to the AzMan
NSControllerAuthManStore.xml file.
NSAuthorization files
NSControllerAuthManStore.xml – This file contains the nextStar Plus
software policies and group settings that can be edited using the Azman
program.
Nsdatabase_config.ini – This file points to the database location so the
software knows where to connect.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 59

NSBaseConfig.exe
The NSBaseConfig.exe program opens the NSBaseConfig dialog box which is used by
the operator or Systems Administrator for setting up the “Base Path”.

✔ NOTE
If the application is unable to find the “Base Path” directory or the Base Path is
misspelled, NextStarPlus will report a “Base Path” error. A “Base Path” error
may also indicate that the “Base Path” directory location is down or there is a
communication problem between the scanner and network.
Tip: If a “Base Path” error comes up, the connection can be verified by using
Windows Explorer to manually browse to the Base Path directory location. If the
Base Path location is not valid contract your Systems Administrator for
assistance.

Changing the Base Path Location (Optional)

How to Change the Base Path Location

1. Click on the Start button

2. Click on Programs\nextScan\NextStarPlus

3. Click on the on the NSBaseConfig.exe program

4. Type in the name for the new Base Path.

60 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Example:

If the RSD’s computer name is “RSDSTORAGE1” and the location of the base path was
set on the C: drive of the RSD, you will have a directory on the C: drive called “basepath”
as in the example above. The c:\basepath will need to be shared so that the NSController
and all Scanner, Auditing Workstations or RSD stations would be able to access the
Base Path folder. Subfolders for the NSController, detect and the audit should be
automatically created under this folder.

If we shared the local drive location with everyone on the network and gave it a shared
name of “RSDBasepath”. Below is an example of how you would setup your Base Path
settings for each machine.

Integrated System Base Path Setting

C:\Basepath
RSD (This location is setup as a network shared using the name
“RSDBasepath”)

Film Scanner \\RSDSTORAGE1\RSDBasepath

Auditor WorkStation \\RSDSTORAGE1\RSDBasepath

✔ NOTE

Sometimes the Computer Name of the machine on a network cannot resolved

fast and it can cause communications issues; so, use the IP address of the Base
Path location machine instead of the Computer Name in the Base Path Setting.
For example: \\192.168.2.240\RSDBasepath.
Get with your network administrator for help in this setting up this kind of setup.

5. Click on the OK button to save changes or Cancel to reject.

6. Make sure the new “Base Path” is shared.

✔ NOTE

The NextStarPlus default Base Path is “c:\basepath”; however, this may vary
based on the system’s configuration. In addition multiple units will require
additional setup configuration. For installation\configuration details please refer
to the NextStarPlus Installation Guide for your version of software and FlexScan
or Eclipse system.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 61

 Chapter 5 – NextStarPlus NSController
NSController Overview
The NSController is a web-based application that keeps track of the ribbon file scans,
whether items have been processed, and whether these items have been written to disk.
Thus, from the NSController, you can determine the status of each item and can continue
processing each ribbon forward as needed. The NSController also has state
management, ribbon deletion and administration capabilities.
✔ NOTE
If the NextStarPlus applications and hardware are not configured properly the
NSController and CreateHierarchy service will not run properly. Refer to the
NextStarPlus installation guide for assistance and Chapter 3 – NextStarPlus
Services.

NSController
The NSController can be accessed across the network. To access and view the
NSController a Brower link must be established. From the browser address text box type
in the http protocol; RSD (where the controller application is installed) or IP Address; and
the port number.
✔ NOTE

If you are unsure as to the configuration of your RSD or port number, please
contact your network administrator for assistance. During the NextStarPlus
installation the software will automatically default the address to the computer
name of the system it was installed on and default the port to 8888. Example:
http://nextScan1:8888, http://NextStarPlus64:8888 or http://192.168.2.56:8888.

After linking to the NSController via the browser the following window will appear.

62 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

NextStarPlus Controller Menu
Using the NextStarPlus Controller Menu the user can click on an item to view or manage
the following data: Servers, Outputs, Drives, Jobs, Batches, Ribbons and Administration.

NextStarPlus Servers
From the NextStarPlus Controller menu click on Servers to bring up the Servers window.
The NextStarPlus Servers displays the parameters that CreateHierarchy (CH) service will
use.

The following table lists various Server information and it's description.

Name Description

Host Name Displays the Host Name of the RSD.

IP Addresses Displays the available IP Addresses.

Port Displays the TCP Port the RSD listens on.

Busy Displays the CreateHierarchy service Busy Status.

Ribbon Locations Displays the available ribbon drive locations.

Ribbon Shares Displays the RSD Ribbon Shares.

The Refresh button updates the NextStarPlus Servers display

Refresh view.

NextStarPlus Outputs
From the NextStarPlus Controller menu click on Output to bring up the Outputs window.
The NextStarPlus Outputs displays the RSD yes status when Output is running and no
when Output is not running.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 63

 The following table lists various Outputs information and its description.

Name Description

Host Name Displays the RSD Host Name.

Busy Displays the Busy status of Output. (Yes or No)

The Refresh button updates the NextStarPlus Outputs display

Refresh
view.

NextStarPlus Drives
From the NextStarPlus Controller menu click on Drives to bring up the Drives window.
The NextStarPlus Drives displays the available RSD (s), information and status.

The following table lists various drive information and its description.

Name Description

Host Name Displays the RSD Host Name.

Ribbon Location Displays the Busy status of Output.

Ribbon Share Displays the network Ribbon Share name.

Application ID Displays which service it is running. i.e. CreateHierarchy, Output etc.

Displays the available RSD free space in Bytes.

Disk Free Bytes Note: The warning level for low disk space can be changed in the
CreateHierarchy- configurator.exe program. See Chapter 3, Roll
Film\Fiche Warning Level (GB) for details.

Disk Total Bytes Displays the total RSD space in Bytes

Displays the current RSD Busy state. For a list of the states and
State descriptions see NextStarPlus Drives Current Busy State later at the
end of this section
Allows the user to Delete the drive entry from the database.
Note: To delete a drive from the list that has a prior host name the
x createhierarchy service must be stopped before deleting. The drive
cannot be deleted until all ribbons accociated with the older host name
are deleted or until the drive location information is modified

64 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Name Description

Allows the user to modify the drive entry information from the
database. i.e. Host Name, Ribbon Share Location and Ribbon Share.
This feature is especially useful if the computer name or ribbon
location was changed and there are still ribbons in the database
associated with the original name\location.
m

Click Save to keep changes

Click Cancel to exit without saving

Refresh The Refresh button updates the NextStarPlus Outputs display view.

Allows the user to create a new drive location including the Host
Name, Ribbon Share Location and Ribbon Share.

New Click Save to keep changes

Click Cancel to exit without saving

Save Saves and updates the State changes selected by the user.

NextStarPlus Drives Current States

Current States Description

The drive is busy scanning and cannot be used for Output but is
Scan Busy available for Auditing.

The drive is available for output and auditing only.

Output Available
The drive is busy outputting and cannot be used for scanning but
Output Busy is available for Auditing.

The drive is not busy

Not Busy

✔ NOTE

Although the drive is marked “Not Busy” it is important to know that scanning and
output cannot run at the same time unless they are performed on different drives.
Also, if the Submit Changes button has not been selected after the user manually
changes a drive Current State, the changes will not take place.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 65

Jobs
From the NextStarPlus Controller menu click on Jobs to bring up the Jobs window. The
Jobs window allows the user to manage the ribbons based on the Job ID and the Batch
ID typed in the Capture window. For more details on Capture see Chapter 6 or 7 Capture
for Roll Film or Microfiche. To select all jobs listed in the displayed list click on the check
box with gray background. To select a single ribbon in the displayed list click on the
white check box next to the desired job. The following will describe in further detail each
feature in the Jobs window.

Filters
The Filters allow the user to filter the Job Id based on the Batch Count. The Batch Count is the
number of Batches under each Job ID.

Available Jobs
The Available Jobs displays the Job ID, Create Time and Batch Count for each Job ID.
To change the sort of the Available Jobs list view, click on the arrow next to the title of the
desired column. Once the arrow is in the down position the list will be sorted
alphabetically, numerically or by the create time depending on the information listed in
the title column. The Check Boxes to the right of the Available Jobs display allow the user
to select all or an individual JobID to be marked for deletion. To select an individual Job
ID click on the Check Box next to it. To select all batches listed in the displayed list click
on the highlighted Check Box.

Individual Job
Clicking on the highlighted text more brings up the Individual Job display and
NextStarPlus Job Information details.

66 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

The following table lists the NextStarPlus Job Information displayed and its description.

Name Description

Displays the current Job ID. The Job ID is defined by the user during
Job ID the Capture process. See Chapter 7 or 8 Capture for Roll film or
Microfiche

Batch Count Displays the number of batches under the current Job ID.

Create Time Displays the date and time information for the current Job ID.

Enable Continuous Naming is used to enable or disable continuous

naming of the batches under the current Job ID.
How to Change:

Click on Change.

A. Use the drop down arrow to select yes or no. Click on the set
button to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.
Enable Continuous
Naming
B. If set to Yes, image numbering for each batch will continue
from where the last ribbon ended.

If set to No, image numbering will start at 1 or 0 for each ribbon

depending on how it was set in the Auditor. See Chapter 8 for
more details on the Auditor, under “Output Options, 1 or 0 Based
Naming”.

Note: This setting does not override numbering changes made in the
Auditor. See Chapter 8 for more details on the Auditor Software, under
“Initial Output Numbering” and “1 or 0 Based Naming”.

Clicking on the Batches button brings up the batches menu where the
user has the ability to control the Batch Output Ordering. This is
especially useful if the batches were scanned out of order.

Click on the +\- button to bring up the Batch Output Ordering display.
Use the up\down buttons to change the order in which each will be
written to disk during the output process. To accept changes click on
the Save button. For more details on the output process see Chapter
9 Output.
Clicking on more brings you to the
Batches window described in the
next section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 67

 Name Description

Batch ID Clicking on the highlighted text more brings up the Individual Batch
display and NextStarPlus Batch Information details will be covered
under the next section “Batches”.

Delete: Allows the user to delete the current Job ID from the controller
Job Operations list and from file. This will also delete any batches and ribbons
associated with this Job ID.

Delete The Delete button allows the user to Delete the selected Job ID entry
from the database and from file.

Batches
From the NextStarPlus NSController menu click on Batches to bring up the Batches
window. The Jobs window allows the user to manage the ribbons based on the Batch ID
typed in the Capture window. For more details on Capture see Chapter 7 or 8 Capture for
Roll Film or Microfiche. To select all batches listed in the displayed list click on the
check box with gray background. To select a single batch in the displayed list click on
the white check box next to the desired batch. The following will describe in further detail
each feature in the Batches window.

Filters
The Filters allow the user to filter the Batches based on the Job ID and Ribbon Count.

68 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Available Batches
The Available Batches window displays the Job ID, Batch ID, Create Time and Ribbon Count for
each Batch ID. To change the sort of the Available Batches list view, click on the arrow next to
the title of the desired column. Once the arrow is in the down position the list will be sorted
alphabetically, numerically or by the Create time depending on the information listed in the title
column. The Check Boxes to the right of the Available Batches display allow the user to select all
or an individual batch to be marked for deletion. To select an individual Batch ID click on the
highlighted Check Box next to it.

Individual Batch
Clicking on the highlighted text more brings up the Individual Batch display and
NextStarPlus Batch Information details.

The following table lists the NextStarPlus Batch Information displayed and its description.

Name Description

Displays the current Job ID. The Job ID is defined by the user during
Job ID the Capture process. See Chapter 7 or 8 Capture for Roll film or
Microfiche

Displays the current Batch ID number. The Batch ID is defined by the

Batch ID user during the Capture process. See Chapter 7 or 8 Capture for Roll
film or Microfiche

The Ribbon Count displays the number of scanned ribbons under the
Ribbon Count
current Batch ID.

The Create Time displays the day, date and time the scanned ribbons
Create Time was created.

Allows the user to treat a group of ribbons as a batch.

Output Batch How to Change:

as a Whole A. Click on Change

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 69

 Name Description

B. Use the drop down arrow to select yes or no. Click on the
Set button to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.
Output Batch
as a Whole cont’
Note: This feature If set to Yes, the batch will be marked as compete. In the Auditor the
setting does not option Finish Batch will be available. The user will be able to select
override numbering Finish Batch when the last ribbon in the batch is done being audited.
changes made in the See Chapter 9 for more details on the Auditor Software,
Auditor. See Chapter 9 “Menu\File\Finish Batch”.
Initial Output
Numbering for detail If set to No, the batch will be marked as not completed. The File\Finish
Batch option will not be available in the Auditor.

The Batch Ready For Output feature will only show up when the
Output Batch As A Whole has been set to yes. This feature allows the
user to mark the batch as ready for output.

How to Change:
Batch Ready For
A. Click on Change
Output

B. Use the drop down arrow to select yes or no. Click on the Set
button to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.

If set to Yes, the batch will be marked as ready for output.

If set to No, the batch will be marked as not ready for output until the
Finish Batch has been selected in the Auditor.
Enable Continuous Naming is used to enable or disable continuous
naming of the Batch Id ribbons.
Enable Continuous
How to Change:
Naming
A. Click on Change.
Note: This feature
setting does not
override numbering
B. Use the drop down arrow to select yes or no. Click on the set button
changes made in the
to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.
Auditor. See Chapter 8
for more details on the
Auditor Software, under
“Initial Output
Numbering” and “1 or 0
If set to Yes, image numbering for each batch will continue from where
Based Naming”.
the last batch ended.
If set to No, image numbering will start at 1 or 0 for each batch
depending on how it was set in the Auditor.

70 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Name Description

The Ribbons menu gives the user the ability to control the Ribbon
Output Order which is useful if the ribbons were scanned out of order.

Click on the +\- toggle button to bring up the Ribbons Output Ordering
display. Use the up\down buttons to change the order in which each
will be written to disk during the output process. To accept changes
click on the Save button.
Ribbons ID +\-

Clicking on more brings you to

the Individual Ribbons display
which will be described in the
Individual Ribbons section.

Clicking on the highlighted text more brings up the Individual Ribbon

Ribbon ID more display and details. This will be covered in the next section.

Delete: Allows the user to delete the selected batch from the controller
list and from file.

Reset Last Output Numbers: Allows the user to reset the Output
Batch Operations numbering back to 0 or 1 if the continuous numbering option was
selected. Note: If the “Alternate Numbering” feature was used it will not
reset the user typed in starting number. To change an alternate
number the user must do this from the auditor.

Ribbons
From the NextStarPlus Controller menu click on Ribbons to bring up the Ribbons window.
The Ribbons window allows the user to manage all scanned ribbons and displays the
Available Ribbons list with detailed information for each ribbon file. To select all ribbons
listed in the displayed list click on the check box with gray background. To select a single
ribbon in the displayed list click on the white check box next to the desired ribbon. The
following will describe in further detail each feature in the Ribbons window.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 71

Filters
The Filters allow the user to filter the Ribbons based on the Ribbon Location Host Name, Ribbon
Location, Ribbon Share, Job ID, Batch ID, Current State Batch ID, Current State, Scanner and
Group.

Available Ribbons
The Available Ribbons displays the Ribbon Location Host Name, Ribbon Location,
Ribbon Share, Job ID, Batch ID, Ribbon Name, Current State, Scan Time, Scan Time,
Last State Change Time, Scanner, and Group for each Ribbon.

To change the sort of the Available Ribbons list view, click on the arrow next to the title of
the desired column. Once the arrow is in the down position the list will be sorted
alphabetically, numerically or by the scan time depending on the information listed in the
title column. The Check Boxes to the right of the Available Ribbons display allow the user
to select all or an individual ribbon to be marked for deletion or state change (s). To
select an individual Ribbon ID click on the Check Box next to it. To select an all ribbons
click on the Check Box at the top of the list with the gray colored background.

Individual Ribbon
Clicking on the highlighted text more brings up the Individual Ribbon display and
NextStarPlus Ribbon Information details.

72 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 The following table lists the NextStarPlus Ribbon Information displayed and its
description.

Name Description

Job ID Displays the Job Id Name.

Displays the Batch Id Name.

Edit - Allows the user to change the Batch ID name.
How to Change:
A. Click on Edit:
Batch ID
B. Type in the new Batch ID name under the New
BatchID text box. Click on the set button to accept
changes or Cancel to reject changes.

Displays the Ribbon Id Name.

Change - Allows the user to change the Ribbon ID name.
How to Change:
A. Click on Change:
Ribbon ID
B. Type in the new Ribbon ID name under the New
Ribbon ID text box. Click on the Change button to accept
changes or Cancel to reject changes.

Server Host Name Displays the RSD Host Name.

Displays the Disk location where the ribbon file is stored.

Server Disk Location
Example: E:\ribbon2\

Displays the RSD Share path where the ribbon file is stored.
Server Share Path Example: \\create3\E:\ribbon2\

Displays the day, time and date information of the scanned

Scan Time
ribbon.

Last State Change Time Displays the time that current ribbon was last changed.

Displays the current state of the ribbon. For a list of the states
Current State and descriptions see NextStarPlus Ribbons Current States
later on in this section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 73

 Name Description

Allows the user to mark the “Last Ribbon In Batch” status to

yes or no. If yes is selected the batch will start outputting once
all ribbons in the batch have been audited.

Note: If the batches must output in order the user will need to
select the option “Output Batch as a Whole” or they will not
output in sequential order. The “Output Batch as a Whole” is
Last Ribbon In Batch
selected at scan time or can be selected in the Auditor or
NSController as follows:

To select “Output Batch as a Whole” in the Auditor click on

Tools\Administration\Batch Administration\Edit\ and select the
“Output Batch as a Whole” check box.

To select “Output Batch as a Whole” in the NSController click

on the Batches tab. Then click on the “More” option next to the
desired ribbon and select yes or no for the “Output Batch as a
Whole” option.

Displays the local host name of the scanner where the ribbon
Scanner
was created.

This feature allows the end user to select a single or group of

ribbons and assign them to a new group. This makes it easier
to manage the ribbons based on any number of criteria such
Group
as by date, project, ribbon state, Job Id, etc. A Group type can
be added using the Ribbons tab menu option Group covered
later on in this section.

Allows the user to change the Index Record Locked option

from no to yes. By selecting yes the current ribbon is then
locked so that the Index Record information cannot be
modified or deleted during the audit process.
Index Record Locked

Displays detailed information such as when the ribbon was

created and the various state changes. Click on the +\- button
to bring up the Logs display.
Logs

The Logs display brings up the Log Time, Application and Log
Entry information.

Output Logs Displays detailed information on the output of the ribbon file
such total image count, output success status and log time.
Click on the +\- button to bring up the Logs display.

74 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Name Description

Output Logs cont’

The Output Logs display brings up the Total Image Count,
Succeeded and Log time information.

NextStarPlus Ribbon Delete: Allows the user to delete the current ribbon from the
Operations controller list and from file.

NextStarPlus Ribbons Current States

The following table lists the various states for the Available Ribbons and its description.

Current States Description

Ribbon has been opened and closed but the finish audit has not been
Auditing and Closed performed.

Auditing and Open Ribbon is currently open and being audited by end user.

COM Detected and FicheStar Ribbon State - COM (computer output microfilm) Ribbon
Closed detected and closed state.

Com Detected and FicheStar Ribbon State - COM (computer output microfilm) Ribbon
Open detected and open state.

This state is used only with custom indexing software that is used to
separate tagged images\documents that will be indexed in the
Cutting NSController. For more information please contact your nextScan
sales representative.

The ribbon is in the process of exporting to a new ribbon location. The

Exporting location settings are configured using the Import\Export program.
Contact nextScan for details.

Frame Detection Frame Detection is in process

This state is used only with custom indexing software and allows the
Indexing user to type in the desired index information. For more information
please contact your nextScan sales representative.

OCR program running. Currently only available with the Virtual Film
OCRing method.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 75

 Current States Description

Outputting The ribbon is currently being outputted.

Post Auditing Auditing is completed.

Post COM Detect FicheStar Ribbon State. COM Frame Detection is completed

This state is used only with custom indexing software. For more
Post Cutting information please contact your nextScan sales representative.

Post Exporting The Export has been completed.

Post Frame Detection Frame Detection is completed.

This state is used only with custom indexing software. For more
Post Indexing information please contact your nextScan sales representative

OCR program has completed. Currently only available with the Virtual
Post OCRing Film method.

Post Outputting The output has been completed.

Post Remaster FicheStar - The remaster process has finished.

Post Scanning The ribbon scan finished scanning.

Post XML Creation The XML file has been created.

Pre Auditing State Prior to Auditing.

Pre COM Detect FicheStar – COM Frame Detection has not been performed.

76 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Current States Description

This state is used only with custom indexing software. For more
Pre Cutting information please contact your nextScan sales representative

Pre Exporting State Prior to Exporting.

Pre Frame Detection Frame Detection has not been performed.

This state is used only with custom indexing software. For more
Pre Indexing information please contact your nextScan sales representative

OCR has not been performed. Currently only available with the Virtual
Pre OCRing Film method.

Pre Outputting Ribbon is in a state ready to be output.

Pre Remaster FicheStar - The remaster process has not been performed.

Pre Scanning The ribbon state prior to scanning.

Pre XML Creation The XML file has not been written.

Ready for Deletion Ribbon file has been output and is ready for deletion

Remaster The ribbon is in process of being remastered.

Scanning The ribbon is in process of being scanned.

The system was unable to assign or recognize the state of the ribbon
file. This typically happens when output fails. To find out more details
open the ErrTrace text document located in the c:\program
files\nextScan\NextStarPlus directory. In addition, you can determine
Unknown State which process put the ribbon in the Unknown State by clicking the +\-
button next to Logs. If the last state change listed was performed by
Output, click the +\- button next to Output Logs to get more
information.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 77

 Current States Description

User State 0 Custom State

User State 1 Custom State

User State 2 Custom State

User State 3 Custom State

User State 4 Custom State

User State 5 Custom State

User State 6 Custom State

The ribbon file data, frame detection and output information is being
XML Creation written to an XML file.

Ribbon Location Options

The Ribbon Location Options are used to change the current host name and drive
location of a ribbon or ribbons. At least one ribbon must be selected. The user uses the
New Host Name and New Drive Location drop down menus to select the new desired
host and ribbon location. After clicking on the Change Locations button all checked
ribbon files will be changed to the Host Name and Drive Location.

78 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Delete Options
The Delete Options gives several ways to delete ribbons.

Delete Ribbon Files On Disk – Performs delete process in the background. All selected
ribbon files will be removed from NSController database and from disk file location. This
option is best when deleting a large group of ribbons that may take extra time to remove.
When this option is used in conjunction with the Delete Immediately check box the
database entries are deleted immediately so that when the end user attempts to scan a
ribbon with the same name it does not report that the ribbon still exits.

Delete Ribbon Files on Disk and Delete Immediately – When both options are checked
the software will perform the delete process in the foreground. All selected ribbon files
will be removed from database and from disk location. This option is best for deleting
single or smaller batches of ribbons.

Delete Immediately – Deletes ribbon from the database but not from disk.
Deleted Files from the Ribbon List but not from the disk
Once a Ribbon file has been deleted using the Delete Immediately option it
cannot be put back into the Available Ribbons list. If a ribbon file was deleted
using only the delete button the user can still open the ribbon, however, it will be
outside of the NSController database management system.

The following describes how to open a ribbon file after it has been deleted from
the Ribbons list but not from disk.

How to Open a Ribbon File in the Auditor

Click on File\Open\Browse and locate the ribbon file.

How to Open a Ribbon File Directly

This is done by going to the ribbon directory and double clicking on the ribbon file
(filename.rib). Double clicking directly on the ribbon file will also bring up the
Auditor.

✔ NOTE

After double clicking on the ribbon file and it does not come up the user may
need to delete the XML file associated with it. It is also important to know that if
a ribbon is opened outside the NSController it can be audited and changes saved
but it must be output manually. See Chapter 10 Output for details on how to
output ribbon files manually.

State Change Options

The State Change Options are used to change the current state of a ribbon or ribbons.
At least one ribbon must be selected and the Enable Bulk Current State Change check

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 79

 box must be checked. The user selects the desired state from the “New Current State”
drop down list. After clicking on the Change States button all checked ribbon files will be
changed to the New Current State. For details on the available states see the
NextStarPlus Ribbons Current States section listed earlier in this section.

Group Change Options

The Group Change Options are used to change the current group of a ribbon or
ribbons. At least one ribbon must be selected and the Enable Bulk Group Change check
box must be checked. The user selects the desired group from the “New Group” drop
down list. After clicking on the Change Groups button all checked ribbon files will be
changed to the New Group. For details on how to add or change group types see the
Ribbons Menu view under groups covered later on in this section.

Administration
From the NextStarPlus NSController menu click on Administration to bring up the
Administration window. The Administration window allows the user to manage the
NSController database such as setting the base path or setting refresh rates. The
following will describe in further detail these features in the Administration window.

Current NextStarPlus Controller Base Path

The Current NextStarPlus Controller Base Path allows the user to change the
NextStarPlus Base Path location.

How to Change the Current NextStarPlus Base Path:

A. Click on Change to bring up the following dialog box.

B. Type in the new base path location in the New Base Path text box.
C. Click on the Set button to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.

80 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 D. Verify Changes were updated correctly.

Ribbons\Jobs\Batches Page Refresh Rate (seconds)

The Ribbons\Jobs\Batches Page Refresh rate (seconds) options allow the user to
change how often in seconds the NSController will redisplay and update information.

How to Change the Ribbons\Jobs\Batches Page Refresh Rate (seconds):

A. Click on Change next to the Ribbons, Jobs or Batches.

Ribbons Example:

B. Type in the number in seconds in the New Ribbons Page Refresh Page text box.

C. Click on the Set button to accept changes or Cancel to reject changes.

D. Verify the new value in seconds was updated.
Refresh
The Refresh button updates the NextStarPlus Administration display view and reflects
any applied changes.

Exit
Click on the cancel button located at the upper right corner of the web browser to exit
the NSController database.

Menu View Options

The NextStarPlus Controller Ribbons and Administration tabs have additional Menu View
options. Some of these menu options have features that are only available with custom
indexing software. Please contact your sales representative if you are interested in
purchasing custom indexing. The following will describe in further detail the features
found in each menu and will note if the feature is optional.

Ribbons Menu View

From the NextStarPlus Controller click on the Ribbons tab to bring up the Ribbons
window.

Ribbons in Main Menu

If the Main option is highlighted in red the NSController will display the Available
Ribbons list with detailed information for each ribbon file. See the Ribbons section
covered earlier in this chapter for detailed.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 81

Ribbons in Indexing Menu – (Optional)
If the Indexing option is highlighted in red the NSController will display the Available
Ribbons list with detailed information for each ribbon file. It will include the option Use
Alternate State. The Use Alternate State Option allows the end users to choose from a
list of custom alternate ribbon states where the ribbons have gone through the cutting
process. For example the cutting state is used to separate documents marked for
indexing in the Auditor that will be manually indexed in the NSController window. The
indexed ribbons can also be reviewed again and accepted or rejected. This allows the
end user to check the typed index data for accuracy. In addition this option can also be
set for multiple checks where results can be examined and compared.

For more information on obtaining this feature please contact your nextScan sales
representative.

Indexing Filters and Options – (Optional)

The Filters and Option features are used to manage the ribbons which can be sorted,
deleted, or processed in the desired order for indexing.

Ribbons in Groups Menu – (Optional)

If the Group option is highlighted in red the NSController will display the Available
Groups where new ribbon groups can be created or deleted.

Filters
The Filters allow the user to sort ribbon groups by using the Group Name drop down
menu.

82 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Available Ribbon Groups

The Available Ribbons Groups dialog box will display the number of groups available
and the View drop down arrow allows the user to select the maximum number of groups
that can be displayed on each page. To change the ascending or descending group order
click on the arrow inside the gray title bar label Group Name. Once the arrow is in the
down position the list will be sorted alphabetically or numerically. The Check Boxes to the
right of the Available Ribbon Groups display allows the user to select all or individual
groups to be marked for deletion.

Delete Options
The Delete Options allows the user to delete selected groups. If the group has ribbons
assigned, then the act of deleting the group will remove those ribbons from any groups.

New Group Options

The New Group Options allows the user to create a new group using the New Group
Name text box. To create a group the user types in the new group name in the New
Group Name text box and then clicks on the Create Group Button. The new Group name
will then be added the Available Ribbon Groups list and the user can use the
NSController Group Change Options to add ribbons to the new group.

Administration Menu View

From the NextStarPlus Controller click on the Administration tab to bring up the
Administration window.

Main
If the Main option is highlighted in red the NSController will display the NextStarPlus
Controller Administration window. The Administration window allows the user to
manage the NSController database such as setting the base path or setting refresh rates.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 83

Ribbon States
While in the Administration tab, if the Ribbon State option is highlighted in red the
NSController will display the Available User Ribbon States list. The display will include
the features Add User Ribbon States, Add User Ribbon States and State
Transitions. These features allow the end users to customize state transitions and
change existing ribbon state transitions. The following will describe how the features
work.

Available User Ribbon States

The Available User Ribbon States allow the end user to create new custom states.

How to create a custom ribbon state:

A. Highlight a user state from 0-6 (select only one). You can also just type in a name
without selecting a user state.

B. Type in a Description for the state. For example type in Rescans.

C. Click on Save and you will see the new state added to the list as shown below and to
the State Transitions drop down list:

How to delete a ribbon state

A. Highlight the state by clicking on it

B. Click on Delete Selected and it will be deleted from the list

84 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

State Transitions
State Transitions are the different states a ribbon can transition through. In the State
Transition dialog window the user can change the default state for the Success or Failure
Transition of a ribbon state.

State Transition Success\Failure

Options

Success Failure
Transition Transition

Pre Auditing

Pre COM Detect Pre Frame Detection

Pre Cutting Pre Indexing

Pre Exporting Pre OCRing

Pre Frame Detection Pre Outputting

Pre Indexing Pre Remaster

Pre OCRing Ready for Deletion

Pre Remaster Unknown State

Ready For Deletion User 0-6

User States 0-6 Custom

Custom State

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 85

How to Change a Ribbon State Transition
The following provides step by step instructions on how to change the current State
Transition Success or Failure of a ribbon. The example will use the “Post Auditing”
Success Transition state.

A. Choose a state to change. For example locate Post Frame Detection state under the
State column.

B. Under the Success Transition column use the scroll bar to locate the desired success
state transition and highlight it as shown below.

Before

After

C. Once the new transition state is highlighted click on the Save button at the bottom of
the dialog box to save the new Success Transition.

The new Post Frame Detection will now skip the normal Pre Auditing state and go
directly into the pre outputting state. This transition change is particularly useful
when detection or image processing do not require any changes or auditing. This will
increase performance since the Pre Outputting state go directly in a state ready to be
output after the ribbon has been scanned

Image Indexing – (Optional)

The Image Indexing menu will bring up the NextStarPlus Controller Administration- Image
Indexing window. The features found in this window are only available with the optional
custom indexing software used for tagging images\documents for indexing purposes.

Use Image Indexing

The “Use Image Indexing” is where the indexing features are turned on (yes) or off (no).
However, this feature will not work without the correct software installed.

86 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Image Indexing Cutting Level
Allows the user to select which Ribbon level the software will perform the cutting process
on. The level selected will also determine the resolution the images will be viewed at
during the indexing process. The default should be set to 4.

Reports – (Optional)
The Reports menu will bring up the NextStarPlus Filter for generating reports from the
SQL database information. This feature is only available with the optional custom
indexing software used for tagging images\documents for indexing purposes.

Filters
Allows the user to type in a Start Date\Time and End Date\Time for the purpose of
collecting statistical information within the database.

Generate
Clicking on the generate button will output a file called NextStarPlusReport.csv. This file
can be used to report statistical data between a start\date and end\date period. Once the
ribbons are deleted from the NSController the data is no longer available to generate a
report. The NextStarPlusReport.csv file can be saved and viewed using a third party
program for tracking purposes. The follow is an example of the data that can be
collected.

Example Report:
Job ID,Batch ID,# of Images

Total # of Rollfilm Ribbons = 20

Total # of Fiche Ribbons = 100,000
Total # of Paper Ribbons = 20,000
Total # of RollFilm Images = 50,526
Total # of Fiche Images = 6,500,000
Total # of Paper Images = 5682

Job ID,Batch ID,Index String,# of Images

Total Number of Index String Images = 629,405

✔ NOTE

This feature is optional and requires customization. Please contact nextScan

sales for details.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 87

 Chapter 6 – NSPlus Background Services
Apache2, MySQL, nextStarCH, nextStarXMLPrep
and nextStarGrabService
Overview

The Apache2, MySQL, CreateHierarchy, XMLPrep and FrameGrabber are services that
run in the background.

Apache is used for viewing the NSController database. MySQL is database service.
CreateHierarchy is a service which creates the ribbon data. The XMLPrep service
creates the XML file using the output settings selected in the Scan Application in the
Edit\Preferences dialog box. XMLPrep will also run frame detection using the Detection
or Grid setup selected in the Scan Application under the Edit\Preferences dialog box. The
following describes each service in detail.

✔ NOTE

For detailed instructions on how to make configuration changes to

CreateHierarchy, see the NextScan Installation Guide for the FlexScan or Eclipse
System. To obtain a copy of the guide, contact NextScan support at
[email protected], or call 208-513-4000.

Apache2
Apache is a public-domain open source Web service. Nextscan uses this service to allow
end users to web-browse to the NSController database.

CreateHierarchy (nextStarCH) Basic Background and

Information
CreateHierarchy is a Client-Server application that runs on Windows XP, Windows 7 and
Windows 2003. The purpose of CreateHierarchy is to receive the scanned image data
from the NextStarPlusScan application. CreateHierarchy monitors a single network port
on one or more network addresses on the computer on which it is installed.
CreateHierarchy also logs localized messages to the Windows Event Viewer.

Use the following procedure to create a new CreateHierarchy configuration.

✔ NOTE
If CreateHierarchy was installed as a service (the default installation), you do not
need to create a new configuration.

1. Click Start and then Programs.

2. Click Accessories and then Windows Explorer.
3. Click My Computer and then Local Disk (C:) to expand the directories.
4. Click Program Files and then nextScan to expand the directories.

88 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 5. Click NextStar.
6. In the right-hand panel, double-click CreateHierarchyConfigurator.exe. The
CreateHierarchy Configuration dialog box opens.
7. Select the Input/Output File.
8. Using the arrow keys, select the IP addresses for CreateHierarchy to monitor
from the available options.
9. Type the Listening port for CreateHierarchy to monitor.
10. Under Disk Configuration, add, edit, or remove the directory to which you want
CreateHierarchy to store ribbons.
11. Type a disk block multiplier value. This is the number of writes the program will
attempt to buffer before committing to disk. (Recommended values are between
300-1000.)
12. Select a frame detection level.
13. Click to save the configuration and exit.

Start nexStarCH
nextStarCH can be started and operated as a service or from a command line.

When NextStarPlus software is installed by using the software installer, CreateHierarchy

is installed by default as a service. When CreateHierarchy is installed as a service it will
start when the computer power is turned on. This is the preferred method of running the
CreateHierarchy service.

Tip: If there is difficulties, diagnosing and solving a problem it may be easier to

troubleshoot running CreateHierarchy from the command line.

Starting Createhierarchy nextStarCH as a Service

If nextStarCH was not started when the computer was turned on, or if it was stopped and
needs to be restarted, follow one of the procedures below.

✔ NOTE

The computer must be turned on and you must have administrative privileges for
the system.

Start CreateHierarchy (nexStarCH) as a service from a command line

1. Click Start and then Run.
2. Type cmd.exe in the command line dialogue box and then press Enter.
3. Type net start createHierarchy and then press Enter.

Start CreateHierarchy (nexStarCH) as a service from the Service Control Manager

1. Right-click My Computer.
2. Click Manage and then Services and Applications to expand these directories.
3. Click Services.
4. In the right-hand panel, click nextStarCH.
5. Click Start.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 89

Running CreateHierarchy from a Command Line
✔ NOTE

The computer must be turned on and you must have administrative privileges for
the system.

1. Click Start and then Run.

2. Type cmd.exe in the command line dialogue box and then press Enter.
3. Type cd c:\Program Files\nextScan\NextStarPlus at the prompt and then press
Enter.
4. Type createHierarchy.exe -v -fg at the prompt and then press Enter.

Stop CreateHierarchy
CreateHierarchy can be stopped when it is running as a service from a command line or
from the Service Control Manager. CreateHierarchy can also be stopped when it is
running from a command line.

Stopping CreateHierarchy as a Service

To stop CreateHierarchy when it is running as a service, follow one of the procedures
below.
✔ NOTE

The computer must be turned on and you must have administrative privileges for
the system.

To stop CreateHierarchy as a service from a command line:

1. Click Start and then Run.

2. Type cmd.exe in the command line dialogue box and then press Enter.
3. Type net stop createHierarchy and then press Enter.
To stop CreateHierarchy as a service from the Service Control Manager:

1. Right-click My Computer.
2. Click Manage and then Services and Applications to expand the directories.
3. Click Services.
4. In the right-hand panel, click createHierarchy.
5. Click Stop.

Stopping CreateHierarchy from a Command Line

✔ NOTE

The computer must be turned on and you must have administrative privileges for
the system.

1. Click the command line window that was used to start CreateHierarchy.
2. Press the Ctrl and C (Ctrl-C) keys simultaneously.

90 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

CreateHierarachyConfigurator.exe Dialog Box
The CreateHierarchyConfigurator.exe application is a program which brings up a dialog
box for configuring the CreateHierarchy service. CreateHierarchy must be configured on
all NextStarPlus Ribbon Storage Devices (RSD) in order for the NextStarPlus application
to run properly.
To Bring up the CreateHierarchy Configurator.exe dialog box, Click on Start\All
Programs\nextScan\NextStarPlus\createHierarchyConfigurator.exe

After clicking on the CreateHierarchyConfigurator.exe option the following dialog box

will come up.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 91

Input/Output File
The Input/Output File text box designates the file path location for the
createHierarchy.exe.config file. The following example is the default location.

✔ NOTE
The createHierarchy.exe.config file must be in the same location as
createHierarchy.exe, and it must be named createHierarchy.exe.config in order
for it to locate the file properly.

Network Configuration
Listen On All Addresses
By default the RSD will listen on the given port and the assigned IP addresses. If the
Listen On All Addresses check box is marked the RSD will listen to the given port on all
configured RSD network interfaces so the user does not have to specify an IP Address.

✔ NOTE
If the Listen On All Addresses check box is marked it is recommended that the
user type the name of the RSD instead of the IP Address in the Capture (aka
Scan Application) Edit\Preferences IP Address text box.

Available\Selected
The network configuration has two lists Available and Selected. Available lists the
available Internet Protocol (IP) addresses but they are not active until selected. Selected
lists all the IP Addresses where the scanner can send captured ribbon data. The user
may use the left and right arrow buttons to change the Available and Selected Addresses
depending on the systems configuration.

✔ NOTE
In the Capture (aka Scan Application) window the IP Address that the user types
in the Edit\Preferences IP Address text box must be listed under the Selected list
as shown above for the IP Address 127.0.0.1. If the address is not under the
Selected list an Open Socket Error will occur.

92 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 ✔ NOTE
If the network environment is DHCP and the Listen On All Addresses check box
is marked then the user can type in any Available or Selected IP Address in the
Capture (aka Scan Application) Edit\Preference IP Address text box or use the
RSD name.

Listening Port:
The Listening Port contains the default port address used for all IP Addresses. The user
also types this value in the Capture (aka Scan Application) Edit\Preference Port Address
text box.

Disk Configuration
Ribbon Locations
The Ribbons Locations list box shows the available drives or ribbon locations where the
NextStarPlus application can write ribbon files to. Standard Configuration: On FlexScan
units there will be one drive location d:\ribbons or d:\ribbon. On Eclipse units there will be
two drive locations d:\ribbons1 and e:\ribbons2. The user can change or modify the Host,
Path or Share using the Add, Edit or Remove buttons.

Add
Add allows the user to create a new Ribbon Location and Ribbon Location Share path.

Click on Add or Edit to bring up the Ribbon Location dialog box.

✔ NOTE
The Ribbon Location Share should be in UNC format unless the Scanner is not
connected to a network. See the NextStarPlus Installation Guide for Details.

Edit
Edit allows the user to change the Ribbon Location and Ribbon Location Share path of
an existing ribbon location.

Click on Edit to bring up the Ribbon Location dialog box.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 93

Alternate Information
The user can also use the “Use Alternate Information” to point to where ribbons are being
written to when the location that the CreateHierarchy is running on is different.
This feature provides flexibility by allowing the end user to change where ribbon files are
compressed or managed to improve workflow, however, in some cases it could
potentially impact performance depending on the system’s configuration.

Click on Add or Edit to bring up the Ribbon Location dialog box where the Alternate
Information feature can be selected. Once selected the user must type in the desired
Host, Path, and Share name as shown in example below.

Remove
Remove allows the user to delete a Ribbon Location and Ribbon Location Share path of
an existing ribbon location.

Disk Block Multiplier

The Disk Block Multiplier tells the CreateHierarchy program how may blocks to buffer
before writing the ribbon data to disk. A block is the size of the allocation unit and the size
depends on how the system was configured. The typical configuration unit on FlexScan
or Eclipse units is 64k.
✔ NOTE

The current default is 1000 and should not be changed unless advised by a
NextScan representative.

Roll Film\Fiche Warning Level (GB)

The Roll Film\Fiche Warning Level (GB) allows the user to set the RSD minimum storage
level in GB (Gigabytes). Once the minimum storage level has been reached the Capture
window will display a warning and ask if the user still wishes to continue even though the
minimum level has been reached. This feature helps the user avoid running out of RSD
space and prevents the Capture process from having to stop scanning before the end of
a roll film or microfiche due to lack of space. For details on Capture see Chapter 6.

Tip: Try scanning several roll film and microfiche to get the average ribbon size for both. Once
the ribbon size is determined set the Roll Film and Microfiche Warning Level (GB) to the average
size and add a half Gigabyte extra as a buffer for both. If you only have one media such as roll
film then you can ignore the microfiche parameter and vice versa.

94 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

User Configuration
The User Configuration dialog box allows the user to change the CreateHierarchy service
login credentials. This is the same as changing it in the Windows XP Computer
Management Console. If the current login does not have the required shared privileges it
will be necessary to modify the User Configuration so that CreateHierarchy will have the
correct access.

✔ NOTE

The User Configuration dialog box will not change login credentials for
NextStarPlus XMLprep. To change credentials for XMLprep it will be necessary
to use the Windows XP Computer Management console. The user credentials for
NextStarPlusXMLPrep must also match those of the createHierarchy service.

Service Control

The Service Control dialog box allows the user to Start, Stop and Restart
CreateHierarchy. Whenever changes are made in the CreateHierarchy program or if a
new NSController database has been created it will be necessary to stop and restart
CreateHierarchy for the new changes to update. For more information on the
NSController see “Chapter 4 NSController”. The Service Control also allows the user to
start the CreateHierarchy program in the event that it has stopped. See troubleshooting
tips later on in this section for more details on starting and stopping the CreateHierarchy
program.

Status Information

The Status Information allows the user to select the default time in seconds for updating
status information.

NextStarPlusXMLPrep Background

CreateHierarchy is a Client-Server application that runs on Windows XP, Windows7 and

Windows 2003. Once CreateHierarchy is finished writing the Ribbon data to disk, it

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 95

 notifies the NextStarPlus XMLPrep service that it is finished. NextStarPlus XMLprep
then creates the initial XML data file for the new Ribbon file. This XML creation may
include running frame detection, setting up microfiche grids, and defining the initial output
definitions for the new Ribbon file. Once the XML creation is finished, the Ribbon file is
ready for auditing via the NextStarPlusAuditor application, or outputting via the Output
application.

NextStarGrab Background

NextStarGrab is a data service responsible for transferring the digital data captured from
the camera to the NextStarPlus application.

96 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 7 - NextStarPlus Capture for Roll Film
NextStarPlus Capture Overview

The NextStarPlus Capture is the first application used for scanning ribbon files. The
Capture Main Window for Roll Film and Microfiche are configured for the film type and
resolution to be scanned which will be covered in this section.

Main Setup Window for Roll Film

The main setup window allows the user to configure the film setup parameters and
production setup information. Use the File menu to load existing configuration settings, or
manually configure the film setup and production settings. This window also includes
scan and film controls.

Roll Film Capture Window

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 97

File, Edit, and Help Menus
File
Click File to open, close, or save a ribbon setup configuration aka NSC Configuration
Files. Click Exit to exit the software.

NSC Configuration Files

The NSC configuration data files contain the NextStarPlus setup parameters. The File
menu allows you to create a new configuration, open an existing configuration, and save
a configuration.

Configuration files can be marked as “read-only” by following these steps:

1. Use Windows Explorer to locate the NSC configuration file
2. Right-click the configuration file name.
3. Select Properties.
4. Select the General tab under Attributes.
5. Select the Read-only check box.
When the Read-only check box is enabled for a configuration file, the user is able to
make changes after opening the configuration file in NextStarPlus; however, when the file
is closed, the changes will not be saved unless the operator uses the Save Config As
function.

New Config
Use this command to load the default configuration in NextStarPlus. Selecting New
Config returns all NextStarPlus settings to the default values.

Open Config
Use this command to open an existing NextStarPlus configuration.

Save Config
Use this command to save the current NextStarPlus configuration to its current name and
directory. When you save a document for the first time, NextStarPlus displays the Save
Config As dialogue box so you can name your configuration file. If you want to change
the name and directory of an existing document before you save it, choose the Save
Config As command.

98 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Save Config As
Use this command to save and name the current NextStarPlus configuration. When you
use the Save Config As command, a dialogue box will display so you can name your
configuration file.

Exit
Use this command to end your NextStarPlus session. NextStarPlus prompts you to save
documents with unsaved changes.

Edit
Click Edit to bring up the preferences dialog box discussed in the next sections.

Preferences
Use the Roll Film Preferences dialog box to edit NextStarPlus preferences.

Roll Film Preferences Dialog Box

NextStarPlus Server Setup

Remote Host Address

Type the Internet Protocol (IP) address where you want the captured output sent and the
listening port.

Operator
Type the name of the person or department creating the capture setup. This information
can be used in the Naming Image File Path or Index Record Definition. The variable
name is ScanOperator $OPR$.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 99

Search For Sever (Currently Not Available)

Always Overwrite Ribbons

Select the Always Overwrite Ribbons check box to enable the overwrite ribbons
options. If this option is not selected, the application will not allow a ribbon files to be
overwritten and will require the user to create a new ribbon file name for the current roll
film or microfiche to be scanned.

General Setup

Film Format
Use the drop-down menu to select the film format. The format is based on how the how
images are placed on the film. Some examples are listed in the drop-down list.

✔ NOTE

This option is for Roll Film ribbon scanning and is used to select the film format of
the film. Selecting the correct film format enables nextScan to automatically
calculate the optimum Adaptive Exposure Adjustment settings. This feature does
apply to Microfiche or Aperture Card ribbon scanning application.

Output Template

In the Auditor the user can create and save custom Output Definitions as Templates
based on the desired image quality and processing options for the type of film being
scanned. In the Preferences dialog box use the Output Templates to select the desired
setup parameters to be applied to the scanned ribbon. If there are no saved Output
Definition templates the only option available will be the default.

100 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Frame Detection Setup

Automatic Frame Detection

Select the Automatic Frame Detection check box to enable automatic frame detection.
If automatic frame detection is not enabled, the entire roll of film or microfiche rows will be
displayed without the detection settings. The recommended setting for roll film ribbon
scanning is to select the Automatic Frame Detection check box. The recommended
setting for microfiche depends on the film format. For standard jackets use Automatic
Frame Detection and for COM or grid type film formats deselect the Automatic Frame
Detection check box.

Frame Detection

In the Auditor the user can create and save custom Frame Detection configurations
based on the type of film being scanned. In the Preferences dialog box use the Frame
Detection arrow key to select the desired detection setup parameters to be applied to the
scanned ribbon. If there are no saved configurations the user can choose between NS1,
NS2 and NS3 default configurations.

Grid Template (For COM Microfiche Only) - See Chapter 7 - Capture for Microfiche

Roll film Options

Real Time Image Display

Select the Real Time Image Display checkbox to display a real-time scan ribbon
Capture preview window.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 101

Pancake Reel Support
Select the Pancake Reel Support checkbox to adjust the software for scanning 1000 ft
reels. This feature requires the optional pancake hardware attachments and allows the
user to switch between scanning standard 16\35 mm and 1000 ft reels.

Auto Rewind
Select the Auto Rewind checkbox to enable the automatic rewind feature. After the roll is
complete and the user clicks OK to the end of roll message the software will
automatically rewind the film.

End of Roll (in):

The End of Roll is used to type in the maximum distance in inches that the software will
travel before it reports it has reached the end of the roll.

Tip: To prevent the scan from stopping before reaching the end of the film roll,
set this distance as greater than the longest gap between frames on the film.

End of Roll Method

Use the drop-down menu to select the end of roll method for indicating the absence of
images at the end of a roll.

Negative Film - With negative film when the base of the film is transparent choose Black
and if the base is opaque choose White.

Positive Film - With positive film when the base of the film is transparent choose White
and if the base is opaque choose Black.

None – Use None if the roll is inconsistent towards the end and end of roll method is not
reliable. When set to none the software will keep scanning until the end of the leader is
reached or the end user clicks on the stop scan button.

Fiche Options (For Microfiche Only) - See Chapter 7 - Capture for Microfiche

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Preferences dialog box without
saving your changes.

102 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Advance

Hierarchy Settings

Create Hierarchy On Scanner

Currently not available.

Selected Levels (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)

Clicking on the Selected Levels change button allows the user to select which ribbon
levels will be captured. This option can help to reduce the ribbon’s file size but will limit
the zooming in\out viewing capabilities in the auditor.

Compression Settings

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 103

Compression Type
The Compression Type drop down arrow allows the user to select the compression type
for the ribbons to be scanned. The three choices are Intel JPEG, Intel JPEG-XR and
none.

JPEG (JPG) - Output file format which is a lossy compression technique that is designed
to compress color and grayscale continuous-tone images

JPEG-XR- is a recently approved ISO/IEC International standard and on average, the file
size is 40% smaller than JPEG for similar quality.

None – No compression is used. The data capture is raw uncompressed raster data.

JPEG and JPEG-XR Options

The JPEG and JPEG- XR options include the quality option that can be adjusted to lower
the compression. It is important not to get too aggressive with changing these values
since they will also affect the output quality of the image. The default for JPEG is 90 and
the default for JPEG-XR is 50.

Indexing settings

The Indexing Settings is where the user can check the boxes for Enable Indexing and
Submit On End Of Scan. These features are used with the indexing software and allow
the user to type in and submit index\retrieval information for a ribbon.

Enable Indexing
If checked the scan software will automatically pop up the assigned index template so the
user can type in or select required fields. See Chapter 13 to learn how index templates
are saved and created.

Submit On End Of Scan

If checked the software will automatically submit the index data at the end of the ribbon
capture. See Chapter 13 - Indexing to learn more about indexing.

104 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

MISC

Demo Mode
If Demo Mode is checked the software will automatically reference the end of roll or scan
distance.

How to enable full roll demo loop:

A. Thread film and wind forward to the desired starting point. Note it is important to have
at least 12” or more of leader at the beginning of the reel.

B. From the scan application go into Edit\Preferences and select Auto Rewind.

C. From the Edit\Preferences window click on Advance tab and check the Demo mode
check box to enable feature.

D. Click on Start to scan. The software will automatically rewind the film to the previous
starting point once the end of roll message comes up (takes about 30 sec) and then
restart scanning in a continuous loop until the end user clicks on the stop button.

E. or rewinds the film to the starting point the software will automatically run in a scan
loop until the user manually stops the scan.

How to enable demo loop for set length:

A. Thread film and wind forward to the desired starting point. Note it is important to have
at least 12” or more of leader at the beginning of the reel.

B. From the scan application go into Edit\Preferences and select Auto Rewind.

C. From the Edit\Preferences window click on Advance tab and check the Demo mode
check box to enable feature.

D. Click on Start to scan. Keep scanning until the desired distance has been reached
and then click on the stop button to stop scanning.

E. Rewind the film back to the desired starting point and click on the scan button. The
software will automatically run in a continuous scan loop between the start scan and
set distance until the end user clicks on the stop button.

Enable Camera Calibrated Mode

If the Enable Camera Calibrated Mode is selected the camera will use the nextScan
factory camera calibrated settings instead of factory defaults.

OCR Settings – Virtual Film Custom Feature

This is used only with the custom Virtual Film application for running Optical Character
Recognition over a ribbon. Contact [email protected] for additional information.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 105

Remaster Settings
Remaster is a process used with the FicheStar COM detection software to remove the overscan
captured at scan time after the detection and deskew processes have been completed. The user
can create a customized Remaster Template based on the film or project requirements and select
the template at scan time where it can automatically be applied to a ribbon.

View
Use this item to access the Indexing template.

Indexing
Click on Indexing to display the NextStarPlus Index Entry Administration template. This
will be the template used for indexing the entire project. If the wrong template is loaded
contact your system administrator. If the Indexing option is grayed out, click on the Edit
menu and select Preferences\Advance\. Once in the advance tap go to the Index
Settings and check mark the Enable Indexing check box. Below is an example of what
an Index Entry Administration template looks like. Since the Index Entry Administration is
a custom application based on the project your template will look different. For more
information on Indexing see Chapter 12 – NextstarPlusDatabaseCreator.

Help
Use this item to access quick reference help information and nextScan version
information.

Help Topics
Click on the Help Topics to display the NextStarPlus User Guide

106 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

About NextStarPlus
Click About NextStarPlus to display version, build, copyright and system information.

Keyboard Commands
Keyboard commands (keyboard short cuts) are listed along with the associated menu
command. For example, simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and N keys is the keyboard
short cut for the New Config command in the File menu.

Film Setup
DPI
Type the desired DPI (Dots Per Inch) at which the image will be scanned. The available
DPI values are between 100-600.

Reduction Ratio
The reduction ratio is the ratio between the original document size and the size of the
image stored on the film (how many times the original was reduced to fit on the film). If
you are trying to reproduce the original document at the original size, knowing the
reduction ratio is important. The user types in the reduction ratio of the source film. The
Reduction Ratio is input as decimal fractions.

Film Type (mm)

Use the drop-down menu to select the size (in millimeters) of the source microfilm.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 107

 Tip: If your images are not edge-to-edge, you can use a smaller size to create
smaller ribbon files. Or increase over scan to help with skewed images close to
the boarders.

Polarity
Use the drop-down menu to select the polarity (negative or positive) of the source
microfilm.

Supply Reel
Use the drop-down menu to select the location of the source reel on the system (left or
right side of the machine).

True DPI on Film

The way in which a True DPI is determined depends upon the system used. See the
following sections.

Eclipse
The true DPI is the original size of the document before it was captured on
the microfilm. For the Eclipse system, when you type in the Reduction Ratio
and DPI for the film-to-be-scanned, the application will automatically move
the lens and the camera to the correct position.

FlexScan
For the FlexScan system, manually position the head height above the
microfilm according to the True DPI value on the True DPI target chart. Refer
to the “True DPI target chart” section for details.

Film Reversed
The Roll Film reversed check box when marked will reverse the ribbon so that when it is
in the auditor it will start numbering the last frame or image as the first. This is particularly
useful when a roll has been loaded backwards with the last frame first

Options:

The Options section displays the Roll Film automatic feature options currently selected in
the Edit\Preferences and Edit Preferences\Advance windows as a useful reference for

108 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 production scanning. The following options if selected will be displayed in this section as
enabled:

Automatic Feature When Enabled When Disabled

Demo Mode Demo Mode Not Listed
Adaptive Exposure Adjustment Auto Exposure Not Listed
Always Overwrite Ribbons Allow Overwriting Disable overwriting ribbons
Auto Rewind Auto Rewind Not Listed
Pancake Reel Support Pancake Reel Support Not Listed

Focus
How to Focus Eclipse\Flexscan Roll Film
Eclipse

The Eclipse model scanners have a calibrated focus table and should not require
focusing. In the application when the user types in the DPI plus the reduction
ratio the camera and lens will automatically move to the TrueDPI calibrated
focused positions after a scan is performed. Once the camera and lens have
automatically moved to the calibrated focused positions, if the user finds that the
images are out of focus the user can perform a manual focus.
Flexscan
Focusing images on a FlexScan is always done manually with a Nikon lens.
Each height position of the camera changes the lens and camera focal lengths,
which are designed to project information (image data and lighting) captured by
the CCD array for digitization. These positions are based on the TrueDPI (dots
per inch and the reduction ratio of the microfilm). Once the desired TrueDPI is
determined and the film is loaded perform the user can perform a manual focus.
See Chapter 3: Film Loading, Film Threading and TrueDPI for further details if
needed on how to Thread\Load film or how to calculate TrueDPI. For Microfiche
Focusing see Chapter 8 – NextStarPlus Capture for Microfiche and Aperture
Cards.
Manual Focus
The following covers step by step instructions on how to perform a manual focus
for the Eclipse and Flexscan systems. The steps are similar for both however,
each step will note which system the instructions applies to.
A. Flexscan Only
Align the arrow to the TrueDPI value on the Target Scale. Use the tower
crank shaft to move it up or down. This value should match the value
displayed in the text box for True DPI Film as shown below.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 109

 B. Eclipse\Flexscan
Thread Film and use the Film Control toggle arrow keys to position an image
over the center of the scroll bars (preferably an actual image and not a target
page). The arrow buttons control film movement: fast\med\slow forward, and
fast\med\slow rewind of the film.

C. Eclipse\Flexscan
From the capture window click on the focus button to bring up the Roll Film
Preview Focus window.

Roll Film Preview Focus Window

D. Eclipse\Flexscan
Click on run button to start the focusing process.

110 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 E. Eclipse\Flexscan
Use the lamp text box to increase or decreased the lamp intensity in order to
get the best foreground to background lighting needed for focusing the
image. If the image is too light or too dark it may be hard to focus. In addition
use the Image keys to adjust the image in the preview window to the desired
zoom or read write view for focusing. Image parameters include +\- Zoom,
1:1, Mirror or Rotate.

✔ NOTE

During the focus process the end user can also move the image inside the
preview window. This is done by clicking and holding the mouse down where you
want to start. Continue to hold the mouse down while dragging the image in the
preview window until it is positioned in the desired location for focusing.

F. Eclipse Only
Click on the Quality lens up or down arrow keys until the image in the focus
preview window is in the sharpest focus possible.

Flexscan Only
As the film oscillates back and forth, slightly turn the knurled portion of the
Nikon lens until the image in the focus preview window is in the sharpest
focus possible.
` Lens Focus Ring

Focus Indicator (optional) - Eclipse\Flexscan

During this process the Focus indicator can also be used to determine the
sharpest focus.
Eclipse: After clicking on the focus button the user will need to click on the
up\down arrow keys to move the image above and below the image’s
sharpest focus.

Flexscan: After clicking on the focus button the user will need to move the
knurled portion of the Nikon lens until the images in the focus preview
window are in the sharpest focus possible.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 111

 During the process of focusing the focus indicator is calculating sharpest
point. It will display a percentage of 100% when it reaches the sharpest focus
point possible and then the user can stop focusing at that point.
Not in Sharpest Focus Sharpest Focus 100%

G. Eclipse
Once the image is in its sharpest focus click on the Save point button. This
will save the point to the focus table.

H. Eclipse\Flexscan - When finished click on the Freeze button to stop the

focusing program.

NextStarPlus Roll Focus Window Parameters

Click on the Focus button to display the NextStarPlus Roll Focus window.

OK
Click OK to save your settings and exit the Roll Film Focus window..

Cancel
Click Cancel to exit the Roll Film Focus window without saving your changes.

Capture

Run/Stop
The Run/Stop toggle button is used to perform a focus. Selecting the Run/Freeze toggle
button starts the focus process.

112 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Snap
The Snap button is used to scan and display a single image or section of the film so the
image, quality or lighting can be reviewed.

Reduction Ratio
Displays the effective reduction ratio calculated.

Flat Field
The Flat Field button enables the software calibration program. This program can be
used to calibrate the camera\lens at the current focal points. The factory camera in-house
calibration is done at the optimal height to handle both high and low resolution. However,
in some cases the end user may want to try calibrating at the current camera\lens
positions to see if the lighting across the camera can be improved.

How to perform Flat Filed Correction

Below outlines the steps for using the Flat Field program.

1. VERY IMPORTANT – Before performing the Flat Filed calibration make sure the
camera and lens are free from any debris or obstructions.

2. Load Target 16mm Roll Film (customer film can also be used-Optional) – For details
on how to thread and load film please refer to Chapter 3.

3. Start the NextStarPlus Scan Application and configure settings especially the DPI
and Reduction Ratio for the current project.

4. Click on the Focus to bring up the Roll Film Focus window. Make sure the image is in
its sharpest focus. Refer to How to Focus Eclipse\Flexscan Roll Film section covered
earlier in this chapter.

5. Click on Flat Field button to start the program.

6. The following message will pop up. The film should be loaded but removed from the
scroll roller path. The goal is to calibrate the lighting over the light source so the film
cannot be blocking the light. Remove film from image path and when done click OK.

Note it is important that when the film is removed from the image area that it is
still threaded and can be loaded. If you are having trouble with this step please
contact nextScan for assistance [email protected].

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 113

 7. The program will then run the camera calibration process. The display will show the
program calibrating and display the lighting output across the screen. See below
example.

8. Once calibration is complete examine graph and verify if it is even. The graph should
be fairly even without any considerable spikes. If it is even click on yes to close the
Flat Field program. If spikes are found or the graph looks very uneven make sure the
lens and camera are cleaned and free of obstructions. If the problem still exists after
nd
a 2 calibration, please contact nextScan for assistance at [email protected].
Below shows and example of an uneven graph.

9. Once calibration is done click on yes.

Reduction
The Reduction Ratio button is used to calculate the current reduction ratio based on the
cameras current height. It uses the film’s width and camera distance from the lens to
make this calculation so the film must be in sharp focus.

Display Mode
The display mode drop down arrow allows the user to switch between the following
options that will be viewed in the Roll Film Focus window upper left display:

114 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Scan Info –Lists information about the scanners configuration details as shown below.
Eclipse Series Product Specifications

cont’

Light Level – Displays the light ratio between the maximum and minimum measurable light
intensities also known as DMIN (density minimum) and DMAX (density maximum).

A drop in the graph shows that the average of light has increased which indicates the
transition between the image data and the background. The upper graphical data to the
left and the right of the transition represents the foreground data within the image.

Histogram – Displays the contrast level

Composite – Displays both the Light Level and Histogram graphs.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 115

Pixel Depth
The Pixel Depth option allows the user to select the desired bit depth that the camera will
capture during the scan process. The options are 8 bit, 10 bit and 12 bit. The 12 bit
option will not show up if the unit does not have the optional 12 bit camera installed.
Polarity
The Polarity option allows the user to the polarity (negative or positive) of the source
microfilm.

Lamp
Allows the user to automatically increase or decrease the lamp value.
Focus

Quality – Eclipse Only

The Quality up\down arrow keys are used to adjust the lens and camera focus positions
on the Eclipse systems.

Focus Indicator – Eclipse Only

During the process of focusing the focus indicator is used to determine sharpest point. It
will display a percentage of 100% when it reaches the sharpest focus point possible and
then the user can stop focusing at that point.

Save Point – Eclipse Only

The save point button will save the focus setting.

Image
The Image settings are used to adjust the image in the preview window to the desired
zoom or read write view for review or focusing. The options avalible are +\- Zoom, 1:1,
Mirror or Rotate.

116 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Options
The options check boxes allow for enabling or disabling the following Features.

Camera Cal Mode – If the Enable Camera Calibrated Mode is selected the camera
will use the nextScan factory camera calibrated settings instead of factory defaults.

Enable Flat Field – If the Enable Flat Field Mode is selected the camera will use the
user calibrated settings for the current reduction ratio and DPI instead of factory defaults.
If the Flat Field program was not used to create a table an error message will come up
that this feature cannot run until a table has been created.

Auto Exposure – The Auto Exposure feature when selected will automatically adjust
the light level and gamma correction settings over the image data to achieve the widest
dynamic range between the foreground and background pixels. This helps to get the
best image quality possible.

Gamma
The Gamma parameters allow the user to manipulate the grayscale linear output. The
graph on the left of the gamma settings displays a visual representation of changes made
to the White or Black gamma settings. It will also show the F1\F2 linear curve changes.

Gamma White\Black

The Gamma White and Black up\down arrow keys allows the user to adjust the pixel
values for the gamma white (background) and gamma black (foreground) grayscales

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 117

 levels. The values are adjusted by a percentage (0-100%) of the current grayscale levels
the camera is capturing such as 8 bit, 10bit or 12 bit.

The following shows each bit depth and the pixel ranges for the foreground and
background.

Bit Depth Grayscale Levels Foreground Min Background Max

White Range* Black Range*
8 bit 0-256 0-128 128-256
10 bit 0-1024 0-512 512-1024
12 bit 0-4096 0-2048 2048-4096

* The white and black range values for each bit depth above are default ranges. The
foreground or background black\white ranges could be adjusted to include more values
within the grayscale range. For example the 8 bit Black range could be adjusted to
include 50-128 vs 128-256 levels.

Gamma Black
Identifies the highest pixel value for black. Gamma max lets you set pixels in the
foreground range that are lighter than black to black. For example, if the grayscale level
captured is 10 bit and the gamma max value is set to 1000, then any pixels from 1000 to
1023 will be set to 1023. Adjusting Gamma Black will darken the foreground (text).

Gamma White
Identifies the lowest pixel value for white. Gamma min lets you set pixels other than
white to 0. For example, if the grayscale level captured is 10 bit and the gamma min is
20, then any pixels from 0 to 20 are set to 0. Adjusting Gamma MIN will lighten the
background.

F1\F2
The F1 and F2 settings are used to adjust the gamma (dark or light shades of gray) on a
linear curve in order to improve contrast and color saturation within the more visually
important mid-tones. These settings can also be used to create a balance between dark
and light mixed density images\frames so that the lighter density sections do not become
overly saturated. F1 determines the shape of the curve and F2 is used to define how
much curve is applied.

Image Stability – Eclipse Roll Film Only

As the film oscillates the image will tend to slightly shift. However, in some cases the film
may travel or shift a lot making it difficult to focus. The Image Stability Settings are used
to stabilize the image in the preview window making it more user friendly for focusing.

118 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Inch Worm – If the image is shifting more on one side use the left\right arrow keys until
both sides of the image are shifting equally and balanced. Focus on the side that has the
greater degree of shift and move the arrow keys left\right until both sides are equal.

Shift – If the image is shifting excessively use the left\right arrow keys to minimize
shifting and keep image stable during focus.
Crawl – If the image is slowly traveling in one direction the left\right arrow keys can be
adjusted to prevent the image from drifting in one direction. Click on the arrow key to
move the shift in the opposite direction of the crawl until it is stable.

Defaults – The defaults button will restore the factory default settings.
Save – The Save button will save adjustments made to correct image stability.

Production Setup

Job ID
Type the name to be used for the project in the Job ID text box. This will create a folder
where the ribbon files will be scanned to. The value typed in the Job ID text box can also
be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Use Today’s Date

When the Use Today’s Date check box is selected the software will use the current
computer current date as the Batch Identifier. This will allow the user to manage the
ribbons in the Controller based on the Date the ribbon was scanned. The date can also
be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Batch ID
Type the name to be used as a Batch Identifier in the Batch ID text box. This will allow
the user to manage the ribbons in the Controller based on the Batch Name. The value
typed in the Batch Name text box can also be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options
Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Roll Name
Type the name to be used to identify the source roll film. Make sure you use a name that
is specific and unique for each roll name so that previous ribbon captures are not
overwritten. The value typed in the Roll Name text box can also be referenced in the
Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.
✔ NOTE
Auto Increment can be used in conjunction with the Roll Name identifier to
automatically increment the Roll Name alphabetically or numerically based on
user preference. See Auto Increment for more detail later on in this section.
Auto Increment

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 119

 The Auto Increment section allows the user to assign an identifier to the roll name when making
multiple ribbon captures for the same Roll Name.

Value
The Value displays what the next increment will be for the next scanned ribbon file. The
Value will increment in alpha or numeric order depending on how the Auto Increment
parameters have been set. The user can also manually move the up or down arrow keys
to rescan and over write a previous incremented value.

Configure
Use the Configure button to configure the Auto Increment Setup Parameters. Click on the
Configure button on the main window to display the Auto Increment Setup dialog box.

Select the Enable Auto Increment check boxes and increment options. You can use
alphabetic or numeric increment identifiers.

Click the Alphabetic Increment option to use alphabetic increment identifiers and
choose between uppercase, lowercase, or both.

Click the Numeric Increment option to use numeric increment identifiers.

If you want to use a specific keypad character in the identifier, type it in the Pad
Character field. This value will output in front of the pad count.

Type in or use the Pad Count arrow keys to increase or decrease the count to the
desired number of digits used for auto incrementing. i.e. 00 (2 digits), 000 (3 digits), or
0000 (4 digits) etc.

You can customize the increment separator character by typing a different character in
the Increment Separator field.

The Sample Roll ID field shows an example of what the film name will be with the
selected increment identifier.

To reset the increment values to default settings, click the Reset Increment Value
button.

120 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Auto Increment Setup dialog
box without saving your changes.

Scan Control

Start\Stop
Use this toggle button to start\stop the capture (scan) operation.

Pause Display
Use this toggle button to pause\resume display of the scan preview window display (the
capture (scan) operation does not pause).

Film Control

Arrow Buttons
Use the film control buttons to scroll, fast\med\slow forward, and fast\med\slow rewind
the film roll.

Load/Unload
Use this button to put tension on the microfilm roll.

Performance

The Performance section includes four Status Indicator displays and Scanner Speed
statistics.

Performance - Status Indicators

The Performance section has four Status Indicator displays: Input Buffers, CPU Load,
Output buffers and Scanner Speed. Each indicator is used to keep track of how full the
buffers are during operation. The Input Buffers, CPU, Output Buffers and Scanner Speed
indicators should always remain in the green during scan. Below describes the Status
Indicator colors.

Color Description

green Indicates the scanner is accelerating the film speed without any
bottlenecks or performance obstacles.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 121

 red Indicates the scanner is decelerating the film speed and there
could be performance bottlenecks that require troubleshooting.
The red is an alert to indicate the system is scanning below the
maximum performance.

The Input Buffers, CPU Load and Output buffers status indicators should never run at full
100% capacity. The Scanner Speed indicator displays the capture speed that the
scanner is currently running at using the maximum amount of buffering available based
on the DPI and reduction ratio of the film and should always run at 100%. However, if
adaptive exposure is selected under the preferences options it will start at 33% until the
software completes calculating auto lamp\gamma settings

Performance - Statistic: Only Available while Scanning (%)

The Statistic: Only Available while scanning (%) displays the following statistical
information while the scanner is capturing the ribbon data:

Statistic Info, Description

Scanner Speed (ips) Speed in images per second.

Location in ft Location feet that the scanner has traveled

across the film.

Estimate of PPM Estimate of pages per minute. This is only an

estimate calculated with the assumption that the
roll is a full 100ft. Depending on the length of the
roll this data may not be accurate.

Status Bar Information

The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the NextStarPlus window.

The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items (File, Edit, View and Help)
as you use the arrow keys to navigate through menus.

Example:

The right area of the status bar informs the user if the Caps Lock, Num Lock, or Scroll
Lock buttons are enabled.

122 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 8 - Capture for Microfiche
Capture Overview
The NextStarPlus Capture is the first application used for scanning ribbon files. The
Capture Main Window for Roll Film and Microfiche are configured for the film type and
resolution to be scanned which will be covered in this section.

Main Setup Window for Microfiche

The main setup window allows the user to configure the film setup parameters and
production setup information. Use the File menu to load existing configuration settings, or
manually configure the film setup and production settings. This window also includes
scan and film controls.

Microfiche Capture Window

File, Edit, and Help Menus

File
Click File to open, close, or save a ribbon setup configuration aka NSC Configuration
Files. Click Exit to exit the software.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 123

NSC Configuration Files
The NSC configuration data files contain the NextStarPlus setup parameters. The File
menu allows you to create a new configuration, open an existing configuration, and save
a configuration.

Configuration files can be marked as “read-only” by following these steps:

1. Right-click the configuration file name.

2. Select Properties.
3. Select the General tab under Attributes.
4. Select the Read-only check box.

When the Read-only check box is enabled for a configuration file, the user is able to
make changes after opening the configuration file in NextStarPlus; however, when the file
is closed, the changes will not be saved unless the operator uses the Save Config As
function. This is useful when the operator wants to maintain the base settings.

New Config
Use this command to load the default configuration in NextStarPlus. Selecting New
Config returns all NextStarPlus settings to the default values.

Open Config
Use this command to open an existing NextStarPlus configuration.

Save Config
Use this command to save the current NextStarPlus configuration to its current name and
directory. When you save a document for the first time, NextStarPlus displays the Save
Config As dialogue box so you can name your configuration file. If you want to change
the name and directory of an existing document before you save it, choose the Save
Config As command.

Save Config As
Use this command to save and name the current NextStarPlus configuration. When you
use the Save Config As command, a dialogue box will display so you can name your
configuration file.

124 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Exit
Use this command to end your NextStarPlus session. NextStarPlus prompts you to save
documents with unsaved changes.

Edit
Click Edit to bring up the preferences dialog box discussed later on in this
section.

Preferences General
Use the Microfiche Preferences General dialog box to edit NextStarPlus basic
preferences.

NextStarPlus Server Setup

Remote Host Address

Type the Internet Protocol (IP) address where you want the captured output sent.

Operator
Type the name of the person or department creating the capture. This information and be
used in the naming index string and used for sorting ribbons in the NSController
database.

Search For Sever (Currently Not Available)

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 125

Always Overwrite Ribbons
Select the Always Overwrite Ribbons check box to enable the overwrite ribbons
options. If this option is not selected, the application will not allow a ribbon files to be
overwritten and will require the user to create a new ribbon file name for the current roll
film or microfiche to be scanned.

General Setup

Film Format (Feature does not apply to Microfiche scanning)

Output Template
In the Auditor the user can create and save custom Output Templates for the Output
Definition based on the desired image quality and processing options for the type of film
being scanned. In the Preferences dialog box use the Output Templates to select the
desired Output Definition parameters to be applied to the scanned ribbon. If there are no
saved configurations the only option available will be the default. For more information on
Output Templates see Chapter 9 Auditor Software under Tools\Grid Templates.

Frame Detection Setup

Automatic Frame Detection

Select the Automatic Frame Detection check box to enable automatic frame detection.
If automatic frame detection is not enabled, the entire roll of film or microfiche rows will be
displayed without the detection settings. The recommended setting for roll film ribbon
scanning is to select the Automatic Frame Detection check box. The recommended
setting for microfiche depends on the film format. For standard jackets use Automatic
Frame Detection and for COM or grid type film formats deselect the Automatic Frame
Detection check box.

Frame Detection
In the Auditor the user can create and save custom Frame Detection configurations
based on the type of film being scanned. In the Preferences dialog box use the Frame
Detection arrow key to select the desired detection setup parameters to be applied to the
scanned ribbon. If there are no saved configurations the user can choose between NS1
NS2 and NS3 default configurations.

Grid Template
In the Auditor the user can create and save custom Grid Templates based on the type of
film being scanned. In the Preferences dialog box use the Grid Templates arrow key to
select the desired grid setup parameters to be applied to the scanned ribbon. If there are

126 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 no saved configurations the only option available will be default. For more information on
Grid Templates see Chapter 9 Auditor Software under Tools\Grid Templates.

Roll Film Options (For Roll Film Only) See Chapter 6 – Capture for Roll Film

Fiche Options without FlexLoader

Fiche Options with FlexLoader

Auto Unload
The Auto Unload will cause the microfiche platen to unload after the microfiche has been
scanned.

Auto Load - FlexLoader

The Auto Load will cause the microfiche platen to load the next microfiche after a
microfiche has been scanned and unloaded using the Autoloader optional attachment.

Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID

When the “Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID” and the “Last In Batch” check boxes are
both selected the scan application will automatically reset the Fiche ID Auto Increment
settings.

✔ NOTE

The Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID feature will only reset the Fiche ID
when the Auto Increment feature is active. To avoid overwriting ribbons deselect
the Always Overwrite Ribbons check box mentioned earlier in this section

Fiche Options with FlexLoader

The Flexloader is an optional attachment used for automatically loading and unloading
microfiche or aperture cards. This allows multiple fiche or aperture cards to be scanned
in batches rather than be manually feed.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 127

Loader Settings
The drop down arrow at the bottom of Fiche Settings will allow the user to select default
or a configured custom setting that was saved based on the film type. i.e. Jumbo,
Standard or Aperture Cards etc.

Configure
Click on configure to bring up the Loader Settings Window:

Loader Setting Variables Version 4

The following matrix describes the loader variables. Note some values should never be
changed without factory direction. Please contact nextScan for loader versions other than
version 4. Any values that are not adjustable will not be described.

Loader Settings Description

Refresh List Refresh List Button changes the loader settings to default values.

If a card is sticking to the top glass this value can be adjusted to grab
Back Off Glass Time the fiche of the glass.
Min = 100 Max =1000 Default = 65

Backup Timeout Should never be changed – factory set

This sets the sensitivity of the Input sensor. The lower the value the
Card Input Present more sensitive it will be. Default is 20. If the unit is near a window it
may need adjusted to prevent false triggering of the input sensor.
Min = 1 Max =128 Default = 20

128 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Loader Settings Description

This sets the sensitivity of the Output sensor. The lower the value the
more sensitive it will be. Default is 20. If the unit is near a window it
Card Output Present
may need adjusted to prevent false triggering of the input sensor.
Min = 1 Max =128 Default = 20

Engage Time Not adjustable

Glass Open Time Not adjustable

Glass PID Offset Not adjustable – This value if set incorrectly will break the glass – DO
NOT ADJUST WITHOUT INSTRUCTION FROM NEXTSCAN
Initial Drop Time Not adjustable

The load speed controls the power to the loading motor. The more
Load Speed power the more speed.
Min = 20 Max =127 Default = 110
Increase or decreases the belt load speed. If the speed is too fast you
Load Time will have cards hit the back plate too hard and skew the film. If set to
slow the card may not fully load into the platen.
Min = 100 Max =1000 Default = 300
Retract Time Not adjustable

Retry Drop Time Not adjustable

Separate Backup Speed: Controls how fast the second card will
Separate Backup Speed backup to get into the load position. The ideal load position is near
the middle to bottom of the cork.
Min = 20 Max =127 Default = 30
Separate Backup Time: Is the amount of time the motor continues to
spin backwards after the card clears the input sensor.
Separate Backup Time Min=0 Max =50 Default = 5
Note always adjust the Separate backup speed before adjusting
this time.
The Separate Speed controls power to the input motor. The more
Separate Speed power, the faster the speed.
Min = 20 Max =127 Default = 100
Separate Time is used for loading the different length of film
and is a necessary adjustment for making sure the cards are
loaded into the platen properly. Since cards may not always be
the same length it is important to make sure this adjustment is
not skipped.
Separate Time The closer you can release the first card, the less likely you will
get an input jam from a card not retracting enough. The following
are the Min\Max Defaults for the following standard film sizes.
Jumbo/5x7 Default = 200-250
Aperture Cards /Mini Default = 150-200
Standard (4x6) Default = 175-225

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 129

 Loader Settings Description

Separate Timeout Not adjustable

X Platen Speed Not adjustable

X Platen Acceleration Not adjustable

Y Load Travel Not adjustable

Y Glass Travel controls how much the top glass backs up during
Y Glass Travel unload retries. Lower value causes the glass to back up further.
Min = 0 Max =1.0 Default = .25
Unload Time Not adjustable

Unload Time out Not adjustable

The number of attempts the software will try to remove a microfiche
Unload Retries or aperture card that is stuck on the top glass due to static.
Min = 0 Max =10 Default = 3

Load
The Load/Unload toggle button allows the user to test film loading and unloading while
adjustments are being made to the Loader settings.

Save As
Click Save As to save your settings and type in a unique name for the current setup.
The Saved settings can be recalled later or selected in the NextStarPlus Capture
Preferences dialog box for loader settings to be used in place of the default settings.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Preferences dialog box without
saving your changes.

130 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Advance

Hierarchy Settings

Create Hierarchy On Scanner

Currently not available.

Selected Levels (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)

Clicking on the Selected Levels change button allows the user to select which ribbon
levels will be captured. This option can help to reduce the ribbon’s file size but will limit
the zooming in\out viewing capabilities in the auditor.

Compression Settings

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 131

Compression Type
The Compression Type drop down arrow allows the user to select the compression type
for the ribbons to be scanned. The three choices are Intel JPEG, Intel JPEG-XR and
none.

JPEG (JPG) - Output file format which is a lossy compression technique that is designed
to compress color and grayscale continuous-tone images

JPEG-XR- is a recently approved ISO/IEC International standard and on average, the file
size is 40% smaller than JPEG for similar quality.

None – No compression is used. The data capture is raw uncompressed raster data.

JPEG and JPEG-XR Options

The JPEG and JPEG- XR options include the quality option that can be adjusted to lower
the compression. It is important not to get too aggressive with changing these values
since they will also affect the output quality of the image. The default for JPEG is 90 and
the default for JPEG-XR is 50.

Indexing settings

The Indexing Settings is where the user can check the boxes for Enable Indexing and
Submit On End Of Scan. These features are used with the indexing software and allow
the user to type in and submit index\retrieval information for a ribbon.

Enable Indexing
If checked the scan software will automatically pop up the assigned index template so the
user can type in or select required fields. See Chapter 13 to learn how index templates
are saved and created.

Submit On End Of Scan

If checked the software will automatically submit the index data at the end of the ribbon
capture. See Chapter 13 - Indexing to learn more about indexing.

132 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

MISC

Demo Mode
If Demo Mode is checked the software will automatically scan the entire microfiche rows
unless the rows selection option has specific rows selected.

How to enable full roll demo loop:

A. Load the microfiche into the microfiche platen.

B. Setup the microfiche as you would normally: Focus, Lamp, Detect TrueDPI and
manually create the rows to be scanned.

C. From the scan application go into Edit\Preferences and select the “Always Overwrite
Ribbons”. If you want to keep all the scans do not select this option. To keep the
scan make sure to use the Fiche ID Auto Increment option.

D. From the scan application go into Edit\Preferences\Advance and select the Demo
mode option.

E. Click on Start to scan. The software will automatically start scanning the microfiche
and continue to loop scan until the Scan Control stop button is pressed.

Enable Camera Calibrated Mode

If the Enable Camera Calibrated Mode is selected the camera will use the nextScan
factory camera calibrated settings instead of factory defaults.

OCR Settings – Virtual Film Custom Feature

This is used only with the custom Virtual Film application for running Optical Character
Recognition over a ribbon. Contact [email protected] for additional information.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 133

Remaster Settings
Remaster is a process used with the FicheStar COM detection software. The program is used to
remove the overscan captured at scan time after the detection and deskew processes have been
completed. The user can create a customized Remaster Template based on the film or project
requirements and select the template at scan time where it can automatically be applied to a
ribbon.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Preferences dialog box without
saving your changes.

Help
Use this item to access quick reference help information and nextScan version
information.

Help Topics
Click on the Help Topics to display the NextStarPlus User Guide.

About NextStarPlus
Click About NextStarPlus to display version, build, copyright and system information.

134 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Keyboard Commands
Keyboard commands (keyboard short cuts) are listed along with the associated menu
command. For example, simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and N keys is the keyboard
short cut for the New Config command in the File menu.

Film Setup
DPI
Type the desired DPI (Dots Per Inch) at which the image will be scanned. The available
DPI values are between 100-600.

For the Eclipse system, the software will automatically adjust the camera and lens
Focus positions. For the FlexScan system, the camera will need to be raised or lowered,
depending on the True DPI target chart and then manually focused. See "True DPI on
Film."
Polarity
Use the drop-down menu to select the polarity (negative or positive) of the source
microfilm. Options are Positive and Negative.
True DPI on Film
This is the value at which the system’s current TrueDPI is calculated. Further details on
changing or recalculating this value will be cover later on in this section.
Effective Reduction Ratio
This is based on the Detect True DPI value calculated and represents what the system
found as the reduction ratio.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 135

Focus/Reduction
The Focus/Reduction button will bring up the “Fiche Detect Window” which is used for
setting up the Focus, Detect TrueDPI, Lamp and Gamma Correction Parameters. After
entering into the Fiche Detect Window the software will automatically perform a scan of
the entire platen area to allow the microfiche to be displayed inside the Fiche Detect
Window for preview.
Click on the Focus/Reduction button to display the Fiche Detect Window.

Stop Preview Scan

After entering into the Detect Fiche Window the software will automatically perform a
preview scan of the entire platen area. A preview scan will also occur after a Detect
TrueDPI or Focus function has been performed. The user does not have to wait for the
application to complete the preview scan in order to perform the following functions:
Detect True DPI, Start Focus, OK or Cancel. Clicking on any one of these buttons will
cancel the preview scan and perform that function. If the preview scan is in the middle of
a pass it will continue to scan until the pass is completed before the function (Detect
TrueDPI, Start Focus, OK or Cancel) performs its task.

136 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Close Up View
Selecting the Close Up View check box instructs the application to view the image at the
highest resolution possible when the “Start Focus” button has been activated. If the Close
Up View is not selected it will view the image at the scaled resolution drawn by the user
for focusing.

Detect True DPI

Click this button to run the program that will calculate the True DPI based on the
microfiche platen’s distance from the camera. The value calculated will be displayed in
the window below this button.

Pixel Depth
The Pixel Bit Depth option allows the user to select the desired bit depth that the camera
will capture during the scan process. The options are 8 bit, 10 bit and 12 bit. The 12 bit
option will not show up if the unit does not have the optional 12 bit camera installed.

Start/Stop Focus
The Start\Stop toggle button is used to perform a focus. FlexScan systems require the
user to manually adjust the lens for focus. Selecting the Start Focus toggle button in
“Fiche Detect Window” starts the focus process. The user must draw a box around the
desired area or the program will not launch.

Unload/Load
Clicking the Unload/Load toggle button will unload the microfiche platen so a microfiche
can be inserted or removed.

Home
Clicking on the Home button will move the microfiche platen to its home position.

Gamma White
The Gamma White is used to identify the lowest pixel value for white. Gamma min lets
you set pixels other than white to 0. For example, if gamma min is 20, then any pixels
from 0 to 20 are set to 0. Thus, adjusting Gamma MIN will lighten the background. Since
the option to scan 12 bit, 10 bit or 8 bit is optional this value is represented as a percent.

Gamma Black
The Gamma Black is used to identify the highest pixel value for black. Gamma max lets
you set pixels other than black to 1023. For example, if gamma max is 1000, then any
pixels from 1000 to 1023 are set to 1023. Thus, adjusting Gamma Max will darken the

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 137

 foreground. Since the option to scan 12 bit, 10 bit or 8 bit is optional this value is
represented as a percent.

Enhanced Gamma Curve

The Enhance Gamma Curve is used to automatically adjust the linear gray levels in
order to correct the contrast of the film and color saturation.

Lamp
Changing the brightness of the Fiber Optic or Lumintec LED lighting system changes the
films density measured at the camera.

Negative Film: Increasing the lamp setting increases the film density and makes
the captured images darker. Decreasing the lamp setting decreases the film
density and makes the captured images lighter.

Positive Film: Increasing the lamp setting decreases the film density and makes
the captured images lighter. Decreasing the lamp setting increases the film
density and makes the captured images darker.

Top Lamp – (Optional)

The top lamp enables the reflective title bar lamp. This allows the unit to capture
information from microfiche that have opaque title bar information that cannot be
captured using the standard lighting.

Rows

The Rows drop down arrow is used to define custom settings that can be applied to a
desired row in the Manual Setup window. An example of this would be the Title bar or a
unique row with opposite polarity or a row with distinct contrast . The user can customize
the Lamp, Gamma Max, Gamma Min and the Polarity for each Custom Option including
the default. Once the option is selected the operator can make the desired changes and
these changes will automatically be available for selection in the Manual Setup window.

Polarity
The Polarity drop down arrow allows the user to select the polarity (negative or positive)
of the source microfilm.

138 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

How to Focus FlexScan Microfiche
Focusing images on a FlexScan is done manually with a Nikon lens. Each height
position of the camera changes the lens and camera focal lengths, which are
designed to project information (image data and lighting) captured by the CCD
array for digitization. These positions are based on the TrueDPI (dots per inch
and the reduction ratio of the microfilm). Once the desired TrueDPI is determined
and the film is loaded perform the following steps. See Chapter 2: “Film Loading
and TrueDPI” for further details on calculating TrueDPI and film loading.

A. Load Film

B. Verify the camera height arrow is adjusted to the correct TrueDPI value for
the film being scanned. If the calculated TrueDPI is 12000 the camera arrow
should be set to this value.

C. From the Capture window click on the Focus/Reduction button to bring up

the Fiche Detect window.

D. Draw a box around an area of the image. Check the Close up View check
box to get the closet image view possible.

E. Click on the Start Focus button. The software will mechanically scan back
and forth over the selected section of the film, and will display a zoomed in
version of the image in the Fiche Detect preview window. If no text or image
data is visible, stop and redraw the box over a different section to position an
image under the Nikon lens. In addition the lamp may need to be increased
or decreased to view the image data clearly.

F. Use the zoomed in image as the guide while turning the knurled part of the
Nikon lens until the image data in the focus preview window is in the
sharpest focus possible.

Lens Focus Ring

Note: If the image is too small to focus try clicking on the Close Up View
check box before clicking on the Start Focus button. Selecting the Close Up
View check box instructs the application to view the image at the highest
resolution possible.

G. Stop Focus - The Start Focus toggle button will change to Stop Focus to
allow the user to stop the focus function once focusing is done.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 139

 H. After the Stop Focus, automatically the detect TrueDPI program for
Microfiche will run. Once it is complete reference the TrueDPI value located
under the TrueDPI button. Verify that this value is correct for the DPI and
resolution of the film being scanned. See Chapter 2 “True DPI” for details on
calculating TrueDPI. If the value is not correct reposition the head height
arrow key up or down accordingly and repeat steps 1-6 until the TrueDPI
value matches +/- 10% of the calculated TrueDPI of the film being scanned.
OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Fiche Detect dialog box
without saving your changes.

Manual Setup
Click the Manual Setup button to open the NextStarPlus Scan dialog box. This is where
the user will manually draw in each row to be scanned.

Click the Manual Setup button to open the NextStar Scan dialog box. This is where the
user will manually draw in each row to be scanned.

Preview Scan
After entering into the Manual Setup Window the software will automatically perform a
preview scan of the entire platen area. The user does not have to wait for the application
to complete the preview scan in order to perform the following functions: Draw, Resize or
re-position a row or rows; Delete and Redraw a row or rows; and Click on OK or Cancel
to exit. After clicking on the OK or Cancel button if the preview scan is in the middle of a
pass it will continue to scan until the pass is completed.

140 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Define Rows
To draw a row manually, deselect the Draw Equal Sized Rows, click the upper-left corner
and hold the mouse button down. Drag the mouse towards the lower-right corner and
stop where you want the row to end. Repeat this for each row until all the rows to be
scanned are drawn.
✔ NOTE
The order in which the rows are drawn is the order in which they will be scanned.
✔ NOTE
If the rows are drawn too wide or too long you may get Scanner API time out
errors or not enough memory messages. Please see Chapter 2 Constraints for
details concerning maximum TrueDPI and image file size.
Tip: When drawing rows for COM (Computer Output Microfilm) it is best to draw
the rows taller and longer than the actual rows. This will allow for some shifting
that may be caused by the microfiche placement or shift in film format.

✔ NOTE
Make sure the check box for Draw Equal Size Rows is not marked before
selecting a desired row to adjust. If it is turned on it will create new rows rather
than allowing the user to adjust a highlighted row.

Row colors
The color of a row indicates if the row is active or inactive. The color red or dark green
represents active and allows the user to make changes to it. The color blue or light green
represents inactive meaning no manual changes can be applied to the row. The color of
a row also indicates weather it will be scanned using default or custom settings. For
example a red or blue row will be scanned with default settings and a green or dark green
row will be scanned with custom settings. See Apply Custom Row Settings covered later
on in this section.
✔ NOTE

A single row or multiple rows cannot be manually adjusted when the Draw Equal
Sized Rows check box is selected.

How to Delete a Row or Multiple Rows

The following outlines how to delete a row or multiple rows.

Single Row
1. Right mouse click on a specific row to bring up the custom row list.
2. Select the Delete Row Option.
OR
1. Right mouse click on a specific row.
2. Select the delete key.
Multiple Rows

1. Click on the control button and highlight the desired rows.

2. Continue to hold the control key down and right mouse click to bring up the
custom row list.
3. Select the Delete Row Option.
OR
1. Click on the control button and highlight the desired rows.
2. Continue to hold the control key down and hit delete key.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 141

Apply Custom Row Settings (Optional)
Once the rows are drawn they are automatically assigned the default setting created in
the Fiche Detect window. The default and custom settings that can be applied to a row
are created in the Fiche Detect Window covered earlier in this section. The following
outlines how to Apply Custom Row Settings to a single row or to multiple rows:
✔ NOTE

Make sure the check box for Draw Equal Size Rows is not marked before
selecting the desired row. If it is turned on it will create new rows rather than
allowing the user to select rows manually.

Single Row
1. Right mouse click on a specific row to bring up the custom row list.

2. Select the desired custom setting. A check mark will appear in front of the
selected option which lets the operator know which setting was applied to the
row.

Multiple Rows

1. Click on the control button and highlight the desired rows.

2. Continue to hold the control button down and right mouse click to bring up
the custom row list.

3. Select the desired custom setting. A check mark will appear in front of the
selected option which lets the operator know which setting was applied to the
row.

✔ NOTE

If custom settings were not created in the Focus reduction ratio window the
custom row option will be grayed out and not selectable.

142 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Row Definition Options
This selection allows you to draw several rows at the same time using the Draw Equal
Sized Rows check box.

Rows
To use, click the Draw Equal Sized check box.

Select the Row radial button

In the Count field, type in the number of rows.

Then, click the upper-left corner and hold the mouse button down. Drag the mouse
towards the lower-right corner and stop where the last row bottom corner ends.

✔ NOTE

A Row size cannot be manually adjusted when the Draw Equal Sized Rows is
turned on.

Lines – Used with FicheStar Application for scanning COM microfiche

To use, click the Draw Equal Sized check box.

Select the Lines radial button

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 143

 In the Count field, type in the number of lines needed to cover each row with in the COM
microfiche. If the title bar is to be captured make sure to at it to the row count.

Then, click the middle of the first row and hold the mouse button down. Drag the mouse
towards the lower-right corner and stop in the middle of the row. When done each row
should have a red line though the middle as shown below. This will allow the system to
add the needed over scan above and below each row.

Once complete verify all the lines are centered over each row. If not click on line, hold down
mouse and move the line up or down until it is centered over the COM row. In addition make sure
to include extra horizontal over scan due to potential shifting that can occur during operation. For
setting up the FicheStar Application see Chapter 12.

✔ NOTE

A Line cannot be manually adjusted when the Draw Equal Sized Rows is turned on.

How to Check Which Settings are Applied to a Row

To check which custom settings are applied to a row perform the following:

1. Right mouse click on a specific row to bring up the custom row list.

2. The custom setting selected will have a check mark in front of it.

144 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 ✔ NOTE

If multiple rows are tagged with the same custom setting the custom row list will
not display a check mark.

Keyboard and Mouse Commands

This section describes actions you can perform in the Manual Setup the keyboard, the
mouse, or a combination of both keyboard and mouse.

Expand or Decrease View

Use the windows or maximize\minimize toggle buttons located on the upper right
hand corner of the Manual Setup window to increase or decrease the Manual Setup
window display. The user can also grab a corner of the Manual Setup window and
manually drag the window diagonally to the desired size.

How to Adjust Rows Manually

See the following for instructions on how to manually select, resize and move
single or multiple rows.

✔ NOTE

A row or rows cannot be manually adjusted when the Draw Equal Sized Rows
check box is selected.
Single Row
Select: Click on the desired row to change the row color from blue to red.

Resize: After selecting a row, click on the top or bottom\left or right sides of the row and
manually drag the box to the desired width or length.

Move: After selecting a row, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys. Move the row as a unit
by clicking in the center of one of the selected rows and drag it vertically or horizontally to
the desired location.

Multiple Rows
Select: While holding down the Ctrl key, click on the rows you want to select.

Resize: After selecting the rows, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys. Resize the group by
clicking the top or bottom\left or right sides of one of the rows and manually drag the row
to the desired width or length.

Move: After selecting the rows, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys. Move the rows as a
unit by clicking in the center of one of the rows and drag it vertically or horizontally to the
desired location.

All Rows
Select: Hold down the Ctrl and A key to select all rows.

Resize: After selecting all rows, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys. Resize the group by
clicking the top or bottom\left or right sides of a row and manually drag the row to the
desired width or length.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 145

 Move: After selecting all rows, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys. Move the rows as a
unit by clicking in the center of a row and drag it vertically or horizontally to the desired
location.

146 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Fiche Detect dialog box
without saving your changes.

Production Setup
Job ID
Type the name to be used for the project in the Job ID text box. This will create a folder
where the ribbon files will be scanned to. The value typed in the Job ID text box can also
be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Batch Name
Type the name to be used as a Batch Identifier in the Batch Name text box. This will
allow the user to manage the ribbons in the Controller based on the Batch Name. This
Batch Name will create a folder under the Job ID and the ribbon files will be scanned
under the Batch Name. The value typed in the Batch Name text box can also be
referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Auto Increment (Used for Batch ID)

Use the Auto Increment to automatically assign an identifier to the Batch ID name when
scanning multiple microfiche as part of the same batch.

Click the Auto Increment button on the Main Window to display the Auto Increment
dialogue box.

Select the Enable Auto Increment check box and increment options. You can use
alphabetic or numeric increment identifiers.

Click the Alphabetic Increment option to use alphabetic increment identifiers, and
choose uppercase, lowercase, or both.

Click the Numeric Increment option to use numeric increment identifiers.

You can customize the increment separator character by typing a different character in
the Increment Separator field.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 147

 If you want to use a specific keypad character in the identifier, type it in the Pad
Character field. Use the Pad Count arrows to increase or decrease the count.

The Sample Fiche ID field shows an example of what the film name will be with the
selected increment identifier.

To restore increment values to default settings, click the Reset Increment Value button.

Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Auto Increment Setup dialog
box without saving your changes.

Output Batch As A Whole

Allows the user to treat a group of ribbons as a batch. If set to Yes, the batch will be marked as
compete. In the Auditor the option Finish Batch will be available. The user will be able to select
Finish Batch when the last ribbon in the batch is done being audited. If set to No, the batch will
be marked as not completed. The File\Finish Batch option will not be available in the Auditor.

✔ NOTE

The Output Batch As A Whole will not override numbering changes made in the
Auditor. See Chapter 8 for more details on the Auditor Software, under “Initial
Output Numbering”.

Enable Continuous Numbering

Enable Continuous Naming is used to enable or disable continuous naming of the batches under
the current Job ID. If set to No, image numbering will start at 1 or 0 for each ribbon depending on
how it was set in the Auditor. See Chapter 8 for more details on the Auditor, under “Output
Options, 1 or 0 Based Naming”.

✔ NOTE

The Enable Continuous Numbering setting does not override numbering changes
made in the Auditor. See Chapter 8 for more details on the Auditor Software,
under “Initial Output Numbering” and “1 or 0 Based Naming”.

Fiche ID
Type the name aka Fiche ID to be used to identify the source microfiche or aperture card.
Make sure you use a name that is specific and unique for each microfiche or aperture
card so that previous ribbon captures are not overwritten. The value typed in the Fiche
Name text box can also be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box
for indexing purposes.

✔ NOTE

Auto Increment can be used in conjunction with the Fiche Name identifier to
automatically increment the Fiche Name alphabetically or numerically based on
user preference. See Auto Increment for more details covered later on in this
section.

Auto Increment
Use Auto Increment to automatically assign an identifier to the microfiche name when
making multiple captures for the same Fiche Name.

148 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Click the Auto Increment button on the Main Window to display the Auto Increment
dialogue box.

Select the Enable Auto Increment check box and increment options. You can use
alphabetic or numeric increment identifiers.

Click the Alphabetic Increment option to use alphabetic increment identifiers, and
choose uppercase, lowercase, or both.

Click the Numeric Increment option to use numeric increment identifiers.

You can customize the increment separator character by typing a different character in
the Increment Separator field.

If you want to use a specific keypad character in the identifier, type it in the Pad
Character field. Use the Pad Count arrows to increase or decrease the count.

The Sample Fiche ID field shows an example of what the film name will be with the
selected increment identifier.

To restore increment values to default settings, click the Reset Increment Value button.

Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Auto Increment Setup dialog
box without saving your changes.

Last In Batch
The Last In Batch command is used when scanning microfiche in batches. When the
user selects the “Last In Batch” check box it communicates to the NSController that the
last microfiche for the current batch has been scanned.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 149

 In the Auditor application under the “Available Ribbons” pick list section the ribbon will be
highlight in red so it is easy to identify as shown in below example.
Auditor Select A Ribbon Dialog Box

✔ NOTE
The “Output Batch As A Whole” works in conjunction with the Last In Batch
feature. Both must be selected in order to process the ribbons in the scanned
order. The user will still be able to use the NSController to re-order the ribbons
or batches. See Chapter 4 – NSController, section: Batches under Batches
Output Ordering and Ribbons Output Ordering for details.

Scan Control
Start
Use this button to start the capture (scan) operation.

✔ NOTE
If there are rows tagged with custom settings the display will have a green
bounding box around the scanned images and a blue bounding box around
images scanned using the default settings.

Row Selection
Click on the Row Selection button to bring up the Fiche Row Selection dialog box. This is
where the user can manually choose which rows will be scanned or Select All to scan all
rows.

150 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Fiche Row Selection
The Fiche Row Selection dialog box allows the user to choose between scanning “All
Rows” or choosing which rows will be scanned once the user clicks on the Scan button.
To choose specific rows click on the “Specific Rows “radio button and highlight the
desired rows to be scanned. The software will continue to scan only the rows selected
until the manually changes it.

Pause Display
Use this button to pause the preview window display (the capture (scan) operation does
not pause).

Platen Control
Load/Unload
Use this button to put tension on or eject the microfiche from the platen, allowing the user
to load or unload the microfiche for scanning.

Status Bar Information

The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the NextStarPlus window. The left area of the
status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys to navigate
through menus.

This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you
press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button
command you do not want to execute the command, release the mouse button while the
pointer is off the toolbar button.

The right area of the status bar informs the user if the Caps Lock, Num Lock, or Scroll
Lock buttons are enabled.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Manual Setup dialog box
without saving your changes.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 151

Batch Setup
The following describes how to setup for batch scanning:
1. Type in the desired Batch Name
2. Set the Batch Auto Increment settings (optional)
3. Type in the Fiche ID – Project Specific
4. Set the Fiche ID Auto Increment settings (Optional)

✔ NOTE

When using the Auto Increment feature for the Fiche ID you will need to make
sure the “Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID” check box is marked. This option
is located under the Edit\Preferences dialog box. When this option is checked it
will reset the Fiche ID back to original Auto Increment settings every time the last
ribbon in batch is scanned.

5. Select the “Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID” in the preferences settings
(Optional)

✔ NOTE

If the “Last Ribbon In Batch Resets Film ID” check box is not marked it will not
reset the Fiche ID Auto Increment settings.

6. Mark the “Output Batch as a Whole” check box (optional)

7. Mark the “Enable Continuous numbering” check box (optional)
8. Mark the “Last In Batch” check box once the last fiche in batch has been
reached. The batch will be marked as ready for output.

✔ NOTE

If the “Output As A Whole” has been selected, the Batch will not output until the
operator clicks on Finish Batch and all ribbons in the batch have been processed.

9. After clicking on the “Last In Batch” check box, the box will be reset to unmarked
until user manually marks it again for the last ribbon of the next batch
10. Once the batch settings are done the user can then begin scanning batches
which can be managed in the Capture, Auditor or NSController applications. For
details see:
Chapter 05: NSController – Under the Administration “Jobs” and
“Batches” sections.

Chapter 08: Capture for Microfiche and Aperture Cards - Under the
“Batch Setup” section

Chapter 09: NextstarPlus Auditor - Under the “Processing a Batch in the

Auditor” section.

152 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 9 - NextStarPlus Auditor Software
NextStarPlus Auditor Overview

The NextStarPlusAuditor software is used for quality control and enhancing or

manipulating captured images from roll film and microfiche ribbon files. You can use
NextStarPlusAuditor to make sure that all of the images from the source film were
captured and framed correctly, delete images, and reorganize images before the
captured images are output.

NextStarPlusAuditor Main Window

The following figure shows the main NextStarPlusAuditor window when a ribbon file is
open. The display for Roll Film and microfiche show the captured ribbon in row format
and allow the user to scroll up or down and zoom in or out to get the desired view.

✔ NOTE

The Auditor window for Roll Film, Microfiche and Aperture Cards look identical
except with Microfiche\Aperture ribbons there is also an up\down Scroll Bar
which allows the user to move up or down one row at a time.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 153

Keyboard and Mouse Commands
This section describes actions you can perform with the NextStarPlusAuditor software by
using the keyboard, the mouse, or a combination of both keyboard and mouse.

Expand or Decrease View

Use the + and – keys to increase and decrease the NextStarPlusAuditor window display.
These keys perform the same operation as the and icons, respectively.

Each view shows a different reduction level of the image. Each reduction level is 1/4 the
size of the level above it, achieved by dividing the image in half once by width and once
by height (1/2 x 1/2 = 1/4).

There are eight resolutions in which the ribbon is captured. These resolutions can be
used in conjunction with the detect parameters.

Selecting Frames\Images
See the following instructions on how to select a single, random or group of
frames\images.

How to select a single frame\image

Click on an image or frame you want to select.

While the image is highlighted, you can move the image\frame as a desired.

How to select random frames\images

Hold down the Ctrl key, click on an image or frame you want to select first. Continue to
hold the Ctrl key down and click on the desired images or frames you would like to
select.

Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the images\frames as a
unit.

How to select a group of images\frames in sequential order

Hold down the Ctrl key, click outside the left edge of the beginning image or frame (not
on the image\frame box) you want to begin at. Continue to hold the Ctrl key down and
drag the mouse over the images\frames until the desired last image\frame is highlighted.

Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the group of
images\frames as a unit.

How to select all frames\images

Click File, and select All. Or, simultaneously, press Ctrl and A on the keyboard.

Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the images\frames as a
unit.

How to select all odd or even frames\images

Click File, and select All Odd\Even. Or, simultaneously, press Ctrl and T on the
keyboard. To switch back and forth between selecting odd\even images\frames press on
the Ctrl and T keys to toggle between both options.

154 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the images\frames as a
unit.

Tip: When selecting duplex image(s)\frame(s) while dragging the mouse to

highlight, start at the top image\frame and end at the bottom image\frame. The
mouse must be moved diagonally across the desired section unless only the top
or bottom image(s) are required. To select only the top or bottom
image(s)\frame(s) congruently, start at the desired top or bottom
image(s)\frame(s) and drag mouse to end at top or bottom image\frame you want
highlighted.

Box Colors in Images View

The Images view is selected in the Auditor’s View menu under Current View. When in
this view the color of each frame indicates the confidence level of each image. This
confidence level is the perceived quality of each image scanned. The color surrounding
the image frame dictates this perceived confidence level. The following lists these color
confidence levels and their given values:

Blue = high confidence

Yellow = medium confidence

Red = low confidence

Pink = active

There are two other colors possible; however, these colors indicate selected items and
newly drawn boxes, and do not pertain to the color confidence indicators. For example,
when drawing in a window, a teal-colored, dash-line box will appear. A dialog box will
then ask whether you want to add the frame image.

A selected image will be surrounded by an orange dash line.

✔ NOTE

A selected image or group of images will show the bounding box (s) highlighted.
The active image in the preview window will show this image highlighted with a
pink bounding box. There are five possible views: blip, deskew, frame, image and
none.

Drawing frames and images manually

For information about manually drawing frames and images, see one of the following
sections covered in later on in this section.

 Add Image to New Frame

 Add Image to New or Existing Frame

 Add Frame

 Add Frame with Blip

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 155

 Menu

The following table lists each command located under the NextStarPlusAuditor software
Menu and the associated shortcuts that are available.

Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Open Ctrl + O File Open a file.

Close n\a File Closes a file.

Load Grid Template Ctrl + L File Load a grid template.

Save Ctrl + S File Save a file.

Save Grid Template Ctrl + G File Save a grid template.

Finish Audit Ctrl + F File Changes ribbon state in

the NSController to pre-
outputting unless a
custom state was created

Finish Batch Ctrl + B File Changes batch state to

pre-outputting in the
NSController unless a
custom state was created

Note: The output program

will not start the output
process until the Finish
Audit has been done for
all ribbons in the batch.

Reject Audit Ctrl+R File Changes ribbon state in

the NSController to
unknown unless a custom
state was created.

Print Images Ctrl+P File Used for printing selected

image (s)

Email Images Ctrl+E File Used for emailing selected

image (s)

Undo Ctrl + Z Edit Not functional

Cut Ctrl + X Edit Not functional.

156 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Copy Ctrl + C Edit Not functional

Paste Ctrl + V Edit Not functional

Select All Frames Ctrl + A Edit Select all frames.

Select All Odd/Even Ctrl + T Edit Allows user to toggle

between selecting all odd
or even frames\images.

Mirror N\A Edit Allows user to vertically

flip the ribbon display so
that images are viewed
right side up or right side
down.

Reverse N\A Edit Roll Film: Reverses the

ribbon and starts
numbering the last frame
or image as the first.

Microfiche: Reverses
each row in a ribbon so
the last frame or image in
a row is the first

Find Text Ctrl + Alt + F Edit Currently not available

Current Overlay Ctrl + Shift + L View Changes the Auditor view

to the Blips View

Current Overlay Ctrl + Shift + Q View Changes the Auditor view

to the Deskew View

Current Overlay Ctrl + Shift + F View Changes the Auditor view

to the Frames View

Current Overlay Ctrl + Shift + I View Changes the Auditor view

to the Images View

Current Overlay Ctrl + Shift + N View Changes the Auditor view

to None

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 157

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Preview Window Ctrl + Shift + P View Shows the frame or image

in a preview window.

Available only when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Blips,
Frames, or Images.

Ribbon Header Ctrl + Shift + R View Open the NextStarPlus

Ribbon Header dialog
box. Available in all
Current View modes.

Zoom In + View Zoom in to enlarge the

image.

Zoom Out - View Zoom out to make the

image smaller.

Virtual Film Cntl+H View Switches from ribbon view

to single image\frame
view.

Ribbon Review Default View View N\A

Digital Viewer Cntl+H View Scroll through single

image viewer

Analog Viewer Cntl+N View Scroll through ribbon

viewer. Used with Virtual
Film to locate images
within a ribbon.

Quick Image n\a View Used to Apply Quick

Image Enhancements or
Active only when use the Goto Feature
Digital Viewer is option
Selected

Blackout Ctrl + Shift + B Tools Blacks out all segmented

blips, images or frames
and depending on the view.
Short cut on Main Available in all Current
Auditor tool bar View modes.

158 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Initial Output Ctrl+J Tools The Initial Output

Numbering Numbering is used for
and customizing the starting
number of a Naming
Short cut on Main variable for example the
Auditor tool bar starting image or frame
number can be set to start
at any desired number.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Alt Number Ctrl+K Tools The Alt Number is used

for customizing the
starting number of a Blip,
Frame or Image number
within a ribbon. The
operator can choose any
blip, image or frame and
set it to start at any
desired number.

Available in all Current

View modes. Feature
works in tandem with
Initial Output Numbering

Merge Images and Ctrl + Shift + J Tools Merge selected image (s)
Frames and frame (s) together
changing the frame count.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Images.

Merge Images in Ctrl + Shift + K Tools Merge selected image (s)

Frames inside each frame (s)
without changing the
frame order.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Images.

Vertically Split Ctrl + Shift + S Tools Splits selected image (s)

Images (s) in in frame (s) vertically.
Frame(s)
Available when the
Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames
or Images.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 159

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Horizontally Splits Ctrl + Shift + H Tools Split selected image (s) in

Images (s) in frame (s) horizontally.
Frame(s)
Available when the
Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames
or Images.

Vertically Split Ctrl + Shift + Y Tools Split selected image (s)

Image(s) and and frame (s) vertically.
Frame (s)
Available when the
Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames
or Images.

Horizontally Split Ctrl + Shift + Z Tools Split selected image (s)

Image(s) and and frame (s) horizontally.
Frame (s)
Available when the
Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames
or Images.

Merge Frame(s) Ctrl + Shift + M Tools Merge selected frames

into one Frame.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames.

Fiche Grid Wizard Ctrl + Shift + G Tools Opens the

NextStarPlusAuditor
(microfiche modules Fiche Grid Wizard dialog
only) box.

Available when the

Current View setting in the
View menu is Blip,
Deskew, Image and
None.

Options Ctrl + Shift + O Tools Open the

NextStarPlusAuditor
Options dialog box.

Available in all Current

View modes.

160 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Output Options Ctrl + Shift + U Tools Open the

NextStarPlusAuditor
Output Options dialog
box.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Frames
or Images.

Export Images Ctrl + D Tools Used to export aka write a

selected image, all images
or group of images to the
desired file location.

Image or Frame Ctrl + Shift + E Tools Expand the amount of

Expander over scan space (padding)
at the top and bottom of
the image.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Images
or Frame.

Image or Frame Ctrl + Shift + C Tools Contract the amount of

Contractor over scan space (padding)
at the top and bottom of
the image.

Available when the

Current View setting in
the View menu is Images
or Frame.

Grid Templates Ctrl + Shift + T Tools Allows user to access

saved grid templates.
(microfiche modules
only) Available when a
microfiche module is
loaded and in all Current
View modes.

Output Templates Ctrl + Shift + V Tools Allows user to access

saved output templates.

Available in all Current

View modes.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 161

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Accept Blip (s), Click on Tools Accepts selected frames

Image(s) or Frames Tools\Accept Blip and changes its color to
(s) (s), Image (s) or blue.
Frame (s).
Available when the
Blip (s), Image (s) or Current View setting in
Frame (s) must be the View menu is Frames.
highlighted.

Delete Blip (s), Delete Tools Delete selected images.

Image(s) or Frames
(s) OR – Right mouse Available when the
click on selected Current View setting in
Blip (s), Image (s) or the View menu is Blips,
Frame (s) and select Images or Frames.
the Delete option

Fixed Frame Sizes Ctrl+Shift+W Tools Open the

NextStarPlusAuditor
Fixed Frame Sizes dialog
box.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Skip Blip (s), Image Ctrl+Shift+X or right Tools Skips selected blip (s),
(s) or Frame(s) mouse click on images (s) or frame (s)
frame and select and keeps global
Skip option. numbering the same.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Index Image Cntl+I Tools Assigns a sign wave to

flag selected blip (s),
images (s) or frame (s) for
custom indexing. It keeps
global numbering the
same.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Image Notes Right mouse click to Tools Allows user to add a note
select option to an image. Used with
Virtual Film but can also
be used to add notes to
images when using the
Export, Print and email
features.

162 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Command Keyboard Shortcut Menu Description

Administration N\A Tools Opens the

NextStarPlusAuditor
Ribbon: Ctrl+Q Job, Batch, Ribbon and
Index Entry
Index Entry: Administration dialog
Ctrl+Shift+D boxes.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Frame Detection N\A Tools Open the

NextStarPlusAuditor
Short cuts on Main NS1, NS2 or NS3 dialog
Auditor tool bar for boxes.
NS1 & 2
Available in all Current
View modes.

Help Topics Alt + H +H Help Open the NextStarPlus

User’s Guide.

Available in all Current

View modes.

About Alt + H +A Help Open the NextStarPlus

NextStarPlusAuditor About
NextStarPlusAuditor
dialog box. Access to
software details.

Available in all Current

View modes.

Keyboard shortcuts
Many of the commands that are available on the toolbar menus are also available as
keyboard shortcuts. If available, the shortcuts appear next to the menu items, as shown
in the following figure.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 163

Left-click Mouse Commands
Click down and drag the left mouse button to add new blips, frames, or images,
depending on the view that you have selected in the Current View setting of the View
menu (Blips, Frames, or Images).

 Blips Ctrl+Shift+L – Will show the blip detection only – User can also create, redefine
blips and verify blip confidence levels.

 Deskew Ctrl+Shift+Q – Will show the deskew angles of skewed images (only if NS2
had the deskew option turned on). – User can also manually redefine the deskew
angle.

 Frames Ctrl+Shift+F – Will show the Frame where detection takes place. User can
also manually delete, or create new frames.

 Images Ctrl+Shift+I – Will show the Image Data of what will be written to disk. User
can also manually delete, redefine or create new images.

 None Ctrl+Shift+N – Will not display any bounding boxes.

Box Colors in Blips View

The Blips view is selected in the Auditor’s View menu under Current View. There are two
Blips views, Blip Type and Blip Confidence. Use the following menu buttons to switch
between views.

Blip Type View Button. When in this view the color of each blip indicates the blip
type assigned to each image. The color surrounding the blip dictates the following blip
type levels:

Orange = Folder

Green = Document

164 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Blue = Page

Brown = Volume

Purple = Custom1

Hot Pink = Custom2

Blip Confidence View Button. When in this view the color of each blip indicates the
blip confidence assigned to each image. The color surrounding the blip dictates the
following blip levels:

Additional colors are used to indicate the confidence level of each blip. This confidence
level is the perceived quality of each blip. The color surrounding the blip dictates this
perceived confidence level. The following lists these color confidence levels and their
given values:

Blue = high confidence

Yellow = medium confidence
Red = low confidence

Blip View Right Mouse Click Options

This section will cover the right click drop down menu items that appears when Blips is
the Current View setting of the View menu. Right mouse click on a blipped image to
bring up the following options:

 Alt Number
 Set Blip Size
 Skip Blip
 Delete Blip

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 165

Alt Number
The Alt Number feature is used to change the starting number for a blipped image\frame.
Normally blips are output in sequential order starting at either 0 or 1 depending on the
user’s preference. The Alt Number allows the sequence to be manually changed within a
ribbon for each blip or for selected blips based on the user’s requirements. The following
figure shows how to assign a new blip value to an image\frame:

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. Right mouse click on the blip image\frame you want to change the starting
sequence numbering.

3. Select Alt Number

4. Click on the Enable check box and type in the desired number starting number

Example:

5. Click OK when done. The naming index string should be set for indexing based
on blip type so the software will number the blip using the value typed in the
Alternate Number text box. For example: If the blip was a document then the
starting number for that DOC blip will be 500 as shown in Step #4 example and
the next document blip in sequence will be 501 unless the operator manually
changes the Alt Number of the next DOC blip.

Set New Blip Size

The Set New Blip Size allows the user to change the size of a blip to a different blip size.

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. Right mouse click on the blip image\frame you want to change blip type.

3. Select the Set Blip Size option

166 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 4. Select the New Blip Size and verify the blip is the correct color for the blip type
selected. If the desired blip size option is not available see Add Blip covered
later on in this section.

Skip Blip
The Skip Blip feature allows the user to skip outputting a blip image or frame without
changing the numbering sequence. This feature is especially useful for grid microfiche
were the row or column numbering sequence must be maintained even when images or
frames are deleted. The following figure shows how to skip an image\frame:

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. Right mouse click on the blip image\frame you want to skip.

3. Select the Skip Blip option

4. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

5. Right mouse click on the blipped image you want to skip

6. Select Skip Blip.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 167

Delete Blip
The Delete Blip feature allows the user to delete a blip image or frame and will
automatically change the numbering sequence to reflect the change. The image will not
be counted or written to disk. The following figure shows how to delete an image\frame:

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. Right mouse click on the blip image\frame you want to skip.

3. Highlight the Delete Blip option

Add Blip
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. Select an area on the NextStarPlusAuditor window and release the mouse, and

3. Select Add New Blip.

You can add the selected area as a new blip by Volume or Page.

✔ NOTE

The above example shows only the Volume and Page blip options under Add
New Blip. The options listed will depend on the blip types detected and manually
drawn custom blip types. To add a custom or additional blip types to the list see
Add New Blip Size below.

168 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Add New Blip Size
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:

1. Blips is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. select an area on the NextStarPlusAuditor window and release the mouse, and

3. select Add New Blip Size.

You can set blip parameters by Document, Folder, or up to two custom sizes.

Change Blip Type

The following figure shows the how the auditor appears when:

1. Blip is the Current View setting of the View menu.

2. Right mouse click on a blip

3. Highlight the Set Blip Size and choose the desired blip type from the list. The list
will only show the blip sizes that have been found or added. See section Add
New Blip Size earlier in this section or Add New Blip Size.

✔ NOTE

A check mark will be in front of the current blip type detected.

View or Change Deskew Angle

The following figure shows the how the auditor appears when:

1. Deskew is the Current View setting of the View menu.

✔ NOTE

To view the skew angles in Deskew mode the Auditor Detection method must be
using NS2 with the Deskew option set to yes.

2. select an image in the NextStarPlusAuditor Window by clicking on it

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 169

 3. click and hold down on a corner of an image and move the mouse up or down to
change the skew angle of an image

Before After

4. click and hold down on the left\right or top\bottom handles to increase or

decrease the image width or height

Before After
Add Image to New Frame
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:
1. Images is the Current View setting of the View menu,select an un-captured
area on the NextStarPlusAuditor window and release the mouse, and select Add
New Image.

Select New Frame to add the selected area as an image to a new frame. The
new image has a red line around it and receives a frame number, as shown in
the following figure (the new frame number in this case is 62).

170 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Add Image to New or Existing Frame
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:

1. Images is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. select a previously captured image on the NextStarPlusAuditor window and

release the mouse, and

3. select Add Image To.

Select Frame n (where n is the number of the frame) to add the selected area as an
image to the existing frame.

Select New Frame to add the selected area as an image to a new frame.

Add Frame
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:

1. Frames is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. select an area in the NextStarPlusAuditor window and release the mouse, and

3. select Add Frame.

The area you selected becomes a frame, shown by a dark blue line around the selected
area.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 171

Add Frame with Blip
The following figure shows the menu that appears when:

1. Frames is the Current View setting of the View menu,

2. select an area in the NextStarPlusAuditor window and release the mouse, and

3. Select Add Frame with Blip.

4. Choose the new blip type from the drop down list. For example below shows the
Volume and page type options are available..

If needed the user can create additional blips such as a custom type, Folder, or
Document. See Add new blip size covered earlier in this section for details.

Select multiple images in a row

In the NextStarPlusAuditor pane, click somewhere to the side of an image, as shown by
the cursor arrow in the following figure.

Press and hold the Ctrl key while pressing and dragging the left mouse button over the
frames or images you want to select. The selected area is marked by a light-blue dotted
line.

172 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 You can modify or delete the selected items as a group. The following figure shows the
frames after they were selected and deleted (by right-clicking and then clicking Delete).
In the figure, the deletion is shown by the fact that the numbering has skipped the three
deleted frames. (The frame farthest to the right is now numbered "2.")

Right-click Mouse Commands

With the mouse cursor on the NextStarPlusAuditor screen, right-click to display
commands. The right-click menu options vary, depending on the view of the
NextStarPlusAuditor window that you have chosen. To change the view, click View,
select Current Setting, and select one of the following options:

 Blips - Will show the blip detection only – User can also create or redefine blips

 Deskew - Will show the deskew angles of skewed images

 Frames – Will show the Frame where detection takes place

 Images – Will show the Image Data of what will be written to disk

 None- Will not display any bounding boxes

The right-click menus that appear for each of these settings are described below.

Blips
When the Blips view is selected, the following menu appears when you select and right-
click a blip.

Select Alt Number to change the blip number

Select Set Blip Size to change the blip selection to volume or page.

Select Skip Blip to skip the blip without re-numbering the ribbon

Select Delete Blip to delete the blip.

When you select Volume for the blip size, all of the blips in the window are selected
when you click them, as shown by the dotted blue lines in the following figure. Information
on the defining blip sizes will be covered later on in this section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 173

 When you select Page for the blip size, a single blip is selected when you click it, as
shown by the dotted blue lines in the following figure. Unselected blips are displayed with
solid blue lines.

Deskew
When the Deskew view is selected, the following menu appears when you select and
right-click on

• Alt Number: Used change the image\frame starting number

• Accept Frame: Accept a selected frame.

• Delete Image: Delete a selected frame.

• Export Frame: Export a selected frame.(currently not available)

• Output Options: Displays the processing options that will be applied to the image (s)

• Skip Frame: Skips a selected frame without changing the ribbon numbering.

• Index Frame: Used for tagging images for indexing (customer software required)

• Preview Window: Turn off or on the preview window at the bottom of the
NextStarPlusAuditor screen

✔ NOTE

In order for the software to perform a deskew on the images written to disk using
the NS2 Deskew option, the Deskew option under the Output Definition must
also be selected. If there is more than one Output Definition the option must be
selected for each if deskew is required.

174 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Frames
When the Frames view is selected, the following menu appears when you select and
right-click a blip.

• Alt Number: Used change the image\frame starting number

• Accept Frame: Accept a selected frame.

• Delete Frame: Delete a selected frame.

• Vertically Split Frame: Vertically split a selected frame.

• Horizontally Split Frame: Horizontally split a selected frame.

• Export Frame: Export a selected frame. (Currently not available)

• Preview Window: Turn off or on the preview window at the bottom of the
NextStarPlusAuditor screen.

• Skip Frame: Skips a selected frame without changing the ribbon numbering.

• Index Frame: Used for tagging images for indexing (customer software required)

Images
When the Images view is selected, the following menu appears when you select and
right-click a blip.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 175

 • Set Fixed Size: Allows the user to choose a fixed size from the custom Fixed Sizes
Setup dialog box. The user can also select images from the Auditor window and tag
single, groups or global images\frames using the Set Fixed Size feature.
✔ NOTE

In order for the software to show the Set Fixed Size feature at least one size
must be defined using the Tools\Fixed Frame sizes feature.

• Accept Image: Accept a selected frame.

• Alt Number: Used change the image\frame starting number

• Delete Image: Delete a selected frame.

• Vertically Split Image in Frame: Vertically split the images in a selected frame.

• Horizontally Split Image In Frame: Horizontally split the images in a selected frame.

• Vertically Split Image and frame: Vertically split a selected frame.

• Horizontally Split Image and Frame: Horizontally split a selected frame.

• Export Image: Export a selected frame.

• Output Options: Opens the NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options dialog box for
the selected frame.

• Preview Window: Turn off or on the preview window at the bottom of the
NextStarPlusAuditor screen.

• Skip Frame: Skips a selected frame without changing the ribbon numbering.

• Index Frame: Used for tagging images for indexing (customer software required)

None
When None is selected in the Current View option of the View menu, no menu appears
when you right-click.

File
Click File to open the menu shown in the following figure.

176 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Open
Use this item to bring up the Select a Ribbon dialog box which allows the user to open an
existing ribbon using a pick list. In addition the user can choose the browse button in the
Select a Ribbon dialog box to open a ribbon file that it not found in the pick list.

✔ NOTE

If a ribbon file does not show up the Select a Ribbon Pick list it may no longer be
in the CreateHierarchy management system. For example the ribbon file may
have been deleted in the controller. Another reason why a ribbon may not show
up is if the filter sorting is not set correctly. It is important to know that if a ribbon
is opened outside the NSController it can be audited but must be output
manually. See Chapter 8 Writing Images to Disk for details on how to output
ribbon files manually.

How to Select A Ribbon

After clicking on File\Open the following Select A Ribbon dialog box will come up.

The Select A Ribbon dialog box allows the user to open a ribbon file, choose specific constraints
to sort ribbon files based on the filters and Available Ribbons Columns. It also has a status bar to
indicate if there are any application errors. The following will outline the features found in the
Select A Ribbon dialog box.

✔ NOTE

One of the reasons a ribbon file may not show up in the Available Ribbons pick
list is if the Controller state management system is set to any state other than
Pre-Auditing or Auditing and Closed.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 177

Filters
The Filters allow the user to choose specific constraints used to sort which ribbon files will be
listed for viewing under the Available Ribbons list table. Use the drop-down menu for each item to
select the desired Server, Drive, Job or Batch to sort the ribbon list view.

✔ NOTE

The Job (aka Job ID) and the Batch (aka Batch Name) information are obtained
from the NextStarPlus Capture window and allow the user a way to manage the
ribbons list view. These values can also be referenced in the Auditor’s Output
Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Available Ribbons
The Available Ribbons dialog box displays the available ribbons ready for auditing. The
scroll bar can be moved left to right to view all the available sort options. The current sort
options are: Job, Batch, Ribbon Name, Scan Time Server and Drive. The user can move
any of the column grid lines to customize the desired view. To move a column grid line
simply click on the grid line to the right of the column you want to remove and drag the
line to the left beginning edge of that column until the column you wish to remove is no
longer visible. A red highlight indicates the end of a batch. See example below.

Example: Standard View

Example: Hiding the Batch column View

Example: The last ribbon in a batch is highlight in red.

178 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Legacy Ribbon Support

Once a Ribbon file has been deleted in the NSController application it will no longer show
up in the Available Ribbons list. The Legacy Ribbon Support allows the user to directly
open a ribbon outside the Controller management system.

✔ NOTE

If the ribbon file does not come up the user may need to delete the XML file
associated with it especially if the ribbon was scanned with a previous or later
release. It is also important to know that if a ribbon is opened outside the
Available Ribbons pick list it can be audited but must be output manually. See
Chapter 8 Writing Images to Disk for details on how to output ribbon files
manually.

Options – (Optional Index Software Required – not all releases will have this option avalible)

After clicking on the Setting button the Ribbons Open Options window will come up.

General Settings
Open Read Only
If the open read only check box is marked the end user can only audit ribbons in review
mode. No ribbon changes can be made except for open, close, finish audit or reject
audit. The feature is meant for review purposes only.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 179

Available Ribbon States – (optional)
Use Alternate States
Once a Ribbon has been scanned the software can be set to limit what ribbons an end
user can Audit using the Available Alternate Ribbons State List. If the Use Alternate
States check box is selected the user can choose which ribbon states will be available for
selection in the auditor.

Available Film Types – (Optional)

Once a Ribbon has been scanned the software can be set to limit which ribbons an end
user can Audit based on the film or paper scanned format. For example if the roll option
is highlighted then the end user will not see ribbons microfiche, aperture cards or paper
scanned ribbons.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Fiche Detect dialog box
without saving your changes.

180 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Load Grid Template – (Microfiche Only)
Use the Load Grid Template to bring up saved grid type templates for scanning fixed
locations. Load Grid Template works in conjunction with the Fiche Grid Wizard and is
used to load previously saved templates for capturing grid format type microfiche.

Save
Use this item to save an open ribbon file.

Save Grid Template - (Microfiche Only)

Use the Save Grid Template to save a user defined grid template. Save Grid Template
works in conjunction with the Fiche Grid Wizard. It can also be used to save manually
created microfiche templates. It allows the operator to assign short cut keys to Grid
Templates so they can be quickly and easily accessed as needed for similar projects.
To save the user must click on File, Save Grid Template, type in the Template name
and if desired type in a short cut that will allow quick retrieval of the saved settings.

Existing Templates
The Existing Templates list box displays the current templates available.

How to Save a Grid template:

 Creating a new template
 Click on File\Save Grid Template
 Type in the name in the Template Name text box
 Create a short cut key (optional)

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 181

  Click on Save to over write.

How to over write an existing template:

 Create a new template
 Click on File\Save Grid Template
 Highlight the Grid Template
 Verify the name shows up in the Template name text box
 Create a new short cut key (optional)
 Click on Save to over write.

Shortcut currently used by:

The Shortcut currently used by: displays the current shortcut key for the highlighted
grid template.

New Template
The new template dialog box is where the user can save a new grid template.

Template Name
The Template Name text box is where the user types in the new template name.

Shortcut:
The Shortcut: text box is where the user can change or type in a new shortcut key.

✔ NOTE

The operator can use any combination of letters, numbers, shift and control keys.
The common way to create a short cut key is by using the Alt, Ctrl, and/or Shift
buttons in conjunction with a single letter or number on the keyboard. The
following keys are not available as short cuts F1 or alt + F4

Finish Audit
Use the Finish Audit command when audit of the ribbon is complete. Clicking this option
communicates the ribbons complete status to the NSController. The controller will
change the ribbon state to Completed and will remove it from the pick list. When using
batch scanning for microfiche it will appear grayed out on the last fiche in a batch. See
Chapter 3 NSController for more information.

Finish Batch
The Finish Batch command is used when auditing a batch of ribbons. This feature is
used in conjunction with the batch settings in the NSController, NextStarPlus.exe and
Auditor applications. Clicking on the Finish Batch option communicates that the last fiche
in a batch has been audited and changes the state to pre-outputting in the NSController.
If the batch was marked as “Output Batch As A Whole” the output.exe program will not
start processing until all ribbon files have been audited.

The Finish Batch menu item is normally grayed out. To activate the Finish Batch feature
and allow the operator to mark the end of a batch, the user must properly set up the
batching software parameters. Refer to the following sections below for batch setup
details:

182 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 04 - NSController – Under the Administration “Jobs” and “Batches”
sections.

Chapter 07- Capture for Microfiche - Under “Batch Setup” section

Chapter 08 - Auditor - Under the “Processing a Batch in the Auditor” section

Processing a batch in the Auditor

The following describes how to process a batch in the auditor

1. Click on File Open

2. Sort the Select a Ribbon view to show the desired batch for processing
3. Sort the batch based on ScanTime or preferred order.
4. Begin Auditing the ribbons in a batch.
5. Click on Finish Audit for each ribbon in the batch except the last ribbon. A red
box will appear in the status menu when the last batch in a ribbon has been
opened.

6. The Finish Audit will be grayed out when the last ribbon for a batch is reached
When the last ribbon is done being Audited the user must click on Finish batch to
let the NSController know the batch is ready for processing.

Exit
Use this item to exit the NextStarPlusAuditor software.

Edit
Click Edit to open the menu shown in the following figure.

Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste

The Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste options are not available in this version of NextScan
software.

Use options on the Frame dialog box (which appears when you select and double-click
an image, provided the View > Current Setting > Image option is selected) to perform cut,
copy, and paste operations.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 183

Select All Frames
Use this item to select all of the frames displayed on the Auditor main window.

Mirror
Use this item to reflect the images around a vertical axis. Use this function when images
are reversed or upside down when viewed on the Auditor screen.

Reverse
Use this item to reverse the order of the images on the ribbon. The last image on the
ribbon becomes the first image on the ribbon.

View
Click View to open the menu shown in the following figure.

Toolbar and Status Bar

Menu Tools View

The Toolbar is covered later on in this section under Menu Tools. The following shows
what the toolbar would look like if all options were active.

Left Status Bar View

The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys
to navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions
of toolbar buttons as you press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the
description of the toolbar button command you do not want to execute the command,
release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button.

Right Status Bar View

The right area of the status bar informs the operator if the Caps Lock, Num Lock, or
Scroll Lock buttons are enabled. It will also display the number of frames and images

184 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 that were detected. For ribbon batch scanning (last in batch feature enabled) a red box
will appear at the lower right corner of the status bar to indicate that the user has opened
the last ribbon in the batch.

The right area status display shows which view is currently active (blip, deskew, frame,
image or none). Double clicking on the display will change the view.

Current Overlay
Use this option to select one of the following views of the data: Blips, Deskew, Frames,
Images and None.

 Blips – Will show the blip detection only – User can also create or redefine blips.
 Deskew - Will show the deskew angles of skewed images
 Frames – Will show the Frame where detection takes place
 Images – Will show the Image Data of what will be written to disk
 None – Will not display any bounding boxes
The view you select affects the right-click options. See "Right-click Mouse Commands"
covered later on in this section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 185

NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window
Use this item to bring up the NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window for the currently
selected image. The Preview Window can also be brought up by double-clicking on an
image.

The following control buttons appear at the top of the large single image preview window.

Use this button to scroll to the first image on the ribbon.

Use this button to scroll to the previous image on the ribbon.

Use this button to scroll to the next image on the ribbon.

Use this button to scroll to the last image on the ribbon.

186 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Use this button to display the following Go To Frame dialogue box.

Type the number of the desired frame (in the Frame number field) and image (in the
Image number field), and then click OK to jump to that location. The new frame will
display in the Preview Window and the title bar will show the frame and image number
you specified, as shown in the following figure.

✔ NOTE

Unless the frame contains more than one image such as duplex or multiplex it is
not necessary to type the image number. With simplex or planetary the Go To
Frame image number will default to (0 or 1) and it will not be necessary to
change unless the user horizontally or vertically splits the image (s) inside the
frame (s).

Use these Zoom buttons to enlarge of shrink the displayed image.

Use the Display Scanned Data button to toggle between scanned\output views
of the image.

Use the Setup Output Options button to open the NextStarPlusAuditor

Output Options dialog box.

Use the Output Image button to bring up the Save as dialog box which allows
the user to save an image to disk or browse to an existing image and overwrite it.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 187

 Scroll Bars (Horizontal\Vertical)

When in Zoomed mode use the Horizontal\Vertical scroll bars to position the image view
in the NextScanAuditor Preview Window.

Ribbon Header
Use this item to view ribbon information, including ribbon detection level information.

Click the tabs for each level to see data about that level. The following figure shows a
sample Level 1 Data tab.

188 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Zoom In
Use this item to enlarge the Auditor window.

Zoom Out
Use this item to decrease the Auditor window.

Ribbon Views
Ribbon Review Default View
When the NextStarPlusAuditor window is opened and a ribbon is selected the Ribbon
Default view will display as shown below. In the Ribbon Default display view the user can
scroll through an entire ribbon to QC (quality check) frame detection, image quality and
adjust desired Auditor settings for the project. For more details see Chapter 9 –
NextStarPlus Auditor Software.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 189

Ribbon Review Default Menu

Digital Viewer

Selecting the Digital Viewer from the View Menu or using the short cut Ctrl+H will
change the current display of the entire ribbon to single image\frame view. This feature
can be used for locating and printing a single frame or in conjunction with the Goto blip,
image and frame views for indexing blips using the Alternate Numbering feature. Virtual
Film viewer can be used in conjunction with the Virtual Film index\retrieval database
application covered later in Chapter 12 – NSPlus Index Database Creator which covers
creating the Index Database for searching and retrieving ribbon data.

190 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Digital Viewer with Zoomed In (+) Image

Digital Viewer Showing the Ribbon Search Options

Below shows the database ribbon search options when the “Search Bar” is expanded.
The search bar is located in the upper left hand corner and can be clicked on to toggle
opening and closing the ribbon search options.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 191

Digital Film Viewer Available Keyboard\Mouse Commands and Features
Name Description

The search bar expands and contracts the database ribbon search options
dialog box. The operator can change how the display options operates
Search Bar from the Tools\ Options\ NextstarAuditor Options dialog box under “Ribbon
Search Dialog Options”.

Print\Email\Save Using the Auditor menu the user can Print, Email or write to disk all or a
selected group of images.

When in Zoomed mode use the Horizontal\Vertical scroll bars to position

Scroll Bars
the displayed image\frame view in the NextScanAuditor Preview Window.

Thumbnail Vertical scroll bars at the bottom of the thumbnails used to move the
Scroll Bars thumbnail ribbon location.

Use the +\- keys to Zoom in or out to make the image in the preview
Zoom in\out window smaller or larger. Zoom in (+) will get a close up view and zoom
out (-) will get a reduced sized view.

Fit to Window Fits displayed image\frame to window.

Full Size Displays image\frame to full size.

This button opens the global NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options dialog

Output Options box.

Saves the current Image (s)\Frames (s) selected to the desired directory
Save As via browse option.

NS1, NS2 or The user can run the NS1, NS2 or NS3 NextStarPlusAuditor detection
NS3 methods.

Blackout Automatically will blackout all images detected.

Initial Output This button opens the global NextStarPlusAuditor Initial Output
Numbering Numbering dialog box.

Output Drop down list to choose which output definitions will show up in the
Definition View display Virtual Film view display window.

nd
After detection has been performed the deskew button will run a 2
Deskew deskew over selected images. The user while in deskew view can also
manually adjust the skew angle.

Rotate Rotates displayed image 90 degrees

Mirror Mirrors active ribbon in display,

192 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Name Description

While in the View Goto view, the Goto Dialog box can be used in
Goto View conjunction with the Virtual Film Viewer for displaying a specific image,
frame or for selecting a group of images\frames.

Ribbon Review – (Optional)

Ribbon Review is a customizable feature designed to streamline the QA process. Ribbon
Review is used as a QA/QC inspection tool by the operator. It allows the operator to click
on the next\previous buttons to automatically move to the next section of film to
determine if the ribbon meets quality standards. The sections are evenly spaced points
across the ribbon which can be configured per the project’s requirements. Please
contact your nextScan sales representative for details.

Analog View

Selecting the Analog Viewer from the View Menu or using the short cut Ctrl+N will
change the current display of the entire ribbon to single image\frame with scrolling
capability. This feature includes the ability to scroll through images vertically or
horizontally. It is especially useful with duplex film to flip from one channel view to the

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 193

 opposite channel. It is also useful when searching for a section on the film using the high
speed search or for searching for a particular image\frame using the slow speed
searching capabilities. Analog viewer is also used in conjunction with the Virtual Film
index\retrieval database application covered later in Chapter 12 – NSPlus Index
Database Creator which covers creating the Index Database for searching and retrieving
ribbon data.

Analog Viewer Zoomed Out (-) View

Analog with Index Search

194 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Analog Viewer Available Keyboard\Mouse Commands and Features
Name Description

The light blue background within the display indicates the ribbon’s
boundaries where there is no more ribbon data beyond this area. This is
especially useful to let the end user know when they have reached the start
or end of a ribbon.
Background
Color

A black or white background indicates ribbon data. Below example shows

black background which indicates ribbon data.

Ribbon Color
(black or white)

Mouse Scroll Use the mouse scroll roller to move the ribbon location forward or
Roller backwards.

When the viewer is scrolling through images clicking the left arrow key in
Stop Scroll the display area or moving the scroll roller in the opposite direction will
cause scrolling to stop.

Stop scrolling: Clicking down the left mouse arrow key in the display area
will stop scrolling.

Mouse Change Direction: Clicking plus holding down the left mouse arrow key in
the display area while dragging the mouse in the opposite direction, can be
used to change the direction of the ribbon (forwards\backwards or
left\right).

Up\Down Arrow Use the keyboard up\down arrow keys to scroll ribbon when in vertical
Keys view.

Left\Right Arrow Use the keyboard left\right arrow keys to scroll ribbon when in horizontal
Keys view.

Cap Lock + R Rotates the ribbon view clockwise

Shift+R Rotates the ribbon view counter clockwise.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 195

 Name Description

Mirrors current ribbon view vertically.

Before After
M

Mirrors current ribbon view horizontally.

Before After
Shift+M

Print\Email\Save Using the Auditor menu the user can Print, Email or write to disk all or a
selected group of images.
When in Zoomed mode use the Horizontal\Vertical scroll bars to position
Scroll Bars
the displayed image\frame view in the NextScanAuditor Preview Window.

Thumbnail Vertical scroll bars at the bottom of the thumbnails used to move the ribbon
Scroll Bars thumbnail view location.

Use the +\- keys to Zoom in or out to making the image in the preview
Zoom in\out window smaller or larger.

This button opens the global NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options dialog

Output Options
box.

Saves the current Image (s)\Frames (s) selected to the desired directory
Save As via browse option.

Rotate Rotates displayed image 90 degrees

Mirror Mirrors active ribbon in display.

While in the View Goto view, the Goto Dialog box can be used in
Goto View conjunction with the Analog Film viewer for displaying a specific image,
frame or for selecting a group of images\frames.

Quick Image
Selecting the Quick Image from the View Menu will display the Quick Image Dialog Box.
This feature gives the users quick access to settings where the user can make changes
to improve the image quality of an individual image. The default settings quick image will

196 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 begin with are the settings applied at scan time. This option is only available when the
Digital Viewer option is selected.

✔ NOTE

Quick Image starts with the default settings selected at scan time. The Quick
Image settings are used to quickly apply image enhancements to an individual
image but it will not apply settings globally. Once the user selects an image and
makes any changes the original scanned default settings or previously modified
settings will be overwritten.

Ribbon Settings

Rotate
Allows the user to rotate the image clockwise.

Mirror
Allows the user to flip the image face down or face up.

Enhancements

Filter Drop Down Arrow

Allows the user to select a different filter size (3x3, 5x5 or 7x7) and adjust the
filter sensitivity between 0-80.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 197

 Contrast Scroll Bar
Allows the user to darken or lighten the grayscale contrast of the
foreground or background pixel levels. Moving the scroll bar to the left
(Negative values from -1000 to -1) will darken the foreground pixels
Moving the scroll bar to the right (positive values from 1 to 1000) will
lighten the background pixels.

Bright
Allows the user to adjust the overall grayscale brightness to darken all
pixels or lighten all pixels. It simulates the effects of increasing or
decreasing the lamp. Moving the scroll bar to the left (Negative values
from -1000 to -1) will darken all pixel levels. Moving the scroll bar to the
right (positive values from 1 to 1000) will lighten all pixel levels.

✔ NOTE

If the Contrast and Brightness settings are grayed out this would indicate that the
image selected was originally scanned or up as bitonal and can only be changed
by right mouse clicking on the individual image to change settings. This prevents
end user from changing preprogrammed default settings.

Bitonal
The Bitonal allows the user to select AutoTheshold Basic, Bitonal Threshold or Auto
Threshold options based on desired results. The Bitonal settings default to 128 and the
AutoThreshold settings defaults to Normal density 30.

✔ NOTE

If the bitonal settings are grayed out then the image selected was originally set
up as grayscale and can only be changed by right mouse clicking on the
individual image to change settings. This prevents end user from changing
preprogrammed default settings.

Memory Presets Buttons (1, 2 and 3)

The Memory 1, 2 and 3 Preset buttons allow the user to save adjusted settings that can
be applied to other images or the settings can be used to compare how different settings
will look when applied to the same image. For example: After adjusting the Image Quality
parameters to the desired settings for an image the user can click on one of the Preset
(1, 2 or 3) buttons and hold it down for 3 seconds to save the settings to the selected
button.

198 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Goto View
The Goto Dialog box is used in conjunction with the Virtual Film Digital Viewer and is used for
locating a specific image\frame\blip or for selecting a group images\frames\blips to view in a
specific order as required.

Name Description

When the blip check box is enabled the software searches for
images by the blip type and number. The user must type in the
values based on the blip hierarchy and separate each by a (.). See
example below:

Blip

It can also search based on Volume and Custom Blips and will depend on
how they are ordered in the naming scheme.

Goto Button Once the user types in a value inside the Search text box clicking
on the Goto button will start the search.

* Asterisk use to Select All blip levels, image or frame numbers

Search . Period used to separate blip levels, image or image numbers
Commands
x Upper or lower case x used to exclude a blip level, image or frame

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 199

 Name Description

The Search Text Box is used for finding a single or group of

blipped and non blipped images or frames. Note it will only search
for blipped images\frames if the blip checkbox is marked.
No Blips - How to search for a single Frame or Image
Type in the Image\Frame Number and click on the Goto Button.

No Blips - How to search for a group of Frames or Images in a range

Type in the Image\Frame Starting number and ending number and
separate them with a dash.

Two Level Blip - How to search for a single page within a document
blip
Typing in 3.2 will go to Document #3 page #2.

Two-Level Blip - How to search for all images in a document

Typing in 3.* will go to document #3 page #2. Since the .* was
used the range of images inside Document 3 will be highlighted
Search Text allowing the user to select the Next\Previous buttons to view each
Box page in document group.

Two Level Blip - How to search for all documents in a ribbon

Typing in *.1 this will select every document and every page #1
(which is the first document page). All the documents in the ribbon
will be highlighted allowing the user to select the Next\Previous
buttons to view each document. This is a useful search when the
operator wants to index each document using the alternate
numbering feature or to review blip detection accuracy.

Three-Level Blip - How to search for all images in a Folder

Typing in 3.*x.* will go to Folder #3, exclude all document pages
and highlight all pages. Since the *x was used to excluded
documents, the page range of images inside folder 3 will be
highlighted allowing the user to select the Next\Previous buttons to
view each page in folder group.

200 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Name Description

Three Level Blip - How to search for all folders in a ribbon

Typing in *.*x.*x this will select every folder and exclude all
document including non folder pages. All the folders in the ribbon
will be highlighted allowing the user to select the Next\Previous
Search Text buttons to view each folders 1st page. This is a useful search when
Box con’t the operator wants to index each folder using the alternate
numbering feature or to review blip detection accuracy.

Once a search range has been typed in the Search Text Box the
Previous and Next buttons allow the user to go to the next or
Previous\Next
previous frame\image.

Previous Next
The next\previous buttons allow the user to go to the next or previous image and will only
be active when more than one image within the ribbon has been highlighted.

Tools
Click Tools to open the menu shown in the following figure.

Tools (menu views)

The Tools View menu views varies, depending on the view that you have selected in the
Current View setting of the View menu (Blips, Deskew, Frames, Images, or None).

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 201

Blips View
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Blips.

Deskew View
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Deskew.

202 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Frames View
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Frames.

Images View
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Images.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 203

None View
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
None.

✔ NOTE
The descriptions below follow the options on the Tools menu when the View >
Current View setting is Frames.

Administration
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Blips, Deskew, Image, Frame or None. The Administration arrow will bring up the Batch
Administration options. Note the options may be grayed out if the user does not have
administrative rights to change batch information.

Frame Detection
The following figure shows the Tools menu when the View > Current View setting is
Blips, Deskew, Image, Frame or None. The Frame Detection arrow will bring up the
NS1, NS2 or NS3 detection options.

204 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Blackout
Click Blackout to black out all of the images that the application detected or segmented.
Images that were not blacked out may require further processing or enhancement. The
following illustration shows blacked-out images, revealing an image not detected in the
second row that needs to be processed.

To return to normal view, click Tools > Blackout again or Cntrl+Shift+B.

Initial Output Numbering

The Initial Output Numbering is used for customizing the starting number of a Naming
variable. The available options are classified as counter variables. For more details see
Page 240 – Initial Output Numbering

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 205

Alt Number
The Alt Number feature is used to change the starting number for a blipped image\frame.
Normally blips are output in sequential order starting at either 0 or 1 depending on the
user’s preference. For more details see page 163.

Blip Name
The Blip Name feature is used to add an Alpha\Numeric name starting for a blipped
image\frame. Normally blips are output in sequential order starting at either 0 or 1 so this
feature now adds the ability to use text including numeric values.

Merge Frame(s)
Use this item to merge two or more frames together.

Vertically Split Frames (s)

Use this item to split a frame on the vertical axis.

Horizontally Split Frame (s)

Use this item to split a frame on the horizontal axis.

Fiche Grid Wizard – (Microfiche Only)

This option applies only to microfiche images. Use the Fiche Grid Wizard to walk you
through setting up a grid template for defining fixed locations on grid format type
microfiche. i.e. COM (Computer Output Microfilm), Step & Repeat, AB DICK etc. After
the Fiche Grid Wizard has been configured the user will then draw a grid template over
one of the selected rows.

206 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

How to Configure the Fiche Grid Wizard for All Rows
1. From the desk top click on the Fiche Grid Wizard Button

- OR -

From the Auditor’s menu click on Tools and select the Fiche Grid Wizard
option.

The following Fiche Grid Wizard dialog box pops up.

2. Type in the number of columns under the Column Count Text Box

3. Pick a row to use for drawing a row template. Using the left mouse
button, click down on the upper left corner of the first image in the row
and hold. While still holding the mouse down, drag the curser to the
lower right hand corner of the last image in the row and let go. Once
finished the Fiche Grid Wizard will draw a template with evenly fixed
segments based on the Column Count and the manually drawn points
drawn.

4. Verify the template for the row is aligned over the images evenly without
remainders. If there are remainders adjust the left or right handles of the
template until the template is evenly aligned over the images.

Example:

Row Not aligned

Row Aligned

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 207

 5. Click OK on the Fiche Grid Wizard dialog box. The software will
automatically create the grid template over all the defined Row (s) and
Column (s). Verify that the template aligns over each row as shown in
the example below. If not make the necessary adjustments to align the
template horizontally or vertically so that it captures every frame
accurately.

6. Once the template has been created use the Save Grid Template for
saving and\or creating shortcut keys which can be used to recall the
template later during the setup process. A saved template can also be
selected by the end user in the Capture Preferences window. For more
details see Save Grid Template listed earlier in this section and Chapter
6 or 7 Capture for Roll Film\Microfiche under the Preferences section.

How to Configure the Fiche Grid Wizard for a Single or Selected Rows
1. From the desk top click on the Fiche Grid Wizard Button.

-OR -

From the Auditor’s menu click on Tools and select the Fiche Grid Wizard
option.

The following Fiche Grid Wizard dialog box pops up.

208 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 2. Type in the number of columns under the Column Count Text Box

3. Click on the Specific Rows radio button

4. Under the Selected scroll box highlight the rows you do not want to
create a template for.

5. Click on the left arrow to move the selected rows to the Available list box.

6. Pick a row to use for drawing a row template. Using the left mouse
button, click down on the upper left corner of the first image in the row
and hold. While still holding the mouse down, drag the curser to the
lower right hand corner of the last image in the row and let go. Once
finished the Fiche Grid Wizard will draw a template with evenly fixed
segments based on the Column Count and the manually drawn points
drawn.

7. Verify the template for the row is aligned over the images evenly without
remainders. If there are remainders adjust the left or right handles of the
template until the template is evenly aligned over the images.

Example:

Row Not aligned

Row Aligned

8. Click OK on the Fiche Grid Wizard dialog box. The software will
automatically create the grid template over all the defined Row (s) and
Column (s) selected. Verify that the template aligns over each row as
shown in the example below. If not make the necessary adjustments to
align the template horizontally or vertically so that it captures every frame
accurately.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 209

 9. Once the template has been created use the Save Grid Template for
saving and\or creating shortcut keys which can be used to recall the
template later during the setup process. A saved template can also be
selected by the end user in the Capture Preferences window. For more
details see Save Grid Template listed earlier in this section and Chapter
6 or 7 Capture for Roll Film\Microfiche under the Preferences section.

How to Deskew a Row in a Grid template.

Once a Grid template has been created the end user can deskew an entire row within the
Grid Template. The following explains how:

1. From the Auditor’s menu click on View\Current View and select the Deskew
view option.
OR
Type in Ctrl+Shift+Q to view the images in Deskew view.

2. From the desk top click on the Deskew Single Row Wizard Button.

3. Pick the desired row to use for drawing the deskew angle. Using the left
mouse button, click down on the upper left corner of the first image in the row
and hold. While still holding the mouse down, drag the curser to the upper
right hand corner of the last image in the row and let go. Once finished, the
Single Row Wizard will display the skew angle of each image in the template.

4. Verify the skew angle is accurate and perform the following:

a. If the changes are not acceptable, click on the Cancel Deskew Row
changes button and start over at step 2.

b. If the changes are acceptable, click on the Accept Deskew Row

Changes button and repeat steps 2 for each row.

How to Deskew All Rows in a Grid template.

Once a Grid template has been created the end user can deskew all rows within the Grid
Template. This is especially useful if all rows have the same angle of skew. The
following explains how:

1. From the Auditor’s menu click on View\Current View and select the Deskew
view option.
OR
Type in Ctrl+Shift+Q to view the images in Deskew view.

5. From the desk top click on the Deskew All Row Wizard Button.

6. Pick the desired row to use for drawing the deskew angle. Using the left
mouse button, click down on the upper left corner of the first image in the row
and hold. While still holding the mouse down, drag the curser to the upper
right hand corner of the last image in the row and let go. Once finished, the
All Row Wizard will display the skew angle for each row in the template.

7. Verify the skew angle is accurate and perform the following:

a. If the changes are not acceptable, click on the Cancel Deskew All
Row changes button and start over at step 2.

210 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 b. If the changes are acceptable, click on the Accept Deskew All Row
Changes button and repeat steps 2 for each row.

How to Deskew Using Deskew view

Once a Grid template has been created the end user can deskew an entire row within the
Grid Template. This is useful if the angle is less than 20% and all rows\images have the
same skew angle. The following explains how:

1. From the Auditor’s menu click on View\Current View and select the Deskew
view option.
OR
Type in Ctrl+Shift+Q to view the images in Deskew view.
2. Use the + (zoom) to bring the ribbon up to a close up view.

3. While in the deskew view click on Cntl+A to select all frames

4. Hold the Cntl+shift key down

5. Scroll to the center of the ribbon and click on an image while continuing to
hold the Cntl+shift Key down

6. Move the image until the angle matches the angle of the skewed image. This
is done by grabbing the lower left corner of the green box and moving it
left\right until it matches the same angle of the image. See picture below
showing the before and after angle of green so it matches the skew angle of
the image.

7. Verify the skew angle and if the changes are not acceptable perform the
following:

a. Apply the grid detection and start over from Step 2.

b. Highlight a single row of images and follow steps starting at Step 4. If

this works better try the same for the reminding rows.

c. Use the Deskew Single or All Rows features.

Apply To
The Apply To gives the options for applying the grid template to All Rows or Specific
Rows within the microfiche. The Available shows the available rows that can be used to
create the template. Selected shows what rows the grid template will be applied to.

Column Option
The Column Option will determine the number of columns the fiche grid will have based
on the number typed in the Column Count text box.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 211

Options
Use this item to set the NextStarPlus Auditor Options.

Minimum Frame Size: Height/Width

This setting sets the size limitations in pixels for the Manual Frame Drawing function.

Preview Window Displays: Scanned Data/Output Data

Select Scanned Data to preview the original image in grayscale. Select Output Data to
preview the image with user defined settings.

Default Naming Options

The default radio button allows you to choose between naming the images starting with 0
or 1 as a default.

Finish Audit
The Finish Audit allows the user to choose between the following automatic ribbon
processing options:

Finish Audit Options Description

Goes To The Next After clicking on Finish Audit the Auditor will automatically bring up
Ribbon the next ribbons.

Always Saves After clicking on, Finish Audit the Auditor will automatically save
changes without prompting.

212 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Default Image Output Directory
The default Image Output text box allows you to change the default location where the
ribbon files will be scanned to. The default is set to c:\temp. These setting are especially
useful if the operator forgot to type in a desired location.

Frame Expand/Contract Size

Use the setting to sets the amount of over scan space (padding) at the top and bottom of
the frame.

Select the Unique Top/Bottom check box to customize the top and bottom sides of the
frame.

Select Unique Left/Right check box to customize the left and right sides of the frame.

Image Expand/Contract Size

Use the setting to set the amount of over scan space (padding) at the top and bottom of
the image.

Select the Unique Top/Bottom check box to customize the top and bottom sides of the
image.

Select Unique Left/Right check box to customize the left and right sides of the image.

Frame Data Parsing (Shrink Frames)

Use this setting to shrink the frame size to match the image frame size.

Empty Batch ID
The Empty Batch ID feature is used for automatically prompting the user to add the
Batch ID if one was not typed in during the Capture process. To enable mark the Prompt
to Change check box. See Administration later on in this section for more details on the
Ribbons Administration dialog box used to change the Batch ID.

Ribbon Search Dialog Options

The Ribbons Search Dialog Options allow the user to change how the database ribbon
search dialog box opens. The user can check mark either or both options depending on
preference. The ‘‘Show the Ribbon Search On Application Start” will automatically bring
up the Ribbon search dialog box when the Auditor is opened. The “Show the Ribbon
Search on Ribbon Close” will automatically open the Ribbon search options so the user
can search for the next ribbon without having to click on the search bar to expand the
ribbon search.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 213

Default Index Output Settings
The default Index Output text boxes allows you to change the default Index Output
Settings. These settings are especially useful if the operator forgot to type the desired
Index Output Settings.

 Index Name Format – The default name used to create the ASCII index text file.

 Index Record Format - The default variables that will be written to the ASCII
index text file.

 Enable Index Output - This check box enables the application to create an index
name and record. See Naming covered later on in this section under Output
Options for additional details.

Add Image Options

The Add Image Options allows the user to select the Always Adds To New Frame
check box. When this box is checked the software will automatically accept a new drawn
box as a frame and will not prompt the options for adding a new frame or adding to the
exiting frame popup as shown in example below:

Open Dialog Options

The Open Dialog Options allows the user to select how many images will be displayed when
opening the Select A Ribbon Dialog box.

214 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Setup
Clicking on the Setup allows the user to bring up the Ribbon Open Options setup window. The
Ribbon Open Options feature is used to change which ribbons will be available when the Auditor
“Select A Ribbons” list is opened. The end user does this by choosing limits based on the ribbon
states and media type.

General Settings
When the Open Read Only check box is marked the user can only view the ribbons but
cannot make any changes.

Available Ribbon States

The Use Alternative States check box when enables allows the user to change which
ribbons are available to view based on other states. The default state is Pre-Auditing.

For more information on the ribbon states see Chapter 5 - NSController: NextStarPlus
Ribbons Current States or Available User Ribbon States where the user can create new
custom states to add to the Alternate States list.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 215

Available Ribbon States

The Available Film Types allows the user to select which media scanned will be available
for auditing.

Media Option Description

Roll When the Roll option is highlighted the user will only be able to
open roll film scanned ribbons in the Auditor.

Fiche When the Fiche option is highlighted the user will only be able to
open fiche scanned ribbons in the Auditor.
Paper When the Paper option is highlighted the user will only be able
to open paper scanned ribbons in the Auditor.
When the Roll and Fiche options are highlighted the user will
Roll and Fiche only be able to open roll film or microfiche scanned ribbons in
the Auditor.
When the Fiche and Paper options are highlighted the user will
Fiche and Paper only be able to open microfiche and paper scanned ribbons in
the Auditor
Roll, Fiche and When the Roll, Fiche and Paper options are highlighted the user
Paper will be able to open roll film, microfiche and paper scanned
ribbons in the Auditor.

Initial Output Numbers

The Initial Output Numbers dialog box allows the user to choose which values in the
Initial Output Numbering window can be edited.

Example:

If only the Document Blip number is highlighted as shown below the end user can only
modify this value in the Initial Output Numbering window. Notice how all the other values
will be grayed out. This helps to prevent the end user from accidentally typing data in the
wrong text box.

216 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Ribbon Search Dialog Options
The Ribbon Search Dialog Options are used to change how ribbon index display expands
when opening or closing a ribbon. These options are only used with Virtual Film index:

Ribbon Search Options Description

Show Ribbon Search On

Application Start When the Auditor opened it will expand the index dialog box.

Show Ribbon Search On

Ribbon Close When a ribbon is closed it will expand the ribbon index dialog.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Options dialog box without
saving your changes.

Output Options
Click Tools, and then click Output Options to open the NextStarPlusAuditor Output
Options dialog box. Double clicking on an image will also bring up the
NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options dialog box.

The NextStarPlus Auditor Output Options includes many processing features. For
information about using the output features and configuration see: Configuring Your
Output and Naming Options later on in this section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 217

Frame Expander
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Frames.

To use, press Ctrl-Alt-E to expand the selected frame or frames. The frame (s) will
expand (increase the amount of pixels) based on the values entered for frame padding in
the Tools\Options dialog window. For more details on selecting frames see Selecting
Frames\Images at the beginning of this chapter.

Frame Contractor
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Frames.

To use, press Ctrl-Alt-C to contract the selected frame or frames. The frame (s) will
contract (decrease the amount of pixels) based on the values entered for frame padding
in the Tools\Options dialog window. For more details on selecting frames see Selecting
Frames\Images at the beginning of this chapter.

Image Expander
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Images.

To use, press Ctrl-Alt-E to expand the selected image or images. The image (s) will
expand (increase the amount of pixels) based on the values entered for image padding in
the Tools\Options dialog window. For more details on selecting frames see Selecting
Frames\Images at the beginning of this chapter.

Image Contractor
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Images.

To use, press Ctrl-Alt-C to expand the selected image or images. The image (s) will
contract (decrease the amount of pixels) based on the values entered for image padding
in the Tools\Options dialog window. For more details on selecting frames see Selecting
Frames\Images at the beginning of this chapter.

Grid Templates – (Microfiche Only)

This option is available on the Tools menu. The Grid Templates allows the user to
manage saved grid templates and create shortcut keys for easily importing the saved
Grid Templates to the active ribbon file.

218 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Existing Grid Template Shortcuts Matrix

Name Description

Existing Template
Lists the Available templates and the assigned shortcut.
Shortcut

Shortcut: Displays the shortcut keys for the highlighted template.

Shortcut currently
Displays the shortcut of the highlighted template.
used by:

Delete Deletes the current template and puts it back in the Available
Templates list box.

Save Allows the user to save a new shortcut key.

Available Templates Matrix

Name Description

Available Templates Lists the Available templates that do not have a shortcut key assigned.

Allows the user to type in a shortcut key for the highlighted available
Shortcut:
template.

Shortcut currently Displays the name of the template that is using the shortcut if the user
used by: types in a short cut that is already being used by another template.

Add Adds the highlighted template to the Existing Template Shortcuts List

Delete Deletes the highlighted Available Template from the list.

Output Templates
This option is available on the Tools menu. The Output Templates allows the user to
manage saved Output Templates and create shortcut keys for easily importing the saved
Output Templates to the active ribbon file. The following diagram shows the Output
Template Dialog Box.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 219

 Existing Output Template Shortcuts Matrix

Name Description

Existing Template
Lists the Available templates and the assigned shortcut.
Shortcut

Shortcut: Displays the shortcut keys for the highlighted template.

Shortcut currently
Displays the shortcut of the highlighted template.
used by:

Delete Deletes the current template and puts it back in the Available
Templates list box.

Save Allows the user to save a new shortcut key.

Available Templates Matrix

Name Description

Available Templates Lists the Available templates that do not have a shortcut key assigned.

Allows the user to type in a shortcut key for the highlighted available
Shortcut:
template.

Shortcut currently Displays the name of the template that is using the shortcut if the user
used by: types in a short cut that is already being used by another template.

Add Adds the highlighted template to the Existing Template Shortcuts List

Delete Deletes the highlighted Available Template from the list.

Accept Frame
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Frames. This feature is used when auditing ribbons that have been detected
using the NS2 detection method.

To use, click on Accept Frame to accept selected frames. The confidence level for the
accepted frames will change to blue which is the highest confidence level. This is
especially helpful as a reference when performing an audit where the operator can focus
on frames that have a lower confidence level such as yellow or red.

Accept Image
This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Images. This feature is used when auditing ribbons that have been detected
using the NS2 detection method.

220 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 To use, click Accept Image to accept selected images. The confidence level for the
accepted images will change to blue which is the highest confidence level. This is
especially helpful as a reference when performing an audit where the operator can focus
on images that have a lower confidence level such as yellow or red.

Delete Frame (s)

This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Frames.

Click Delete Frame to delete a selected frame.

When you delete a frame, everything within that frame is deleted and it will no longer be
written to disk and the auditor will automatically re-order the frame count.

Delete Image (s)

This option is available on the Tools menu when the Current View setting in the View
menu is Images.

Click Delete Image to delete a selected frame.

When you delete an image, it will no longer be written to disk and the auditor will
automatically re-order the image and frame count to reflect the deleted image(s).

Fixed Frame Size Setup

This option is available on the Tools menu for all Current View mode settings.

Use this item to set and save a standard or a custom fixed size which can be applied to
all frames\single or selected images. It is especially useful when all the documents are of
the same size and horizontal\vertical placement. This feature is also used in conjunction
with the NS2 detection method under Frame Sizing which will be covered later on in this
section.

✔ NOTE

This feature is for setting a fixed size box around the images. It cannot be used
to scale or change the image document size. If the images are smaller or larger
than the fixed size box due to the reduction ratio or document scan size, the
operator may need to adjust the Height or Width to compensate. For information
on scaling the dpi or document size see Scaling under Configuring Your Output
Processing Options covered later on in this section.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 221

Existing Sizes
The Existing Sizes displays the available list of preset sizes saved by the user that can be
accessed from the NS2 setup window. For more details see NS2, Available Fixed Frame Sizes
drop down list covered later on in this section.

The following explains each parameter under the Existing Sizes dialog box.

Existing Sizes
Description
Feature

The Preset Size is a saved height\width dimension. To Edit, Delete or

Save changes to a Preset Size follow these steps:
Preset Size  Click on the desired Preset Size from the Existing Sizes list
 View the Height\Width text boxes located below the Existing Sizes
List

Delete Allows the user to Delete an existing size

Edit Allows the user to change the Height and Width of an existing size

Save Allows the user to accept changes made after clicking on edit

Height\Width Text
Allows the user to change the Height or Width after clicking on edit.
Box

Units Allows the user to view the Height\Width in inches or centimeters

Add New Size

Use the Add New Size to create a custom or standard preset size under the Existing
Sizes display list.
The following explains each parameter under the Add New Size dialog box.

Add New Size

Description
Feature

Name Allows the user to type in a name for the new preset size.

Height\Width Text The Height\Width text boxes are used to type in the new preset
Box height\width dimensions.

Allows the user to change the units for Height and Width to inches or
Units
centimeters.

The Add button will accept changes and add the new preset size to
Add
the Existing Size list.

222 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Tagging Frames\Images with a Set Fixed Size
See the following instructions on how to select a single, group or all frames\images in
order to tag them with a Set Fixed Size.

How to apply Fixed Size to a single Image\Frame.

While holding down the Ctrl key, click the image you want to select.

Now, right mouse click on the highlighted image\frame and choose the Set Fixed Size
option to select the desired Fixed Size.

How to select a single frame\image

Hold the mouse down where you want to start (just before the frame starts) and hold
down the Ctrl key at the same time. Drag the mouse over the image you want to
highlight.

Now, while the images are highlighted right mouse and select the fixed page size options.
Next, choose the desired size.

How to select random frames\images

While holding down the Ctrl key, click the images you want to select.

Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the frames as a unit.

How to select all frames\images

Click File, and select All. Or, simultaneously, press Ctrl and A on the keyboard.

Now, while holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, you can move the frames as a unit.

OK\Cancel
Click OK to save your settings, or click Cancel to exit the Options dialog box without
saving your changes.

Skip Blip or Frame

The Skip Blip and Skip frame options are available on the Tools menu when the Current
View setting in the View menu is in the Blips, Deskew, Frames or Images.

When you use the Skip Blip or Skip Frame feature, everything within the image and
frame will not be written to disk. The Auditor software will not re-order the original number
count as it does when a blip, frame or image is deleted. This feature is especially useful
when scanning COM microfiche where the user wishes to maintain the row and column
numbering of each frame without re-ordering the count due to skipping frames or images.

To use, click on Skip Blip or Skip Frame to skip a selected blip, frame or image. The user
can also right mouse click on a blip, frame or image to bring up the drop down menu and
select the Skip Blip or Skip Frame option.

✔ NOTE

In the case of Duplex or Multiplex film, if there are images inside the frame that
the user does not want skipped the Frame must be split (horizontally or vertically)
to create independent frames for each image.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 223

Index Image (s)or Frame (s)- Optional
The Index Image (s) or Frame (s) option allows the end user to tag images or frames so
they are marked for manual indexing. When an image it tagged it will show a sign wave
inside the image or frame as shown below.

Image Notes - Optional

The Image Notes option allows the end user to add a text (alpha numeric) notation that
will be appended to the bottom of the image so that it may be used later as a reference.

Example showing a zoomed in image saved using the Image Notes option:

224 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Administration
The Administration brings up the NSController Job, Batch and Ribbon Administration
dialog boxes which the user can adjust from the Auditor application.

Job Administration
The Job Administration allows the operator to control the Batch Output Ordering. This is
especially useful if the batches were scanned out of order during the Capture process.

How to Edit
- click on the Edit\Save toggle button
- use the Up\Down buttons to re-order the batches

How to Save Changes

- click on Save
- click on OK

How to Reject Changes

- click on Cancel
- click on OK

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 225

Batch Administration
The Batch Administration allows the operator to control the Ribbon Output Ordering and check
the Output Batch As a Whole option. This feature is especially useful if the ribbons were scanned
out of order during the Capture process and easy access to the Output Batch As A Whole feature
(See Chapter 3 NSController for more details on Output Batch As A Whole).

How to Edit
- Click on the Edit\Save toggle button
- Use the Up\Down buttons to re-order the ribbons.
- Check the Output Batch as a Whole check box (Optional).
How to Save changes
- Click on Save
- Click on OK
How to Reject changes
- Click on Cancel
- Click on OK

Ribbons Administration
The Ribbons Administration allows the operator to change the Batch ID name. This is
especially useful if the Batch ID name was misspelled or the wrong was typed in.

How to change
- Click on the Edit\Save toggle button
- Type in the new Batch ID in the Batch ID text box

226 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 How to Save changes
- Click on Save
- Click on OK
How to Reject changes
- Click on Cancel
- Click on OK

Index Entry Administration

The Index Entry Administration allows the operator to review, change or modify the films current
index data. This feature is currently available for Virtual Film scanning and may be grayed out if
the user does not have administrative rights to change the index information.

How to change
- Click on the entry you want to change so it is displayed in the
Index Entry Data fields at the top of the dialog box.
- Manually edit the desired edit\text boxes to change the entry
- Click on Add
- Verify the new entry was added. Follow steps to remove the old
entry.
How to add new Index
- Type in new the desired data in the available index text\edit
boxes
- Click on Add
- Verify the new entry was added.
How to delete
- Double Right click on the desired column until it is highlighted
- Select the Delete option
- Verify entry was removed

Processing a Batch in the Auditor

The following describes how to process a batch in the auditor

1. Click on File Open

2. Sort the Select a Ribbon view to show the desired batch for processing
3. Sort the batch based on ScanTime or preferred order.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 227

 4. Begin auditing the ribbons in a batch.
5. Click on Finish Audit for each ribbon in the batch except the last ribbon. A red
box will appear in the status menu when the last batch in a ribbon has been
opened.

6. The Finish Audit will be grayed out when the last ribbon for a batch is reached
When the last ribbon is done being Audited click on Finish batch.

Frame Detection
Use the Frame Detection drop down menu to choose between NS1, NS2 and NS3
detection methods. Both methods are used for detecting frames or images within a ribbon
file. The user can fine-tune the detection setup parameters or create custom setups for
specific types of film. The following sections describe both detect methods in detail.

NS1
The NS1 is the NextStarPlusAuditor’s standard detection method. Use these parameters
to detect standard duplex and simplex microfilm. NS1 is not useful for microfilm such as
special duplex, cutting long pages, skewed images or for numbering multi-level blipped
microfilm. The standard NS1 default parameters can handle a wide variety of microfilm
and can be customize for specific film detection needs.

When you select NS1 detect in the Tool menu under Frame Detection, the NSDetect
Configuration dialog box appears.

General Options

Refresh List Button

Clicking on the Refresh List Button updates changes made to the current NS1 detection
setup parameters. The changes are also automatically available to the Capture and
Auditing stations using the same NS1 detection setup.

228 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Configuration Name
The configuration name allows you to save NS1 detection setup parameters so that they
can be recalled later. It allows you to have multiple setups that you can switch between.

Ribbon Level
Use the Ribbon Level drop-down menu to select the ribbon level setting, 0 to 6.

Threshold Adjust
The Threshold Adjust is a software algorithm used to determine where the most
contrast occurs vertically (left to right) in order to define the transition between image
(white) and gaps (black). The default setting is 1. If the software is not detecting the
edges of documents accurately, then you can change the threshold adjust value to trigger
detection at a higher level than is calculated by the software. The value can be adjusted
between 2-200.

Horizontal Detection Type

The Horizontal Detection Type gives the user a choice between using Horizontal
Standard, Horizontal Variance and Horizontal All. This gives users more detection
flexibility especially with difficult film.

Use the drop-down menu to select the Horizontal Detection Type:

 Horizontal All: This default method of running frame detection for locating the
top and bottom borders of frames runs a couple of different techniques. The two
techniques are Standard and Variance which the results from both are compared
and the one with the highest confidence is used for detection. This is best
detection to capture high quality consistent source images. It is also the fastest
NS1 detection method because it runs both operations on the same data and
most of the detection time is the amount of time it takes to read the data from
disk.
 Horizontal Standard: This detection method normalizes the threshold value
used to detect the frames right and left borders for use in detecting top and
bottom borders. Additionally the background profile is subtracted from the
detected profile in an effort to remove possible horizontal stripe noise. This
background is calculated to be an average of the section of the ribbon between
the current strip of ribbon and the ribbon strip in which the frames were detected.
Horizontal Standard by itself is faster than Horizontal Variance by itself.
 Horizontal Variance: This detection calculates the standard deviation profile for
this section of the ribbon and uses the first peak Histogram thresholding
technique to detect top and bottom borders. Use this setting if the source images
have a range of sizes or quality. The software searches aggressively for frames,
running several passes via different types of detection algorithms to locate the
edges. Variance by itself will take twice as long as running standard.
✔ NOTE
Which detection works best depends on the film format and quality of the film,
such as how much noise there is between images. Standard does a number of
operations to minimize the effects of noise which is sometimes too aggressive.
Variance does a better job finding the frame edges and variances between
frames. The final vote between the two detection types is in its simplest terms
which ever finds the most accurate frame detection wins.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 229

Frame Sizing

Minimum Frame Width

In the Minimum Frame Width field, type a minimum frame width and\or height. This
measurement is in pixels. Any image under the typed in value will be ignored.

Tip: If, after detection has occurred, there are a lot of vertically split images, try
increasing the Threshold Percent value to improve detection accuracy.

OK
Click OK to save your settings and run the current detection setup.

Cancel
Click Cancel to exit the NS2 dialog box without saving your changes.

Save As
Click Save As to save your settings and type in a unique name for the current setup.
The Saved settings can be recalled later or selected in the NextStarPlus Capture
Preferences dialog box to be used in place of the default detect settings.

NS2
The NS2 is the NextStarPlusAuditor’s advance detection parameters. Use these
parameters to detect duplex, blipped, and nonstandard microfilm when frame detection is
difficult using the standard NS1Detect Configuration Parameters. The standard NS2
default parameters can handle a wide variety of film detection challenges and can be
customize for specific film detection needs.

When you select NS2 detect in the Tool menu under Frame Detection, the NSDetect
Configuration dialog box appears.

230 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Display Window

The upper window displays a section of film showing the captured ribbon data and will
show display options selected overlaid such as Channels (dark yellow band (s)), Frames
(yellow boxes), Images (blue boxes), skew (green boxes) and blips (orange boxes). The
information is derived from the current NS2 detection setup parameters. When the user
makes changes to the NS2 detection setup the display will update and allow the user to
verify if changes increase or decrease detection reliability.

Scroll Bar

The Scroll Bar allows the user to scroll left\right across the ribbon in order to review
detection parameters for consistency and stop at any areas that could use detection
improvement.

Graph Area

The Graph Area represents the average light level for each scan line captured within the
ribbon area. This information is used to determine where the most contrast occurs to
define the transition between image (white) and gaps (black). The detection trigger
(yellow horizontal line) shows the density level at which the document leading edge
and/or trailing edge will be detected. The yellow line should normally be set towards the
middle or close to the bottom valley (bottom of graph). The red vertical lines represent
where it found the leading edge of each document based on the current settings.

Display Options

The Display options allows the user to enable the check boxes for the Channels (dark
yellow band (s)), Frames (yellow boxes), Images (blue boxes), skew (green boxes) and
blips (orange boxes) inside the upper display area. When enabled the upper display will
give a visual representation of these features based on how the current NS2 detection
setup parameters are configured. The following matrix describes each feature.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 231

 Display Options Matrix

Feature Description

Channels Displays the Horizontal Channels based on the value it is currently set to.

Displays the Frame view with yellow bounding boxes based on current
Frames settings.

Displays the Image view with yellow bounding boxes based on current
Images
settings.

Displays the Deskew view with blue bounding boxes based on current
Deskew
settings.

Blips Displays the Blip view with orange bounding boxes based on current settings.

General Options

Configuration Name
The Configuration Name allows you to save NS2 detection setup parameters so that they
can be recalled later. It allows you to have multiple setups that you can switch between
including the factory default settings.

Drop Down Arrow

The Drop Down Arrow button allows the operator to select from the list of available NS2
detection setup parameters. If the user did not create a custom NS2 detection setup the
software will automatically default to the factory setup labeled Default.

✔ NOTE

The Default NS2 factory setup parameters can be modified; however, changes
made to it will not be saved. Once the user clicks OK to run the Default detection
setup the settings will revert back to factory defaults. The only way to save
changes to the Default parameters is to rename it. How to rename: Click on the
Save As button and type in a new detection setup name.

Refresh List
Clicking on the Refresh List button updates changes made to the current NS2 detection
setup parameters. The changes are also automatically available to the Capture and
Auditing stations using the same NS2 detection setup.

Detect Type Hint

This item provides the software information about the type of film being scanned.
Choosing a film type will help to further enhance the detection algorithm’s accuracy. The
following are the current choices available:

 Automatic (Highly Recommended) – runs several detect algorithms

 No Blip
 Top Blip
 Bottom Blip
 Duplex No Blip
 Duplex Top Blip

232 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

  Duplex Bottom Blip
✔ NOTE
A “Blip” is an image registration mark found on the microfilm.
Example:
Leading Edge Blip (Roll Film)

First Page
The First page value drop down arrow allows the user to choose which image top or
bottom gets written to disk first scanning duplex film formats or dual images within a
frame.

Frame Expand Width

The Frame Expand Width setting will create an over scan in pixels across the width of
the image from the point at which the software detected an edge (left/right). The Frame
Expand Width value is limited by the amount of memory available.

Detect Skew
The Detect Skew drop down allows the user to choose yes or now. When the Yes
option is selected the software will apply the deskew detection method for detecting
skewed images.

✔ NOTE

To perform a deskew on the images written to disk using the NS2 Deskew
option, the Deskew option under the Output Definition must also be selected. If
there is more than one Output Definition the option must be selected for each if
deskew is required

Horizontal Channels
Horizontal detection channels are used to determine where the most contrast occurs
horizontally (top to bottom) in order to define the transition between image (white) and
background (black). The detection trigger (Threshold Percent) shows the density level at
which the document leading edge and/or trailing edge will be detected.

Increase or decrease the number of horizontal Detection Channels to be used for

detection (up to 64 channels). The more channels that are selected, the smaller each
individual channel will be. The Detection Channels are divided equally to fit within the
designated ribbon area (determined by the Detect Width Percent and Detect Offset
Percent, covered later on in this section).
✔ NOTE
When scanning blipped microfilm, do not use fewer than 7 channels; otherwise,
there will not be enough area covered to accurately detect the blip area.

Tip: Increasing the number of channels will help increase the chances of finding
variances, which is especially helpful when dealing with heavily skewed images.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 233

Frame Expand Height
Frame Expand Height will create an over scan in pixels across the height of the image
from the point at which the software detected an edge (top/bottom). This value can never
be greater than the width of the CCD array (8792 pixels).

Ribbon Level
This item allows you to select the Ribbon level that will be used by the software algorithm
for detection. Each level represents ½ of the level above it. The recommended level to
use for detection is level 3.

Ribbon Level Ribbon Size

0 1:1
1 2:1
2 4:1
3 8:1
4 16:1
5 32:1
6 64:1
7 128:1
✔ NOTE
Using ribbon levels below 3 will cause the detect algorithm to run much slower,
because the software is dealing with a ribbon size resolution closer to the original
scan.

Tip: When choosing ribbon levels, use smaller ribbon numbers (such as 2 or 3)
when scanning images with small interframe gaps of 1/8th or smaller. When
scanning images with interframe gaps of 1/8th inch or larger, use a higher ribbon
level number (between 3 and 6).

Edge Filter Size

The Edge Filter Size can be increased or decreased, causing the software to
mathematically smooth out the highs and lows of the detection analysis. It defines how
many scan lines to use in deciding where the top/bottom and left/right sides of the image
are located.

Tip: Scanning images that have a lot of graphical data or horizontal/vertical black lines
may trigger the software to detect an image edge where none exists, or join multiple
images together. It may be helpful in such a case to increase the Edge Filter Size to
improve detection accuracy. However, increase the value only as needed. If the value is
too high, it may weaken the detection signal.

Detect Width Percent

The Detect Width Percent value is the defined area where the detection parameters will
search for black to white and white to black transitions used for locating images within the
film. This area is defined by the Detect Width Percent and the Detect Offset Percent
values. The search area is first determined by the total height of the ribbon minus the

234 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Detect Offset Percent value, and the Detect Width Percent value is then calculated
within this boundary.

Tip: It is best to use an offset value of 2.5 with a Detect Width Percent value of
95%.

Rearm Distance
The Rearm Distance instructs the software to ignore this distance after detecting an
edge before it looks for the next edge.

Threshold Percent
This refers to the percentage of white space the software needs to see to determine the
edge of the image (which is to say, the transition from black to white or white to black).

Detect Offset Percent

The Detect Offset Percent value is the distance the user sets to calculate the distance
from the edge of the ribbon or film to where the Detect Width Percent boundaries will be
calculated. See "Edge Filter Size

The Edge Filter Size can be increased or decreased, causing the software to
mathematically smooth out the highs and lows of the detection analysis. It defines how
many scan lines to use in deciding where the top/bottom and left/right sides of the image
are located.

Tip: Scanning images that have a lot of graphical data or horizontal/vertical black
lines may trigger the software to detect an image edge where none exists, or join
multiple images together. It may be helpful in such a case to increase the Edge
Filter Size to improve detection accuracy. However, increase the value only as needed. If
the value is too high, it may weaken the detection signal.

Detect Width Percent

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 235

Advance Parameters
The Advance Parameters becomes active when the check box is marked.

Detect Options

Dynamic Threshold
The Dynamic Threshold use for detecting across ribbons that have densities shifts
throughout the film. The algorithm is designed to detect the shift and adjust detection
sensitivity to increase detection accuracy.

Cut Long Pages

The Cut Long Pages options when selected will instruct the software to cut long frames
into segments based on the Maximum Width and Height values referenced later on in this
section.

Ignore Minimum Width

Sometimes extra images are captured; this happens when the documents
detected were longer than the maximum image width. These extra portions are
called truncated images. If the Ignore Minimum Width option is selected then
the remaining portions of the document, including remainders, will not be
captured. If the Ignore Minimum Width is not selected then the remaining
portion of the document will be captured as an image file divided by width and
will include the remainders.

Tip: Some film contains images that are so close together it becomes difficult to
determine the edge. When this occurs, it might be necessary to define the
maximum width and do not select the Ignore Minimum Width setting, so that
the software can segment the remaining portions of the document. Note that the
image width in this case must be the same since it will use this value to break up
the truncated data equally.

Minimum Width
This option defines the minimum frame width on the film measured in pixels of the
original document scan size. The software will not detect or draw frames smaller than this
value.

In the Minimum Width field, type a minimum frame width. This measurement is in pixels.

The Minimum Width field is available when the Fixed Sizing “Fixed Horizontal Size”
check box has not been selected.

236 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Minimum Height
This option defines the minimum frame height on the film measured in pixels of the
original document scan size. The software will not detect or draw frames smaller than this
value.

In the Minimum Height field, type a minimum frame height. This measurement is in
pixels.

The Minimum Height field is available when the Fixed Sizing “FixedVertical Size” check
box has not been selected.

Minimum Gap
This defines the minimum frame gap on the film measured in pixels of the original
document scan size. This value should be set slightly smaller than the actual frame gaps
so it will avoid false triggers.

Blip to Blip Detection

The software detects the leading edge of a blip and then continues detection until it
reaches the leading edge of the next blip. It will then calculate the backup distance to
create the trailing edge of each frame.

Blip Position
Select one of the following settings in the Blip Position drop-down menu:

Automatic This is a software-calculated offset which looks for all possible blip types.

Leading. Controlled specific, mathematically calculated. Leading Example:

Center Controlled specific Center Example:

Trailing Controlled specific. Trailing Example:

Manual This setting turns on Blip Offset. Manual Examples:

Leading Edge Trailing Edge Leading Edge Trailing Edge

Offset Negative Offset Positive Offset Positive Offset Negative

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 237

Blip Offset
This setting becomes available when you select any other Blip Position setting besides
Automatic. You can manually define the blip offset rather than have the software
automatically detect. You can have the offset back up from the blip or go forward from
the blip.

Maximum Width
This defines the minimum frame width on the film measured in pixels of the original
document scan size. The software will not detect or draw frames smaller than this value.
(it ignores them).

In the Maximum Width field, type a maximum frame width. This measurement is in
pixels.

The Maximum Width field is available when a Fixed Sizing “Fixed Horizontal Size”
check box has not been selected.

Maximum Frame Height

This defines the minimum frame height on the film measured in pixels of the original
document scan size. The software will not detect or draw frames smaller than this value.

In the Maximum Frame Height field, type a maximum frame height. This measurement
is in pixels.

The Maximum Frame Height field is available when the Fixed Sizing “Fixed Vertical
Size” check box has not been selected.

Maximum Frame Gap

This defines the maximum frame gap on the film measured in pixels of the original
document scan size. This value should be set slightly larger than the frame gaps and will
help to find faint images that might not get detected otherwise.
✔ NOTE
The Maximum Frame Gap is a critical adjustment when dealing with faint
images that are difficult to detect. Referencing this value, the software will keep
running different algorithms in order to detect and locate faint frames.

New Volume Gap

This defines the minimum frame gap on the film measured in inches on the source roll
film. This value is used when scanning 1000ft reels or pancake reels containing multiple
rolls of film. The New Volume Gap should be set to recognize a large enough distance so
it will recognize distances of blank microfilm in-between reels allowing the individual reels
to be scanned as single ribbon files.

Horizontal Detection Only

The software detects the leading and trailing edges of documents and captures
everything across the vertical which can then be redefined in the output tab. This allows
the output tab settings to be adjusted to define the blip area.

238 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Inside Out Detection
The Inside Out Detection instructs the software to perform detection from the inside out
rather than the automatic default detection method outside in.

Fixed Sizing
Available Sizes

Custom
Once the Frame Sizing feature is available the user can click on the Custom drop down
arrow and choose from a list of available document scan sizes. The software will then
use the selected scan size during the detection process for determining the width and
length of each frame or image. Custom sizes are created using the Fixed Frame Sizes
feature located under the Tools\Fixed Frame Size\Fixed Frame Size Setup dialog box.
✔ NOTE
The Available Sizing feature will stay grayed out if there are no custom frame
sizes defined. The user can create and define custom frame sizes using the
Fixed Frame Size Setup window located in the Auditor’s Tools drop down menu.
See Fixed Frame Size Setup covered earlier in this Chapter for additional details.

Fixed Horizontal\Vertical Size

The Fixed Horizontal or Vertical Frame Size check boxes allow the user to set the size
and location of the frames or images to be detected.

Fixed Horizontal Size

When you select the Fixed Horizontal Size check box, the following field settings are
enabled, allowing you to change the values for: Horizontal Size, Horizontal Location
and Available Sizes drop down box.

When you select the Fixed Horizontal Size check box, the following field settings are
inactivated: Frame Expand Width, Min\Max Width and Frame Expand Width

The following matrix describes the Fixed Horizontal Size settings:

Feature Description

This field is available when the Fixed Frame Size check box is
Horizontal Size selected. This option changes the horizontal size by the value you
type in. The measurement is in pixels.

This field is available when the Fixed Frame Size check box is
Horizontal Location selected. This option changes the horizontal location, left or right,
by the value you type in. The measurement is in pixels.

The Frame Expand Width setting will create an over scan in pixels
Frame Expand Width across the width of the image from the point at which the software
detected an edge (left/right). The Frame Expand Width value is
limited by the amount of memory available.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 239

Fixed Vertical Size
When you select the Fixed Vertical Size check box, the following field settings are
enabled, allowing you to change the values for: Vertical Size, Vertical Location and
Available Sizes.

When you select the Fixed Vertical Size check box, the following field settings are
inactivated: Frame Expand Height, Min\Max Height and Maximum Height
The following matrix describes the Fixed Vertical Size settings:

Feature Description

Frame Expand Height The Frame Expand Height will create an over scan in pixels
across the height of the image from the point at which the software
detected an edge (top/bottom). This value can never be greater
than the width of the CCD array (8192 pixels).

This field is available when the Fixed Frame Size check box is
selected. This option changes the vertical size by the value you
Vertical Size type in. The measurement is in pixels.

This field is available when the Fixed Frame Size check box is
Vertical Location selected. This option changes the vertical location, up or down, by
the value you type in. The measurement is in pixels.

Units on Original
The options are:
 Pixels – dots
 In – Inches
 cm - centimeters

Advance Blips
The following matrix describes the Advance Blip settings:

Feature Description

The Auto Size Detection will automatically instruct the software to

detect for the four levels of blips: Folder, Document, Page and
Auto Size Detection Volume.

Pages without blips This feature is available when the Pages without blips check box
is selected. This option will automatically create a page blip over
images\frames that are missing a blip on film.

240 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Feature Description

The Blip Levels feature limits the maximum blip levels the
software will define. If the Blip levels is set to 2 and the software
automatically finds 3 levels it will force the larger size to the next
level down. For example if there blip sizes that were recognized as
Blip Levels folder the software would change the folder blips from orange to
green which is the document blip size. This is useful when some
document blips are recognize as folders due to edge fog or
document overlap.

If the Auto Size Detection check box is not marked the user can
define the blip page max size in pixels. This is useful when the
Page Size Blip blips are non-standard and not being detected accurately.

If the Auto Size Detection check box is not marked the user can
define the blip document max size in pixels. This is useful when the
Document Size Blip blips are non-standard and not being detected accurately.

If the Auto Size Detection check box is not marked the user can
define the blip folder max size in pixels. This is useful when the
Folder Size Blip blips are non-standard and not being detected accurately.

OK
Click OK to save your settings and run the current detection setup.

Cancel
Click Cancel to exit the NS2 dialog box without saving your changes.

Save As
Click Save As to save your settings and type in a unique name for the current setup.
The Saved settings can be recalled later or selected in the NextStarPlus Capture
Preferences dialog box to be used in place of the default detect settings.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 241

NS3
The NS3 is the NextStarPlusAuditor’s fixed ribbon length segmentation method. Use
these parameters to instruct the software on where to begin segmenting and the desired
length for each segment. NS3 is great for frames without breaks such as long frames,
continuous or computer printouts.

When you select NS3 detect in the Tool menu under Frame Detection, the NSDetect
Configuration dialog box appears.

General Options

Refresh List Button

Clicking on the Refresh List Button updates changes made to the current NS3 detection
setup parameters. The changes are also automatically available to the Capture and
Auditing stations using the same NS3 detection setup.

Configuration Name
The configuration name allows you to save NS3 detection setup parameters so that they
can be recalled later. It allows you to have multiple setups that you can switch between.

Frame Sizing
First Frame Start
The First Frame Start allows the user to type in the number of pixels starting from 0 (the
beginning of the captured ribbon data) to the desired start location for segmentation to
begin. The user may need to try several different values until the software segmentation
begins at the desired location which is typically at the start of the first frame or user
defined location.
Frame Width

The Frame Width allows the user to type in the number of pixels that will divide each
segment of the entire ribbon beginning from the First Frame Start location.

Full Fiche Row (Microfiche Only)

The Full Fiche Row check box when marked will segment each row as an entire frame
rather than performing frame detection. Also, when the Full Fiche Row check box is
marked the Frame Start and Frame width text boxes will be grayed out.

242 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

OK
Click OK to save your settings and run the current detection setup.

Cancel
Click Cancel to exit the NS3 dialog box without saving your changes.

Save As
Click Save As to save your settings and type in a unique name for the current setup.
The Saved settings can be recalled later or selected in the NextStarPlus Capture
Preferences dialog box to be used in place of the default detect settings.

Help

Use this item to access quick reference help information and NextStarPlusAuditor version
information.

Menu Tool Bar

The Menu Tool Bar provides quick short cuts to Tool features. Some Tool Features will only be
active under specific Auditor Menu or Current View options otherwise they will be grayed out.

Tool Menu Short Cut Description Active

Brings up the Select A Ribbon
dialog box which allows the user
to open a ribbon file, choose
File Open specific constraints to sort ribbon Always Active
files and has a status bar to
indicate if there are any
application errors.

Saves changes made to the Active when a ribbon file is

File Save
ribbon file. opened.

Used for printing selected

images\frames. Audit station Active when an image or
Print
printer service must be setup for frame is selected.
printing.

Used for emailing selected

Active when an image or
Email images\frames. Audit station
frame is selected.
email service must be setup.

Brings up the about window

displaying the version, build,
Question Mark Always Active
copyright and system
information.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 243

 Tool Menu Short Cut Description Active

Cut\Past\Copy Not used in the Auditor Never Active

Zoom out to make the image

Zoom Out Always Active
smaller.

Zoom In Zoom in to enlarge the image. Always Active

Fits displayed image\frame to Available using the Virtual

Fit to Window
window. Film viewer.

Displays image\frame to full size. Available using the Virtual

Full Size
Film viewer.

Available when the

This button opens the global
Current Overlay setting in
Output Options NextStarPlusAuditor Output
the View menu is Frames
Options dialog box.
or Images

Saves the current Image

(s)\Frames (s) selected to the Always Active unless no
Save As
desired directory via browse images are selected.
option.

This button opens the global

NS1 NextStarPlusAuditor NS1 Always Active
detection dialog box.

This button opens the global

NS2 NextStarPlusAuditor NS2 Always Active
detection setup dialog box.

Automatically will blackout all

Blackout Always Active
images detected.

This button opens the global

Initial Output
NextStarPlusAuditor Initial Always Active
Numbering
Output Numbering dialog box.

Drop down list to choose which

Available when the Virtual
Output output definitions will show up in
Film is selected setting in
Definition View the display Virtual Film view
the View menu
display window.

After detection has been

Available when the
performed the deskew button will
Deskew nd Current Overlay in the
run a 2 deskew over selected
View menu is Deskew.
images

244 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Tool Menu Short Cut Description Active
Available when the
Rotate Rotates display 90 degrees. Analog Viewer is selected
in the View menu

Available when the

Mirror Mirrors active ribbon in display. Analog Viewer is selected
in the View menu

Available when the

Current Overlay in the
Fiche Grid Brings up the Fiche Grid Wizard
View menu is Frames or
Wizard for setting fiche grid templates.
Images. Never active with
a Roll Film Ribbon file.

Available when the

Activates the Deskew Single Current Overlay in the
Deskew Single Row Wizard which allows the View menu is Deskew.
Row Wizard user to manually define the skew
angle on a desired row. Never active with a Roll
Film Ribbon file.

Available when the

Activates the Deskew All Rows Current Overlay in the
Wizard which allows the user to View menu is Deskew
Deskew All manually define the skew angle and after the Deskew
Rows Wizard on all rows. Row has been selected.

Currently Not Available Never active with a Roll

Film Ribbon file.

Available when the

Current Overlay in the
View menu is Deskew
Cancels the user’s skew angle and after the Deskew
Cancel Deskew Row has been selected.
created using the Deskew
Row Changes
Wizard for a Row or All Rows.
Never active with a Roll
Film Ribbon file.

Available when the

Current Overlay in the
Accepts the user’s skew angle View menu is Deskew
Accept Deskew
created using the Deskew and after the Deskew
Row Changes
Wizard for a Row or All Rows. Row has been selected.
Never active with a Roll
Film Ribbon file.

Displays the colors showing Available when the

Blip Type which type of blip was detect for Current Overlay in the
each blip: View menu is Blip.
Orange = Folder

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 245

 Tool Menu Short Cut Description Active
Green = Document Never active with a Roll
Blue = Page Film Ribbon file.
Brown = Volume
Purple = Custom1
Hot Pink = Custom2
Displays the colors showing the
Available when the
detection confidence level found
Current Overlay in the
for each blip:
Blip Confidence View menu is Blip.
Blue = high confidence Never active with a Roll
Yellow = medium confidence Film Ribbon file.
Red = low confidence

Configuring Your Output and Naming Options

Once the parameters have been defined for detecting the blips, frames and images in the
ribbon, you can configure how the NextStarPlus software will process and store those
images. The Output and Naming option adjustments are made in real time, letting you
see the impact of each option without rescanning the image.

The following list summarizes the Output and Naming processing capabilities for
improving image quality and achieving the desired output:

 Output Grayscale and Bitonal images simultaneously

 Output multiple file formats i.e. JPEG, GIV, PDF, PDFA, CAL etc. simultaneously

 Output to Multiple directories simultaneously

 Output Multi-page formats

 Real-Time Rotate, Deskew, Mirror, Invert and Segmentation

 Scale DPI or Document Scan Sizes

 Flexible file naming and index file generation

 Reverse Numbering

 Custom Numbering

 Multiple Blip Indexing: Folder, Doc, Page, Custom1, Custom2, Volume and Skip

 Automatic Separation by Folder Count or Volume

 Adjust output processing options easily (Single, Group or Globally)

 Tag single or groups of images with independent output processing options

 Contrast, Despeckle and Sharpening enhancements

 Auto Thresholding (for uneven density)

 Save, Print, Email or output a selected image\frame or group of images\frames.

246 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Output Options
The Output Options gives the user is a series of processes that can be applied to the
captured images, resulting in an output image saved to disk. The following will describe
the Output Options in detail.

✔ NOTE

The more processes applied to an image, the more CPU processing power is
used when the Output.exe program is launched. The Auditor will allow you to
schedule the Output.exe at the end of the day to avoid any slowing down the
network or interfering with daily work activities. See Chapter 10 – Output (Writing
Images to Disk) for more details.

How to Open the Setup Output Options window:

To configure your output processing options, follow these steps:

1. Verify that the ribbons in in the default view. Virtual Film and Analog Viewer
are not selected.

2. Open the NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window – This window will allow the
user to view the changes made in the Output Options window.
Double Click on an image or frame to bring up the NextStarPlusAuditor
Preview Window.
-OR-
Right-click on an image or frame and select Preview Window. The
NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window dialog box opens.

3. Open the Setup Output Options – This will bring up the Setup Output Options
dialog window.
From the Preview window click on the Setup Output Options button.
The NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options dialog box opens.

-OR-

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 247

 From the NextStarPlusAuditor menu click on the Setup Output Options button to bring
up the Output Options.

✔ NOTE
Clicking on the Setup Output Options button from the
NextStarPlusAuditor’s Preview Window allows the users to adjust the
options on a single, group or global image basis. Clicking on the Setup
Output Options button from the Auditor’s Menu Tool Bar is used only
for adjusting the options on a global image basis.

The following is the NextStarPlusAuditor Output Options window.

248 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window

✔ NOTE
On the NextStarPlusAuditor Preview Window, verify that the Display
drop down arrow has the Output Definition that you want to make the
changes to as shown circled above.

Output Options Display Window

The Output Options Display Window list the various Output Definitions available. The
system by default will have a single Output Definition and the parameters will be set
to factory defaults. The user can change or create additional output definitions as
needed. For example the user can setup one output definition for outputting the
images in grayscale and another for outputting the images in bitonal. Details on
configuring and renaming the output definitions will be covered later on in this
section. Examples: Output Definition List and the Output Definition expanded.

✔ NOTE
The more options you select, the more CPU processing power is used.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 249

Output Options Parameters
Image File Type

The Image File Type setting determines the output file type. Branches off each file type,
(JPEG, TIF, CALS, etc.), which appear when you double-click the type, contain unique
settings for that file type.

The following will show the options available when you double-click on an option:

JPEG

JPEG output is a lossy output. The Quality setting affects readability and file size. Files
with a high quality setting are more readable and larger than files with a lower quality
setting. The default setting is 90%; for the average image, a setting of 60% is acceptable.

The size of the output JPEG image is displayed within the image title bar along with the
compression ratio. The compression ratio is the ratio of the uncompressed grayscale
image to the compressed JPEG image. For example, a compression ratio of 4:1 means
the compressed JPEG image is ¼ the size of the uncompressed grayscale image.

Tiff Grayscale

By default, TIF Grayscale is an uncompressed 8-bit format with 256 levels of gray.

The 4 bit check box sets the output to 4-bit format with 16 levels of grey. A 4-bit image is
half the size of an 8 bit image.

LZW Compression is a type of compression for grayscale images.

The Multipage option indicates whether the image is to be output into a multipage tiff
format. This is normally used in conjunction with blip detection to break the input stream
of images into multipage documents. The file naming must be set up correctly to output
the images into the correct multipage files.

250 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Tiff Group IV

AutoThreshold Basic
The AutoThreshold Basic option when selected automatically adjusts the dynamic
range (contrast). It does this on a per image basis to get the best foreground to
background density and does not require user configuration.

Bitonal Threshold

The Bitonal Threshold value is a static number between 1 and 255 used to convert 8-bit
grey scale to Bitonal. As you adjust the number, the output image will be re-displayed
showing the effect of the setting.

Multipage

The Multipage option indicates whether the image is output into a multipage tiff format.
This is normally used in conjunction with blip detection to break the input stream of
images into multipage documents. The file naming must be set up correctly to output the
images into the correct multipage files.

AutoThreshold
Auto Threshold allows the image threshold to change on a region-by-region basis.

When the AutoThreshold option is enabled, the title bar of the Output Image reports the
density level of the image:

 Light
 Normal/Light
 Normal
 Normal/Dark
 Dark
The density value is the average value of the peak of histogram value for the image
based on histograms of 128x128 pixel areas in the image. The peak value of the

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 251

 histogram is the background density, the area with the most grayscale pixels of one
value.

Background Foregound
Limit Limit
100
Dark Normal Light
Adjustment

0
0 Gray Scale Histogram Peak 255

For the best results from AutoThresholding, you should find a Light, Normal, and Dark
image on the roll on which you are working.

For each image type (Light, Normal, Dark), adjust the Density slider to get the best
image. For multiple-type images, like Normal/Light, moving either slider will adjust the
image.

The Global Thresholding slider can be used to define a larger area for averaging the
density calculation than the standard 128x128 pixels. Setting this value higher can be
useful for images with pictures like newsprint.

The Background Limit and Foreground Limit settings define the outer limits that the
compensation formulas will affect. The Background Limit drops out darker pixels from
the density calculation, the Foreground Limit drops out lighter pixels. The limit settings
provide a range from 0 to 100. For the background, this is the actual pixel grayscale
value; for the foreground, the grayscale limit is actually 155 which, together with the
range setting, yield an actual Foreground Limit range of 155 to 255.

✔ NOTE

You can see the compensation map used by AutoThreshold by selecting JPEG
as the Image File type while Auto Threshold is turned on.

CALS Group IV

CALS-G4 is the same Group IV image used in TIF, but wrapped in a CALS header. This
type uses the same parameters as TIF Group IV, except that multipage is not available.

AutoThreshold Basic, Bitonal Threshold and AutoThreshold are same as described for
Tiff Group IV.

PNG

252 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 PNG is a gray scale file type that provides better compression than JPEG. It is CPU
intensive and will not be as fast as JPEG scanning.

JPEG 2000

JPEG 2000 is a newer higher compression 8-bit grayscale format. It will compress an
image to a smaller size than the standard JPEG. However, it is CPU intensive and will
not be as fast as JPEG scanning. Setting quality to 100 will output lossless JPEG 2000.

PDF:JPEG

The NextStarPlus software can output PDF files with one of three internal image formats:

 JPEG: lossless JPEG

 Uncompressed Raster: uncompressed grayscale

 Group IV: bitonal threshold and auto threshold

 PDF/A: ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (non

searchable)

Note: The Group IV option contains the same thresholding and auto thresholding settings
as the TIF Group IV and CALS types.

The Multipage optional check box if checked will output images into a multipage PDF
format. This is normally used in conjunction with blip detection to break the input stream
of images into multipage documents. The file naming must be set up correctly to output
the images into the correct multipage files.

Grayscale – TIF JPEG (JTIF)

This format is a grayscale image type that creates a TIF file using JPEG compression.
Setting Quality to 100 will output lossless JPEG.
✔ NOTE
Some image viewers may not support this type of format.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 253

Extract – (not available at this time)

Rotate
The Rotate option lets you rotate the image 90, 180, or 270 degrees.

Mirror
The Mirror option lets you flip the image around horizontally (left/right).

Deskew
The Deskew option when selected instructs the software to deskew the images based on
the detected skew found using the NS2 detect skew method.

✔ NOTE
If there is more than one Output Definition the option must be selected for each if
deskew is required.

Min Angle
The Min Angle is used to instruct the software to not deskew images smaller than this
value when the Deskew option is selected.

Invert Color
The Invert Color option reverses the colors of your image. Use this option to turn a
negative image into a positive image or a positive image into a negative image.

Grayscale Adjust
The Grayscale Adjust includes Contrast scroll bar, Bright Scroll Bar and Remap
Intensity features used for adjusting plus improving the image quality of grayscale
images.

Enhancements
Contrast Scroll Bar
Allows the user to darken or lighten the grayscale contrast of the
foreground or background pixel levels. Moving the scroll bar down
(Negative values) will darken the foreground pixels. Moving the scroll bar
up (positive values) will lighten the background pixels.

254 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Bright
Allows the user to adjust the overall grayscale brightness to darken all
pixels or lighten all pixels. It simulates the effects of increasing or
decreasing the lamp. Moving the scroll bar down (Negative values) will
darken all pixel levels. Moving the scroll bar up (positive values) will
lighten all pixel levels.

✔ NOTE

If the Contrast and Brightness settings are grayed out this would indicate that the
image selected was originally set up as bitonal. and can only be changed by
right mouse clicking on the individual image to change settings. This prevents
end user from changing preprogrammed default settings.

Remap Intensity
The Remap Intensity option is used to adjust the grayscale after it was scanned. This
feature allows for remapping the grayscale curve, linear, exponential or logarithm of the
captured images. It can also be used to invert positive\negative images and can be used
to improve the bitonal image output.

Click on the Remap Intensity check box to bring up the Remap Intensity dialog box.

Display View
The Display View buttons located at the upper left corner allow the user to change the
before and after image view to fit the display 1:1 or Fit to window.

Intensity
The Intensity shows the current grayscale mapping for the image selected. It shows the x
and y mapping coordinates which can be modified by clicking on the center white graph
and moving it to the desired x\y grayscale point of intensity. The results of this change

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 255

 will be displayed on the right “After” display. After reviewing the results the user can
modify and change as many times as necessary to achieve the desired results.

Channel
The channel is used to select the channel to remap. Use the drop down arrow to choose
from one of the following options:

RGB: remap all channels.

Red: remap the red channel.

Green: remap the green channel.

Blue: remap the blue channel.

Curve Mode
The Curve Mode is used to select the curve mode when remapping. Use the drop down
arrow to choose from one of the following options:

Curve: remaps the selected channel using curve data

Linear: remaps the selected channel using linear data

Exponential: remaps the selected channel using exponential data, which is affected by
the Factor value

Logarithm: remaps the selected channel using logarithmic data, which is affected by the
Factor value.

Factor – Not Available

Flip
The flip options are used to flip the curve if the curve mode is curve or linear.

 Vertical and Horizontal

 Vertical Only

 Horizontal Only

Reset All
Resets parameters back to factory defaults.

Load\Save
Allows the user to Load or Save favorite mapped setting for future use.

OK\Cancel
Clicking on OK saves the settings and clicking on cancel exits without saving.

256 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Filter

The Filter option lets you make special image enhancements by analyzing grids of pixels
with the specified dimensions: (3x3, 5x5 or 7x7) and, based on the settings, enhances
the center pixel.

Double-click the 3x3 option to show the selection branch for changing this filter. There
are 3 types of 3x3 filters:

 Standard

 Erode

 Dilate

The amount of filtering to apply is set via the slider to the left of the Option Tree window.

Scaling

Scaling lets you scale the output image to a different scan width and length size in pixels.
In addition the DPI can be scaled up or down from the original DPI the image was
originally scanned. To enable, check the box next to the desired option and enter the
desired values.

Detect

Detect lets you capture the individual image detection coordinates to the ribbons xml file
while capturing the ribbon in strips or segments.

Output Definition Control

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 257

Add/Remove
You can create multiple output images from one scanned image. For example, the user
may want to scan the image using a Bitonal configuration and another other output
window using a grayscale configuration. The Add button lets you create a new output
window with default values that the user can define a unique set of parameters for each
additional output window or use the default settings.

Tip: Images created by using the Add button are named Output Definition n,
where n is a number starting at 1. You can alter the output image names by right-
clicking the name and changing it.
The Remove button deletes an output option definition. To remove, click the output
option definition you want to delete and then click Remove.

Duplicate
You can create multiple output images from one scanned image. The Duplicate button
lets the user add a new output window using the same parameters instead of using the
default settings. The duplicate output window can also be modified if desired.

Tip: Images created by using the Add button are named Output Definition n,
where n is a number starting at 1. You can alter the output image names by right-
clicking the name and changing it.
The Remove button deletes an output option definition. To remove, click the output
option definition you want to delete and then click Remove.

Import
The Import button gives the user a quick way to load saved Output Option parameters.
The Output Option pre-saved parameters are created using the Export feature explained
in the next section.

How to Import Saved Output Options:

- Click on the Import button
- Select an Output Option under the Available Templates
- Click on the OK button
- Verify the Output Option displays under Output Definitions List

How to Import Saved Output Options using short cut keys:

- Open a ribbon file
- From the Auditor window select all, a group or single image
- Click on the short cut key for the desired Output Settings
- Verify the Output Option displays under Output Definitions List

✔ NOTE

If you forget the short cut key for a particular Output Definition click on
Control+Shift+V. This will bring up the Output Templates.

258 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Clicking on the Import button brings up the Load A Template dialog window.

Export
The Export button gives the user a quick way to save the Output Option parameters.
Once the Output Option parameters are saved the user can use the Import button to load
the Output Options settings as needed. In addition the user can create a keyboard short
cut which allows importing the Output Option parameters in the Auditor window to
selected images.

Click the Export button to bring up the following Save Output Template dialog box.

How to Export (Save) Output Templates:

 Click on the Export button
 Type in the new Output Option name in the Template name text box
 Type in a short cut (Optional)
 Verify the Output Option displays under Output Definitions List
 Click OK

How to overwrite an existing Output Options template:

 In the Output Options dialog box make the desired changes
 Click on the Export button
 Highlight the existing Output Options template
 Type in a new Short cut key (Optional)

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 259

  Click OK to bring up the overwrite message box
 Click on Yes to overwrite the existing Output Template or no to exit without changing

Naming
Click the Naming button to bring up the output Naming Options dialog box which allows
you to configure how and where images will be written to disk. For more details on
Naming see Naming your Output covered later on in this section.

Apply to All Frames

Apply to All Images
This check box will apply changes to all frames but will not replace customized settings
for individual images.

Remove Individual Definitions

Used to restore any images that might have been customized to the global settings and
replace any additional outputs.

Initial Output Numbering Setup

The Initial Output Numbering setup is used for customizing the starting number of a
Naming variable. The available options are classified as counter variables. For example
the user can choose to start numbering the Frame number (counter variable) at 100
instead of starting at 1 or 0. The variable must also be typed in the Naming Format String
or the software will ignore the starting value typed in the counter’s text box.

How to customize a starting number:

- Click on the Setup button to bring up the Initial Output Numbering setup
window.
- Click on the Reset button to update the counters
- Type in the new starting number next to the desired counter option
- Click OK to save changes or cancel to reject.

260 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 ✔ NOTE

For more information concerning the counter variable options above see the
Naming Fields Matrix covered later on in this section.

Ribbon Naming Options

0 or 1 Based Naming
These radio buttons allows the user to choose the starting Base Image Name (starting
count) by 0 or 1. This feature can only be changed using the global output options
located in the Main Auditor window.

Images Per Folder

The Images Per Folder text box defines the number of images per directory before the
next folder is automatically incremented. This feature works in conjunction with the
naming variable $FOL$. For more details on using the Naming variables see Naming
Your Output and Name Fields covered in the next section. This feature can only be
changed using the global output options located in the Main Auditor window.

First Image
When scanning duplex or multiplex film the software will default the image count to start
numbering from the top. The First Image radio buttons allow the user to change the
image count to start at the bottom or top depending on the desired numbering output.
This feature can only be changed using the global output options located in the Main
Auditor window.

Vertical Fiche (only for microfiche ribbons)

Standard
When the Standard option is selected the software will number COM microfiche
images\frames count to start numbering from the top left to right horizontally. This feature
can only be changed using the global output options located in the Main Auditor window.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 261

Vertical
When the Vertical option is selected the software will number the COM microfiche
images\frames count to start numbering from top left to bottom vertically. This feature
can only be changed using the global output options located in the Main Auditor window.

Reverse Vertical
When the Reverse Vertical option is selected the software will number the COM
microfiche images\frames count to start numbering from the bottom left of the microfiche
(opposite end of the title bar) vertically. This feature can only be changed using the global
output options located in the Main Auditor window.

Naming Your Output

Once you have configured your output, you can determine how you want your digital
images to be named, what if any the index file will contain and the name of the index file.
NextStarPlus lets you use variables in your definitions to provide greater flexibility. To
name your output, click the Naming tab. The Naming dialog box appears.

Naming Output Dialog Box for Roll Film

262 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Naming Output Dialog Box for Microfiche

The following matrix describes the Naming Output features for Roll Film and Microfiche:

Name Description

The Naming Options drop down text box allows the user to choose
between the following format string configuration views: Image File
Naming Options
Path, Image Index Path and Index Record Definition. Each text box
option will be described in detail later on in this section.

Displays the current Naming Output variables for the Image File Path,
Image Index Path and Index Record path. The variables that will show
Format String
in the Format String text box depend on the option selected from the
Naming Options list.

Allows the user to browse to a specific path to be used for indexing.

Browse Button

Sample “File Name” Displays what the path and image file name will look like based on the

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 263

 Name Description

format string.

Displays the list of available indexing variables. Details for each

Name Fields variable will be covered later on in this section.

Displays the current Batch ID number. The Batch ID is defined by the

File Name Fields user during the Capture process. See Chapter 6 or 7 Capture for Roll
film or Microfiche

Allows the user to move a highlighted variable from the Names Fields
Right Arrow list to the File Name Fields list and Format String index text box.

Allows the user to create a folder between variables in the Format

Folder String index text box.

Allows the user to move a highlighted variable from the File Name
Fields list back to the Name Fields list and removes it from Format
Left Arrow String index text box.

The Create Index File will create the ASCII index file if the box is
Create Index File check. Note the Index File Path and Index Record definitions must be
setup correctly to properly create the index.

OK Allows the user to exit and save settings.

Cancel Allows the user to exit without saving changes.

Allows the user to reset changes back to factory defaults. To clear this
Reset
definition and start over, click Reset.

Selecting the Naming Options

The Naming Options drop down list allows the user to toggle the Format String and
Sample views between the Image File Path, Index File Path and Index Record Definition
variables. The different types of variables will be covered in detail later on in this section.

Image File Path

The Image File Path is used to set up the directory structure where images will be written
to disk. The content is input manually by the user. The user can also choose from the
Image File Path variables list and use the Browse button at the bottom of the dialog box
to select a location.

Index File Path

The Index File Path option is used to set up the directory structure where an optional
ASCII text file will be written to disk. The ASCII text file includes information that can be
collected by the software and written out to the Index File Path location. The information
collected is selected by the user from the Index File Path variables list. This information
rd
can be used by 3 party software for indexing or reference purposes. The Index File Path

264 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 works in conjunction with the Index Record Definition. The Name Fields available are
Batch ID, Fiche ID, Roll ID and JobID.

Index Record Definition

After defining the index file path the Index Record Definition is used to define the
contents that will be collected and written out to an ASCII text file. The information
collected is selected by the user from the Index Record Definition variables list. The Index
Record Definition works in conjunction with the Index File Path.
✔ NOTE

To activate the Index Record Definition and Index File path options, the user
must make sure the “Create Index File” check box located at the bottom of the
dialog screen is marked.

In addition the Index File Path and Index Record Definitions are only active when
the user accesses them through the global Output Options via the Auditor tool
bar or from the tools menu\output options selection.

Fiche All Rows Image Path

The Fiche All Rows option is used to set up the directory structure where the bit map of
the entire ribbon (s) will be written to disk. The option for All Rows Image must also have
the desired ribbon level selected..

The ribbon level determines the size which can be set between levels 2-7 as the following
example demonstrates. The smaller the ribbon level the larger the images will be which
can affect the image size and time to write the images to disk.

Ribbon Level Ribbon Size

1 2:1
2 4:1
3 8:1
4 16:1
5 32:1
6 64:1
7 128:1

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 265

Format String
Depending on the Naming Option selected the Format String text box will display the
current variables and user typed in text.

✔ NOTE

If any of the variables in the Format string display in the color red this indicates
that the variable is invalid and will not function properly. Make sure to double
check that it is typed in correctly.

Sample
The Sample Index Record shows what each Format String will look like based on the
current settings.

How to Setup the Format String

The Format String is where the user can define the Image File Path, Index File Path
(optional) and Index Record (Optional) variables (aka naming conventions). Follow these
steps for setting each:

1. From the Naming Options drop down text box select the desired option between the
following variable configuration views: Image File Path, Image Index Path and Index
Record Definition.

2. Perform the following depending on which option is selected under the Naming Options
text box:

a. Image File Path view - Enter the path where you want your images to be
written to in the Format String text box. For example, if you want your
images to be in your Pictures directory on your C drive, you would enter
C:\Pictures. See example below.

Example of Image File Path Format String

Tip: Use the Browse Icon to the right of the Format String text box to bring up
the browser. The browser allows the operator to navigate to the desired path
where you want your images to be written.
b. Index File Path (optional) view - Enter the name and path where you want
your index file to be written to in the Format String text box. For example, if

266 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 you want this file to be in your Pictures directory on your C drive you must
type in that location and an identifiable name so you can locate it later. See
example below.

Example of Index File Path Format String

✔ NOTE

The index name must have a .txt extension so it can be opened as a text file
program such as notepad. The following variables could also be entered as the
index file name: $BAT$ (Batch ID), $JID$ (JOB ID), $ROL$ (Roll ID) and $FNM$
(Fiche ID). These variables will be covered later on in this section under “Naming
Variables”.

Tip: Use the Browse Icon to the right of the Format String text box to bring
up the browser. The browser allows the operator to navigate to the desired path
where you want your index to be written.

c. Index Record Definition (optional) view – Unlike the Index and Image file
paths the location is not entered here. The Index Record Definition is used
for entering in the desired data to be collected and saved to the Index text
file. The data collected will be determined by what variables are typed in the
Format String. See example below.

Example of the Index Record Definition Format String

To determine which variables to choose, see the Names Fields Matrix for the
Image File Path and Index Record definition covered later on in this section
under “Naming Variables”.

✔ NOTE

The Index Record Definition variables can be comma (,), space or tab delimited.

3. Next, you will need to select the variable or variables you wish to use for creating the
Image file path and Index Record Definition from the Name Fields box and click the right-
facing arrow to move it to the File Name Fields list. To place a variable at a specific point
in the format string text box, click the point in the format string where the variable should

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 267

 go, then click the variable description in the Name Fields box and click the right-facing
arrow.

Example Format String using the Image File Path option:

Click where you want the variable to go.

Highlight the desired variable.

Click on the right-arrow to move the highlighted Name Fields variable to the File
Name Fields as shown below.

Once the variable is in the File Name Fields, the Format String will show the variable
in text box as shown below. The Sample File Name will show how the index path and
file name will look.

4. Use the Folder Icon to define subdirectories between variables. To create a subdirectory
click at a specific point in the Format String text box where the subdirectory should go,
then click on the Folder Icon. See the Name Fields matrix later on in this section for
detailed information for all variable options.

Folder Icon

5. Continue to choose the variables from the Names Fields list in the desired order until the
naming index path is complete. Below is an example of a completed Format String and
Sample File Name:

268 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Format String: C:\Images\$BAT$\$ROL$\$4IMG$$EXT$

Sample File Name:

✔ NOTE

The Format String must contain a minimum of the following: Main Path; a
variable for separating the batches, microfiche or roll; a variable for Incrementing
the images; and a file extension.

6. You may specify a length for a variable by editing the format string directly and inserting a
number after the first $ delimiter character and before the variable name. For example,
$4IMG$ specifies a 4 digit image number.

If a length is specified for a counter number, it will be created with leading zeros.
$4IMG$ will create 0001, 0002, 0003, etc.

If a length is specified for a text or mixed text\numeric variable the length will be
truncated by the number of digits the user types in. For example if the Fiche name is
5870_A and the variable is $4FNM$, 5870 will be the output index name. The 4 value
typed after the first $ specifies the max spaces and will truncate the remaining
text\numeric values.

✔ NOTE

If a length specified for a text or mixed text\numeric variable is greater than the
amount of text\numeric values typed in the index field for that variable it will be
ignored. For example: If the Fiche name is Lovely and the variable is $22FNM$,
the software will not create an output index name for this variable.

Tip: You can enter the variables in the Format String box directly. NextStarPlus
verifies the string as it is entered, displaying the text in green if the string is valid
and in red if the string is invalid. The NextStarPlus software does not verify the
path.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 269

Naming Variables
The following Names Fields Matrix describes each Naming Variable’s format, Name
Fields, description, type and Naming Options that can be used for naming images or
indexing captured image information.

Name Fields Matrix for the Image file Path and Index Record
Definition
The following describes the available Name Fields, variables along with the description
and type that can be used for creating an Image File Path or written to the Index Record
Definition.

Variable Name
Description Type Naming Options
Format Fields
$ALT$ Alternate User Defined in the Auditor by right Constant Image File Path
(name) mouse clicking on a selected image Index File Path
or group of images to give the image Index Record Definition
(s) an unique Alpha Numeric name.
$BAT$ Batch ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Batch ID name as a Index File Path
reference. Index Record Definition
$BC1$ Blip User Defined and incremented when Counter Image File Path
Custom 1 user specified size is detected. Index Record Definition
Number
$BC2$ Blip User Defined and incremented when Counter Image File Path
Custom 2 user specified size is detected. Index Record Definition
Number
$BDN$ Blip Incremented when a Doc blip is Counter Image File Path
Document detected Index Record Definition
Number
$BFN$ Blip Folder Incremented when a Folder blip is Counter Image File Path
Number detected Index Record Definition
$BPN$ Blip Page Incremented when a Page blip is Counter Image File Path
Number detected Index Record Definition
$BVN$ Blip Volume Incremented when a Volume blip is Counter Image File Path
Number detected Index Record Definition
$EXT$ Default Default extension for the defined Constant Image File Path
Extension output image type Index Record Definition
(.ext)
$FRA$ Fiche Increments based on the Column Changes Image File Path
Column Alphabetically Index Record Definition
Alpha
$FCN$ Fiche Increments based on the Column Counter Image File Path
Column Numerically Index Record Definition
Number
$FNM$ Fiche ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Fiche ID name as a Index Record Definition
reference.
$FRA$ Fiche Row Increments based on the Row Changes Image File Path
Alpha Alphabetically Index Record Definition
$FCA$ Fiche Row Increments based on the Row Counter Image File Path
Number Numerically Index Record Definition

270 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Variable Name
Description Type Naming Options
Format Fields
$FVA$ Fiche Vertically Increments microfiche Changes Image File Path
Vertical frames Alphabetically Index Record Definition
Alpha
$FVN$ Fiche Vertically Increments microfiche Counter Image File Path
Vertical frames Numerically Index Record Definition
Column
$FOL$ Folder Increments the folder based on the Counter Image File Path
Number value in the Images Per Folder text Index Record Definition
box.
$FRM$ Frame Incremented for every frame detect Counter Image File Path
Number Index Record Definition
$IMG$ Image Incremented for every image written Counter Image File Path
Number Index Record Definition
$IND$ Used with custom software for Custom Image File
Index String manual indexing String Path
Index Record Definition
$INV$ Used with custom software for Custom
Index
manual indexing String Image File Path
Volume
Index Record Definition
$JID$ Job ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Job ID name as a Index File Path
reference. Index Record Definition
$ODN$ Output Output Definition Numeric (0,1,2,3….) Counter Image File Path
Definition order images will be written to disk Index Record Definition
Number defined in the Output Option dialog
box.
$ONA$ Output Output Definition Alpha (A,B,C, D….) Alpha Image File Path
Image order images will be written to disk Order Index Record Definition
Alpha defined in the Output Options dialog
box.
$ONM$ Output Output Definition name defined in the Constant Image File Path
Image Output dialog. Index Record Definition
Name
$ONU$ Output Sequential number for each output Constant Image File Path
Image image defined in Output. Use with Index Record Definition
Number duplex and multiplex numbering
$ROL$ Roll ID (roll Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
only) and includes the Fiche ID name as a Index File Path
reference. Index Record Definition
$SIMG$ Same For Duplex and Multi Output Counter Image File Path
Image Definitions Image Output. Increments Index Record Definition
Number for every image written to disk in
sequential order.
$OPR$ Scan Adds the operator name from the Constant Image File Path
Operator scan configuration file used Index Record Definition
$IHT$ Image Height of image Changes Index Record Definition
Height
$IWD$ Image Width of image Changes Index Record Definition
Width
$SEC$ Comma Adds a comma Separator Index Record Definition
$SEL$ CRLF Adds a carriage return line feed Separator Index Record Definition
$SET$ TAB Adds a tab space Separator Index Record Definition

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 271

 ✔ NOTE
When there are multi output definitions it is important that they are not named with the
same file extension and directory path. If there are two output definitions with the same
directory path and extension like grayscale tiff and bitonal tiff output you may end up with
duplicates where one will over write the previous image. Example: 001.tif for definition one
is the same as 001.tif for definition two. Overwriting can be avoided by manually typing in
a different directory path for each output definition or by using the output definition name
or number variable ($ONM$ or $ONU$) as part of the naming scheme.

Multipage
A multipage file is where multiple images are added one after the other to a single file. The
primary image or frame starts the multipage file which will increase in size as the software adds
additional images. The images are added in the order given and must have the same file name.

✔ NOTE

Once a multipage file is created in NextStarPlus it can only be appended to.

Individual images within the multipage file cannot be edited or separated without
rd
the use of 3 party software.

Multipage Setup
To setup for a multipage file output use the following steps:

1. From the Preview window select the desired output image file type format. The
output image type formats that can generate multipage files are: Tiff Grayscale
(4-bit and LZW), Tiff Group IV and PDF (JPEG, Uncompressed Raster and
Group IV).

2. Make sure the Apply to All Images was selected unless you are manually
choosing specific images\frames.

3. Check the Multipage option under the output file format selected.

272 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 4. Define the Naming Format String.

Example: C:\Temp\$ROL$$EXT$

The Naming Format String should be set so that the images you want as a
multipage file have the same file name in common and avoid using a counter
variable for incrementing each image or frame. For example you should not
choose a variable that increments for every image such as frame number
($FNM$), image number ($IMG$) or blip page number ($BPN$). Below Matrix
outlines the available variables that can be used to create multipage files.

Name Fields Matrix for Creating Multipage Files

The Names Field Matrix lists all the variables available. From that list the operator can
select any Constant type variable and some Counter type variables for creating multipage
files. Below list the examples that can be used. If a Counter variable type is selected then
it will increment the multipage files based on that variable and append to the multipage
file each time the variable repeats.

Variable Name Description Type Naming Options

Format Fields
$BAT$ Batch ID Defined in the Capture dialog Constant Image File Path
(name) text box and includes the
Batch ID name as a
reference.
$BC1$ Blip User Defined and Counter Image File Path
Custom 1 incremented when user
Number specified size is detected.
$BC2$ Blip User Defined and Counter Image File Path
Custom 2 incremented when user
Number specified size is detected.
$BDN$ Blip Incremented when a Doc blip Counter Image File Path
Document is detected
Number
$BFN$ Blip Folder Incremented when a Folder Counter Image File Path
Number blip is detected
$BVN$ Blip Incremented when a Volume Counter Image File Path
Volume blip is detected
Number
$FRA$ Fiche Increments based on the Changes Image File Path
Column Column Alphabetically
Alpha
$FCN$ Fiche Increments based on the Counter Image File Path
Column Column Numerically
Number
$FNM$ Fiche ID Defined in the Capture dialog Constant Image File Path
(name) text box and includes the
Fiche ID name as a
reference.
$FRA$ Fiche Row Increments based on the Changes Image File Path
Alpha Row Alphabetically
$FCA$ Fiche Row Increments based on the Counter Image File Path
Number Row Numerically
$FVA$ Fiche Vertically Increments Changes Image File Path
Vertical microfiche frames
Alpha Alphabetically

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 273

 Variable Name Description Type Naming Options
Format Fields
$JID$ Job ID Defined in the Capture dialog Constant Image File Path
(name) text box and includes the Job
ID name as a reference.
$ROL$ Roll ID (roll Defined in the Capture dialog Constant Image File Path
only) text box and includes the
Fiche ID name as a
reference.
$ODN$ Output Output Definition number Counter Image File Path
Definition defined in the Output dialog.
Number
$ONM$ Output Output Definition name Constant Image File Path
Image defined in the Output dialog.
Name
$ONU$ Output Sequential number for each Constant Image File Path
Image output image defined in
Number Output. Use with duplex and
multiplex numbering

Format String Examples for creating Multipage files

To create a Format String for creating multipage files the user must first define
how the multipage numbering will be incremented. It can be based on the Batch ID, Job
Id, Roll ID, Fiche ID or other criteria such as blip size. The following gives two examples
for film without blips and with blips and shows how to set up the Naming Format string for
each.

Without Blips
If Roll ID = 1234 in the Capture Window then the format string should be as follows:

Format String Roll ID - C:\Temp\$ROL$$EXT$

Sample File Name with Roll ID - C:\Temp\1234.pdf (multipage file name base on Roll ID)

With Blips
The user needs to define which blip size will be used to designate when the multipage file
numbering is incremented. The following examples show what the format string should
look like for the Folder and document blip sizes:

By the Folder

Format String - C:\Temp\$FOL$$EXT$

Sample File Name - C:\Temp\0.pdf (multipage file name base on Folder Type)

Note you must also have the multipage option selected under PDF:JPEG

By the Document

Format String - C:\Temp\$BDN$$EXT$

Sample File Name - C:\Temp\0.pdf (multipage file name base on Job ID Type)

Note you must also have the multipage option selected under PDF:JPEG

274 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 ✔ NOTE

A new multipage file will be created each time a variable (counter or index name)
changes. Example: Batch, Roll ID, Fiche ID or Job ID. It is important to make
sure the variable selected is not based on a counter such as $img$ or $frm$ or
the software will only create single page multipage files.

✔ NOTE

In addition to setting up the Naming Format String the user must also select the
multipage option under the output file format selected as mention in Step #3
above.

Name Fields Matrix for the Index file Path

The following describes the available Name Fields, variables along with the description
and type that can be used for creating the Index File Path location.

Variable Name
Description Type Naming Options
Format Fields
$BAT$ Batch ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Batch ID name as a Index File Path
reference. Index Record Definition
$FNM$ Fiche ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Fiche ID name as a Index Record Definition
reference.
$JID$ Job ID Defined in the Capture dialog text box Constant Image File Path
(name) and includes the Job ID name as a Index File Path
reference. Index Record Definition

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 275

 Chapter 10 – Output (Writing Images to Disk)
Output (Writing Images to Disk)
The Output application allows the user to write the images to disk after the auditing of a
ribbon or batch of ribbons is finished. The order in which the ribbon file images are written to
disk is managed by the NSController (see Chapter 4 NSController) and the order also
depends on how numbering was set in the Auditor. See Chapter 8 for more details on the
Auditor, under Initial Output Numbering and Output Options, 1 or 0 Based Naming.

How to Output Images

1. Click on the Output.exe Icon from the RSD desktop.

Tip: The images need not be written to a disk immediately after auditing. This
task can be timed to occur at any time that is convenient—for instance, at the
end of an auditing session or work shift.

2. The Output.exe Dialog will come up. The dialog box will give the following
message: “The No ribbons available. Wait 10 seconds and check for next
ribbon.” After 10 seconds the output will begin processing images and will display
the status. See Output Data below for details on the status information displayed.

✔ NOTE

If the images do not begin writing to disk after 10 seconds check the
NSController status and verify the ribbon is set to pre-outputting. If the batch is
marked as “Output Batch As A Whole” and the “Batch Ready For Output” is set
to no, the Output.exe application will not write the images to disk until all ribbons
in the batch have finished being Audited.

3. Verify that there are no errors reported.

✔ NOTE

If there are errors verify the naming path in the Auditor is set correctly. If there
are still errors contact NextScan Support for assistance.

276 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 4. Click on Ctrl+C or the upper cancel button when done to close the Output.exe
window.

✔ NOTE

On the FlexScan, the RSD is installed internally and writes the Ribbon data on
two local Raid drives. Since the Ribbon data is captured and stored on the same
RSD it prevents the ability to Capture plus Output simultaneously. The user must
schedule the Output process so it does not conflict with scanning. The Auditor
and Output applications can run at the same time without conflicts. To inquire
about an external RSD for the FlexScan to allow Capture, Auditing and Output to
run simultaneously please contact your sales representative for details.

Output Data
The following information shows each Output function and it’s description:

Name Description

Processing Displays the ribbon name being processed.

Displays the total number of images to be written to

Total: disk.

Displays the total remaining images to be written to

Remaining disk.

Displays the estimated time left to finish writing the

Time Left
images to disk.

Ipm: Displays the calculated images per minute

Displays the number of errors found while writing the

Err: images to disk.

When the ribbon images have completed writing to

disk the last line will report details. It will display the
Report
total number of minutes it took to write the images,
the total count and final ipm (Images per minute).

When there are no ribbons available Output will wait

and continue to check every 10 seconds for the next
Wait message ribbon. It will continue to wait and process the next
ribbon as it becomes available.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 277

How to Output Images Manually
If a ribbon has been deleted from the NSController but not from disk it can no longer be
output using the Output.exe application. To output ribbons outside the NSController
management system the user must use the windows command prompt to access the
Output.exe program and output the ribbons manually. The following sections describe
how to output ribbons in a single file or output a single ribbon.

To manually write all the ribbons in a single file or a single ribbon to disk,
follow these steps:
1. Open a command prompt.

From the desktop click on Start, Click on Run and type in CMD in the Run dialog
box as shown below.

- OR -

Click Start, click Accessories, and then click Command Prompt.

2. At the prompt change the directory to the following using the CD command:

C:\program files\nextScan\NextStar\

278 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 or

C:\program files (84x)\nextScan\NextStar\ (If running from an external RSD with

Windows XP 64 )

Command Prompt Windows 7 Example:

3. Type in the following for writing images in:

A Single File with multiple ribbons:

>output.exe /fg /v /s “<directory path\>” /a, and Hit the Enter Key

Example: >output.exe /fg /v /s “d:\ribbon1\TestRibbons\” /a

Command Prompt Example:

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 279

 A Single Ribbon:

output.exe /v /s “<directory path\ribbon name.rib\>”, and Hit the Enter Key

Example: >output.exe /v /s “d:\ribbon1\TestRibbons\barcodes.rib”

Command Prompt Example:

✔ NOTE

If there are no ribbons to process the system will continue to wait and process
the next ribbon as it becomes available.

4. Click on Ctrl+C or the upper cancel button when done to close the Output.exe
window.

280 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 11 – Pscan

PScan
PScan application software allows the user to import scanned images from a 3 rd Party
Twain compliant scanner or import images from a directory into the NextStarPlusAuditor
as ribbon files. As ribbon files the user is able to perform quality control such as
enhancing or manipulating the imported images from a NextStarPlus Auditing workstation
(see Chapter 8 – Auditor, for details) and manage the ribbon files in the NSController
(see Chapter 4 – NSController, for details). For instructions on how to install the PScan
software please refer to the NextStarPlus Application Installation Guide for details.

✔ NOTE
rd
Images directly scanned from 3 party scanners must be TWAIN compliant.
Imported images from a source directory cannot be in multipage format.

✔ NOTE
For instructions on how to install the PScan software please refer to the
NextStarPlus Application Installation Guide for details.

Supported Bitonal\Grayscale Formats

The following matrix lists the output file formats that can be imported by PScan into the
NextStarPlus Auditor.

 CALS Raster Format (CALS) – Stores only black-and-white, 1-bit image

compressed data.

 JPEG (JPG) - Output file format which is a lossy compression technique that
is designed to compress color and grayscale continuous-tone images.

 Jpeg 2000 (JP2) - JPEG2000 is the successor of the JPEG format and
offers a higher compression without compromising quality, progressive image
reconstruction, lossy and lossless compression.

 Portable Network Graphic (PNG) – Bit-mapped graphics format.

 Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) - One of the most widely supported file
formats for storing bit-mapped formats.

 Windows Bitmap (BMP) - A standard bit-mapped graphics format used in

the Windows environment

 Zsoft Paintbrush (PCX) - A graphics file format for graphics programs

running on PCs.

 Graphics Interchange Format (GIFF) - A bit-mapped graphics file format.

GIF format is a lossless compression technique and it supports only 256
colors.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 281

How to Import Images into the NextStarPlus Auditor
The following procedures outline how to Import Images via the PScan application into the
NextStarPlus Auditor.

1. Click on the NextStarPlusPScan Icon from the NextStarPlus Auditing workstation

desktop.

The following nexStarPScan Dialog Window will appear.

282 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

2. Start New Configuration

How to create a New Configuration

 Click on File
 Click on New
 Click on Save As
 Type in Configuration setup name i.e. PScan_Setup in the file name text box
and click on Save. The new name will appear in the NextStarPlusPscan title
bar as shown below.

3. Edit Preferences

After clicking on the Edit\Preferences from the NextStarPlusPScan menu the following
dialog box will appear.

 Type in the Remote Host Address

 Change the General Setup Information based on the project.
 Select the Frame Detection Setup options
 Click on OK when done or Click on Cancel to exit without saving changes.

✔ NOTE

The PScan Preferences dialog box is similar to the Auditor’s Preferences

options. See Chapter 6 or 7 Edit\Preferences for details on the Preferences
options shown above.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 283

 4. Under the PScan Scan Control dialog box click on the Source button.

5. The following graphic shows the dialog box that will come up.

 From the Sources list click on the NextStarPlus Image Import DataSource1.0
driver or click on the desired TWAIN compliant driver for the scanner device.
 Click on Select to use the highlighted driver or click on Cancel to exit without
making changes.

✔ NOTE

The TWAIN complaint drivers must be installed on the NextStarPlus Auditing PC

Workstation in order for it to show up in the Sources list box.

6. Type in the desired data in the text fields for Job ID, Batch ID or Document ID.

Job ID
Type the name to be used for the project in the Job ID text box. This will create a
folder where the ribbon files will be imported to. The value typed in the Job ID text
box can also be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for
indexing purposes.

Batch Name
Type the name to be used as a Batch Identifier in the Batch Name text box. This will
allow the user to manage the ribbons in the Controller based on the Batch Name.
The value typed in the Batch Name text box can also be referenced in the Auditor’s
Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing purposes.

Document ID
Type the name to be used to identify the file source of the images to be imported.
Make sure you use a name that is specific and unique for each file so that previous
ribbons created are not overwritten. The value typed in the Document ID text box can
also be referenced in the Auditor’s Output Options Naming dialog box for indexing
purposes.
✔ NOTE

Auto Increment can be used in conjunction with the Document ID identifier to

automatically increment the Document ID alphabetically or numerically based on
user preference. See Chapters 6 or 7 under Auto Increment for more details.

284 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

7. Configure Auto Increment for Document ID or Batch ID (Optional) – See Chapters 6
or 7 under Auto Increment for details.

8. Select Output Batch As A Whole, Enable Continuous Numbering and check the
Last In Batch check box (optional) - See Chapters 6 or 7 for detailed explanation of
these features.

9. Under the Scan Control section click on the Start button. The Start button brings up
the NextStarPlus Image Import Twain Driver Dialog Box.

10. The following NextStarPlus Image Import Twain Driver window will be displayed.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 285

 11. Once the driver is selected the following window will come up after clicking on the
Start button:

Below outlines the steps required to configure the NextStarPlus Image Import Twain
Driver window in order to properly import images into the NextStarPlus application.

A. File Location Setup

The File Location Setup is used to configure the location of where the images will be
imported from and detail their order. There are three configurable options for choosing a
source: File, Directory or NextStarPlus Index File. The following explains all three.
File - When the File option is selected the user must choose a single file path
location to be imported. This can be done by either typing in the path or using
the browse button to locate the desired single file location.

Directory - When the Directory option is selected the operator must choose
a directory path location. This can be done by either typing in the path or
using the browse button to locate the desired directory. If there are Sub
Directories that need to be imported the operator will need to make sure the
“Include Sub Directories” check box is marked. The Sort Order will also need
to be defined.

286 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Sort Order
The options for Sort Order are File Modification Date and File Name.
Both will designate the order in which the data will imported into the
ribbon file.

File Modification – This will import the images based on the time they
were written to disk. In some cases the images to be imported may
import out of order because the file name does not sync with the time
stamped order that the images were written to disk. The reason for this is
because the nextScan software writes the images to disk utilizing the
maximum efficiency rather than based on the file name.
File Name – This will sort the images based on the file name which can
be alpha, numerical or both. The user can also pre-arrange the order of a
directory manually.

NextStarPlus Index File - When the NextStarPlus Index File option is

selected the operator can use a standard ASCII index file for specifying how
to import the images into a ribbon file. The operator will need to type in or
browse to the directory path location where the desired index file is located.

Index File Path Options

Under the Index File Options the operator can define the Full Path
Column Number. This value will instruct the software to import the data
starting with a particular column inside the index file.

✔ NOTE

For more information on how to create an ASCII index file see Chapter 8 -
NextStarPlus Auditor Software, section: “Naming Your Output”. The user can
also create a custom index file using standard ASCII protocols.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 287

 B. Input File Type Setup
The Input File Type Setup allows the user to select the file formats that
will be imported. The All Supported File Types check box is automatically
selected by default which allows for all the supported types to be
imported.

If the operator prefers to specify which file types will be imported they
must move the desired formats from the “Selected File Types” list box to
the “Available File Types” list box. This is done by highlighting the format
under the “Selected File Types” list box and using the center arrow keys
to add or remove it from the “Available File Types” list box.

12. Click on Scan to begin the Importing process or click on Done to save the settings
without executing the importing process.

The following Image Processing Progress dialog status box will appear after clicking
on the Scan button.

13. When the status bar has reached the end, this indicates that the images from the
selected file or directory have been imported into a ribbon. From this point the user
has two choices:

A. Use the browse button to choose another file or directory and click on scan to
create another ribbon. Once the next ribbon file is started the previous ribbon file
will be released to the Auditor for quality control and they can be managed by the
NSController.

✔ NOTE

When choosing this option the Auto Increment must be turned on and configured.
If the Auto Increment feature is turned off the next ribbon will overwrite the
previous ribbon since they will have the same ribbon file name. See Chapters 6
or 7 under Auto Increment for details on how to configure this feature.

B. Click on done to close the ribbon and complete the ribbon capture process.
Also, after clicking on Done the ribbon will be release to the Auditor pick list for
quality control. See Chapter 8 - NextStarPlus Auditor Software, for information on
Auditing a ribbon.

288 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Chapter 12 - NSPlus Index Database Creator
NextStarPlus Index Database Creator Overview
The nextStarPlus Index Database Creator program allows the administrative user to
create the Index Database. Once the Index Database table has been created it can be
enabled and populated from the Scan Application to index each film scanned. For
indexing details at scan time see Chapter 7 - Roll Film Capture or Chapter 8 – Microfiche
and Aperture Cards Capture, under section Menu\Indexing for details. The Index
Database table should contain all the fields that the scan operator could use for indexing
each film (roll film, microfiche or aperture cards). Once the film is scanned plus indexed
as a ribbon file it is then searchable and retrievable using the NextStarPlus Auditing
workstation. In the Auditor the user can print, e-mail, fax and perform a number of options
to an image or group of images. See Chapter 9 – NextStarPlus Auditor Software for
details. The index created is unique for each project. This section describes how to
configure the Index Database Creator basic customizable search and retrieval options.
For additional customizable features that are not a part of the basic package, please
contact [email protected] for details.

Index Database Creator

Double click on the nextStarIndexDatabaseCreator.exe Icon to bring up the Index
Database Creator dialog box.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 289

File, Edit, View and Help Menus
File
The File menu gives the user the following options for accessing the NIDD
(nextStarIndexDatabase) file: New (load defaults), Open (open existing file), Save (save
existing file), Save As (rename current file), view (view previously opened files) and Exit.

NIDD (nextStarIndex Database) Configuration Files

The nidd configuration file contains the NextStarPlus Database parameters. The File
menu allows you to create a new index database configuration file, open an existing
index database configuration file, save and perform a “save as” of an existing index
database configuration file.

Configuration files can be marked as “read-only” by following these steps:

1. Use Windows Explorer to locate the NIDD index database file
2. Right-click the index database file name.
3. Select Properties.
4. Select the General tab under Attributes.
5. Select the Read-only check box.
When the Read-only check box is enabled for an index database configuration file, the
user is able to make changes after opening the index database configuration file in
NextStarPlus; however, when the file is closed, the changes will not be saved unless the
operator uses the Save As function.
✔ NOTE

If the Create Table button is used to load the database any changes made to an
Index Database configuration (NIDD) “marked read only” will not update the file.
However, the changes will still be saved to the database index schema and will
appear when the Index Entry Administration dialog box is launched at scan time.
If this happens please contact the database administrator to remove or correct.
New
Use this command to load the default configuration in NextStarPlus. Selecting New loads
all NextStarPlus settings to the default values.

Open
Use this command to open an existing NextStarPlus Index Database configuration.

Save
Use this command to save the current NextStarPlus Index Database configuration to its
current name and directory. When you save for the first time, NextStarPlus displays the
Save As dialogue box so you can name your configuration file. If you want to change the
name and directory of an existing file before you save it, choose the Save As command.

290 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Save As
Use this command to save and name the current NextStarPlus Index Database
configuration. When you use the Save As command, a dialogue box will display so you
can name your configuration file and choose the directory where it will be saved.

Exit
Use this command to close and exit the NextStarPlus Index Database Creator
application. NextStarPlus prompts you to save if there are unsaved changes.

✔ NOTE

Saving or saving upon exiting the indexdatabasecreator will not update the
database table. To save changes to the database, see Create or Modify Table
covered at the end of this section for details.

Edit
The Edit menu will list the undo, cut, copy and paste options which are not available.

Help
Click on the Help menu to bring up the About nextStarIndexDatabaseCreator information.

New Column Definition

The New Column Definition section is used to create an index database column that will
be used for indexing scanned film so it can be easily access and retrieved. Below
describes the options available and basic configuration steps. The information that can
be indexed is customizable. The administrator will want to create an index for entering
the data that supports the required information needed for the project and any film
specific information if needed.

✔ NOTE

Only one Index Database (NIDD) can be used for a project.

Required Settings

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 291

Column Name
The Column Name is used to define an entry value in the Index Administration window
that will be used for identifying information about the film. For example this value can
represent the Roll Number, Case Number, Film type, Start\End or scanned bar code
information etc. When the Colum Name is typed in the user must also define the column
type. The below example shows a basic Column Name “Roll Number” and two Column
Names “Start\End” used for displaying date ranges indexed by the scan operator.

Colum Type
The Column Type drop down menu is used to choose the type of column such as Date,
Drop List and Edit Box.

Date – Used for typing in a date or selecting a date as shown below. How the date is
displayed will depend on the local system’s settings.

The “Range Setup” can be used to configure the date with a start and end date as shown
below.

Drop Down List – Used to create an index entry from a drop down list of pre-defined
options rather than manually typing the data. This is useful when there are multiple
options that will be used more than once.

292 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

 Edit Box – Used to type index entry in a text box as shown below. The information typed
in the text box is always case sensitive and may be limited. See Edit Box Settings
(optional), covered later on in this section for optional Edit Box settings.

Hide Column
If the Hide Column check box is enabled the information for that Column will not be
visible to the end user when the Index Entry Administration window pops up. This may
rd
be useful when the data will be automatically entered in by a 3 party program such as
confidential or other information linked to the film.

Range Setup
The Range Setup is used to create a start and an end column representing a range. This
is useful for any type of alpha or numeric range including date ranges.

Column Is Part Of Range

The Column Is Part Of Range check box is used to create two columns that will be used
to enter the start and end of a range.
✔ NOTE
If the Column Is Part Of Range check box is not enabled the range will be
entered in as a single entry format (Edit Box, Drop Down or Date) and not a
range.

How to Create a Start and End Date Range

The following example outlines the steps for creating a start and end date range. The
name fields used are only examples and may not be specific to your project.

Start Range Column

1. Type in Column Name and select Column Type.

2. Under Range Setup select the Column Is Part Of Range check box; type the name
in Name text box; and select Start radial button.

3. Click on the Add New Column button and verify the entry was added as shown
below.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 293

 End Range Column

1. Type in Column Name and select Column Type.

2. Under Range Setup select the Column Is Part Of Range check box; type in the
name in Name text box; and select End radial button.

3. Click on the Add New Column button and verify the entry was added below the first
entry as shown below.

Name
The Name text box used to for typing in the name range when creating two columns for
entering character strings, date or number ranges.

✔ NOTE
When creating a date or other type of start\end range it is important that both the
start and the end ranges both have the same Range Name. If they do not have
the same Range name an error will appear.

Start\End
The Start\End buttons are used to create the index start and end entries for a range
name.

Add New Column

The Add New Column button will create an index column based on the selected New
Column definition settings.

294 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Edit Box Settings (Optional)
Type
The Type drop down list is used to select the type of format that will be used for the index
entries. Below lists each option available and the type selected will depend on the
project’s indexing requirements.

Character Strings
Is used for entering Alpha or Numeric characters. This would include
upper case, lower case, Floating Point Numbers, Signed Integers and
Unsigned Integers.
✔ NOTE
Searching Index information using the Character Strings option is always
case sensitive. A custom plug in would need to be created if the project
requires a search range. A search range could be designed to include
upper, lower case or unique criteria.

Floating Point Numbers

Any positive or negative number that has a decimal value.

Signed Integers
Includes all whole numbers that are either negative, positive or zero.

Unsigned Integers
Includes all whole numbers from 0+ (does not include decimal or
negative numbers).

Minimum\Maximum Values
The Minimum\Maximum Value text boxes are used to limit the minimum and maximum
values typed in. Any entry typed in outside the min\max value boundary will not be
accepted and an error message will occur.

Maximum Characters
The Minimum Character text box defines the maximum character values allowed when
the Character Strings type edit box option is selected.

Character Padding
When the Character Padding check box is enabled the end user can define the Pad
Character and Pad count as described below.

Pad Character
The Pad Character text box is for using a specific keypad character other than 0 for
padding. This value will display in front of the displayed index value.

Pad Count
The Pad Count is used to type in the desired number of digits used for padding. i.e. 00 (2
digits), 000 (3 digits), or 0000 (4 digits) etc. If a length is specified for a text or mixed

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 295

 text\numeric variable the length will be truncated by the number of digits the user types
in.

Drop Down Settings (Optional)

Value
The Value text box is where the options for a drop down list are created. After typing in a
name, clicking on the Add button will add the new name to the Drop down menu options
list.

Values
The Values display pane lists the available drop down menu options for
the current column name.

Edit/Delete Selected
The Edit Selected button is used to edit any existing highlighted entry in
the Values display pane and the Delete Selected button is used to
delete any entry highlighted from the Values list.

Default Value – Optional

The Default Value option is used to select the desired drop down menu
option that will be the default selected. This is useful when a particular
Value is used more often than the other choices available.

296 nextStarPlus Software v.3.1 February 2015

Existing Columns
The Existing Columns displays the current columns created by the Name, Type, Default
Value, Range Name and Range Start\End as shown in example below:

Database Table
Open Table
The Open Table button connects to existing database and opens it up for editing.

Create Table
The Create Table button is used to add the current table to the database.

Modify Table
The Modify Table button is used to modify the current database table opened and
currently loaded.

✔ NOTE
After adding, deleting or editing the table it is important to save changes
before clicking on the Modify Table button.

nextStar Software v. 3.1 (Dec. 2012) 297